Issuu on Google+

INTRODUCTION – HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

IN–1

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL GENERAL INFORMATION 1.

2.

3.

4.

GENERAL DESCRIPTION (a) This manual is written in accordance with SAE J2008. (1) Diagnosis (2) Removing/Installing, Replacing, Disassembling/ Reassembling, Checking and Adjusting (3) Final Inspection (b) The following procedures are omitted from this manual. However, these procedures must be performed. (1) Use a jack or lift to perform operations (2) Clean all removed parts (3) Perform a visual check INDEX (a) An alphabetical INDEX section is provided at the end of the manual as a reference to help you find the item to be repaired. PREPARATION (a) Use of Special Service Tools (SST) and Special Service Materials (SSM) may be required, depending on the repair procedure. Be sure to use SST and SSM when they are required and follow the working procedure properly. A list of SST and SSM is in the "Preparation" section of this manual. REPAIR PROCEDURES (a) A component illustration is placed under the title where necessary.

IN


IN–2

INTRODUCTION – HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

(b) Non-reusable parts, grease application areas, precoated parts and torque specifications are noted in the component illustrations. Following illustration is example

IN

Example:

Filter Cap Clevis Pin

Float

Gasket

Reservoir Tank Washer

Grommet Slotted Spring Pin

Clip

12 (120,9)

Clevis Lock Nut

15 (155,11)

Push Rod Cylinder

Boot Snap Ring

Piston

N*m (kgf*cm, ft.*lbf) : Specified torque Non-reusable part N017080E12

(c) Torque specifications, grease application areas and non-reusable parts are emphasized in the procedures. HINT: There are cases where such information can only be explained by using an illustration. In these cases, torque, oil and other information are described in the illustration. (d) Only items with key points are described in the text. What to do and other details are explained using illustrations next to the text. Both the text and illustrations are accompanied by standard values and notices. Illustration

What to do and where to do

Task heading

What work will be performed

Explanation text

How to perform the task Also has information such as specifications and warnings, which are written in boldface text

5.

(e) Illustrations of similar vehicle models are sometimes used. In these cases, minor details may be different from the actual vehicle. (f) Procedures are presented in a step-by-step format. SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS (a) SPECIFICATIONS are presented in boldface text throughout the manual. The specifications are also found in the "Service Specifications" section for reference.


INTRODUCTION – HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

6.

TERMS DEFINITION

CAUTION

Possibility of injury to you or other people.

NOTICE

Possibility of damage to components being repaired.

HINT

Provides additional information to help you perform repairs.

7.

IN–3

INTERNATIONAL SYSTEM OF UNITS (a) The units used in this manual comply with the International System of Units (SI UNIT) standard. Units from the metric system and the English system are also provided. Example is as follow. Torque: 30 N*m (310 kgf*cm, 22 ft.*lbf)

IN


IN–4

INTRODUCTION – IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION

IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION A

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION AND SERIAL NUMBERS

IN

1.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (a) The vehicle identification number is stamped on the vehicle body and on the certification label, as shown in the illustration. A: Vehicle Identification Number B: Certification Label

2.

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER AND TRANSAXLE SERIAL NUMBER (a) The engine serial number is stamped on the cylinder block of the engine and the transaxle serial number is stamped on the housing as shown in the illustration. A: 1NZ-FE B: U340E C: C50

B

B124458E01

B

A

C B126436E01


IN–5

INTRODUCTION – REPAIR INSTRUCTION

REPAIR INSTRUCTION PRECAUTION 1.

BASIC REPAIR HINT (a) HINTS ON OPERATIONS

IN

1 2

3 3

5

1 2

6

Attire

• •

Vehicle protection

Prepare a grille cover, fender cover, seat cover and floor mat before starting the operation. • • •

3

Safe operation • •

4

Preparation of tools and measuring gauge

• Removal and installation, disassembly and assembly operations

• • 6

Removed parts

B124459E01

Always wear a clean uniform. Hat and safety shoes must be worn.

When working with 2 or more persons, be sure to check safety for one another. When working with the engine running, make sure to provide ventilation for exhaust fumes in the workshop. If working on high temperature, high pressure, rotating, moving, or vibrating parts, wear appropriate safety equipment and take extra care not to injure yourself or others. When jacking up the vehicle, be sure to support the specified location with a safety stand. When lifting up the vehicle, use appropriate safety equipment.

Before starting operation, prepare a tool stand, SST, gauge, oil and parts for replacement. •

5

4

• •

Diagnose with a thorough understanding of proper procedures and of the reported problem. Before removing the parts, check the general condition of the assembly and for deformation and damage. When the assembly is complicated, take notes. For example, note the total number of electrical connections, bolts, or hoses removed. Add matchmarks to insure reassembly of components in the original positions. Temporarily mark hoses and their fittings if needed. Clean and wash the removed parts if necessary and assemble them after a thorough check. Place the removed parts in a separate box to avoid mixing them up with the new parts or contaminating the new parts. For non-reusable parts such as gaskets, O-rings, and self-locking nuts, replace them with new ones as instructed in this manual. Retain the removed parts for customer inspection, if requested.


IN–6

INTRODUCTION – REPAIR INSTRUCTION

(b) JACKING UP AND SUPPORTING VEHICLE (1) Care must be taken when jacking up and supporting the vehicle. Be sure to lift and support the vehicle at the proper locations.

IN

Seal Lock Adhesive Z011554E03

INCORRECT

CORRECT

(c) PRECOATED PARTS (1) Precoated parts are bolts and nuts that are coated with a seal lock adhesive at the factory. (2) If a precoated part is retightened, loosened or moved in any way, it must be recoated with the specified adhesive. (3) When reusing a precoated part, clean off the old adhesive and dry the part with compressed air. Then apply new seal lock adhesive appropriate to that part. (4) Some seal lock agents harden slowly. You may have to wait for the seal lock adhesive to harden. (d) GASKETS (1) When necessary, use a sealer on gaskets to prevent leaks. (e) BOLTS, NUTS AND SCREWS (1) Carefully follow all the specifications for tightening torques. Always use a torque wrench. (f)

FUSES (1) When inspecting a fuse, check that the wire of the fuse is not broken. (2) When replacing fuses, be sure that the new fuse has the correct amperage rating. Do not exceed the rating or use one with a lower rating.

V035007E01

Illustration

Symbol

Part Name

Abbreviation

FUSE

FUSE


IN–7

INTRODUCTION – REPAIR INSTRUCTION Illustration

Symbol

Part Name

Abbreviation

MEDIUM CURRENT FUSE

M-FUSE

HIGH CURRENT FUSE

H-FUSE

FUSIBLE LINK

FL

CIRCUIT BREAKER

CB

(g) CLIPS (1) The removal and installation methods of typical clips used for vehicle body parts are shown in the table below. HINT: If clips are damaged during a procedure, always replace the damaged clip with a new clip.

IN


IN–8

INTRODUCTION – REPAIR INSTRUCTION Shape (Example)

IN

Illustration

Procedures

1. Remove clips with clip remover or pliers.

1. Remove the clips with clip remover or screwdriver.

1. Remove clips with wide scraper to prevent panel damage.

1. Remove clips by pushing center pin through and prying out the shell.


IN–9

INTRODUCTION – REPAIR INSTRUCTION Shape (Example)

Illustration

Procedures

1. Remove clips by unscrewing the center pin and prying out the shell.

1. Remove clips by prying out the pin and then prying out the shell.

(h) CLAWS (1) The removal and installation methods of typical claws used for vehicle body parts are shown in the table below. HINT: If claws are damaged during a procedure, always replace the damaged claws with new caps or covers. Shape (Example)

Illustration

Procedures

1. Using a screwdriver, detach the claws and remove the cap or covers.

1. Using a screwdriver, detach the claws and remove the cap or covers.

IN


IN–10

INTRODUCTION – REPAIR INSTRUCTION Shape (Example)

Illustration

IN

Procedures

1. Using a screwdriver, detach the claws and remove the cap or covers.

(i) INCORRECT

CORRECT

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF VACUUM HOSES (1) To disconnect a vacuum hose, pull and twist from the end of the hose. Do not pull from the middle of the hose as this may cause damage.

D031750E01

(2) When disconnecting vacuum hoses, use tags to identify where they should be reconnected. (3) After completing any hose related repairs, double check that the vacuum hoses are properly connected. The label under the hood shows the proper layout. (4) When using a vacuum gauge, never force the hose onto a connector that is too large. If a hose has been stretched, it may leak air. Use a stepdown adapter if necessary.

D025064E01

(j) L1

L2

D002612E02

TORQUE WHEN USING TORQUE WRENCH WITH EXTENSION TOOL


IN–11

INTRODUCTION – REPAIR INSTRUCTION L1

(1) Use the formula below to calculate special torque values for situations where SST or an extension tool is combined with the torque wrench. Formula: T' = L2/(L1 + L2) * T

L2

T' T

Torque {N*m (kgf*cm, ft.*lbf)}

L1

Length of SST or extension tool {cm (in.)}

L2

Length of torque wrench {cm (in.)}

D001201E01

2.

Reading of torque wrench {N*m (kgf*cm, ft.*lbf)}

NOTICE: If an extension tool or SST is combined with a torque wrench and the wrench is used to tighten to a torque specification in this manual, the actual torque will be excessive and parts will be damaged. FOR VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH SRS AIRBAG AND SEAT BELT PRETENSIONER The YARIS is equipped with a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). CAUTION: Failure to carry out the service operations in the correct sequence could cause the SRS to unexpectedly deploy during servicing and lead to serious injury. Furthermore, if a mistake is made when servicing SRS, it is possible that the SRS may fail to operate properly. Before servicing (including removal or installation of parts, inspection or replacement), be sure to read the following section carefully. (a) GENERAL NOTICE (1) As malfunctions of the SRS are difficult to confirm, the Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) become the most important source of information when troubleshooting. When troubleshooting the SRS, always check the DTCs before disconnecting the battery.

IN


IN–12

IN

INTRODUCTION – REPAIR INSTRUCTION

(2) Work must be started at least 90 seconds after the engine switch is turned off and after the cable is disconnected from the negative (-) battery terminal. The SRS is equipped with a back-up power source. If work is started within 90 seconds after turning the engine switch off and disconnecting the cable from the negative (-) battery terminal, the SRS may deploy. When the cable is disconnected from the negative (-) battery terminal, clock and audio system memory is erased. Before starting work, make a note of the settings of each memory system. When work is finished, reset the clock and audio system as before. CAUTION: Never use a back-up power source (battery or other) to avoid erasing system memory. The back-up power source may inadvertently power the SRS and cause it to deploy. (3) In minor collisions where the SRS does not deploy, the steering pad, front passenger airbag assembly, curtain shield airbag assembly, front seat airbag assembly and front seat outer belt assembly should be inspected before further use of the vehicle. (4) Never use SRS parts from another vehicle. When replacing parts, use new parts. (5) Before repairs, remove the airbag sensor assemblies if impacts are likely to be applied to the sensor during repairs. (6) Never disassemble and attempt to repair all airbag sensor assemblies, all airbag assemblies. 1. Steering pad 2. Front passenger airbag assembly 3. Curtain shield airbag assembly 4. Front seat airbag assembly 5. Front seat outer belt assembly (7) Replace the airbag sensor assemblies and the airbag assemblies if: 1) damage has occurred from being dropped, or 2) cracks, dents or other defects in the case, bracket or connector are present. (8) Do not directly expose the airbag sensor assembly or airbag assembly to hot air or flames. (9) Use a voltmeter / ohmmeter with high impedance (minimum=10 kâ„Ś) for troubleshooting electrical circuits. (10)Information labels are attached to the SRS components. Follow the instructions on the labels. (11)After work on the SRS is completed, check the SRS warning light.


INTRODUCTION – REPAIR INSTRUCTION

Mark B124565E01

IN–13

(b) SPIRAL CABLE (1) The steering wheel must be fitted correctly to the steering column with the spiral cable at the neutral position, as cable disconnection and other problems may occur. Refer to the information about correct installation of the steering wheel. (c) STEERING PAD (1) Always place a removed or new steering pad surface upward as shown in the illustration. Placing the horn button with the pad surface facing down could cause a serious accident if the airbag inflates. Also, do not place anything on top of the horn button.

Example: CORRECT

INCORRECT

D025096E03

(2) Never measure the resistance of the airbag squib. This may cause the airbag to inflate, which could cause serious injury. Example:

Z013950E02

(3) Grease or detergents of any kind should not be applied to the horn button. (4) Store the horn button assembly in an area where the ambient temperature is below 93°C (200°F), the humidity is not high and there is no electrical noise. (5) When using electric welding anywhere on the vehicle, disconnect the airbag ECU connectors (4 pins). These connectors contain shorting springs. This feature reduces the possibility of the airbag deploying due to currents entering the squib wiring.

IN


IN–14

INTRODUCTION – REPAIR INSTRUCTION

(6) When disposing of the vehicle or the horn button assembly by itself, the airbag should be deployed using SST before disposal. Activate the airbag in a safe place away from electrical noise. (d) FRONT PASSENGER AIRBAG ASSEMBLY (1) Always place a removed or new front passenger airbag assembly with the pad surface facing upward as shown in the illustration. Placing the airbag assembly with the airbag inflation direction facing down could cause a serious accident if the airbag inflates.

IN

Example: CORRECT

INCORRECT

D027522E02

(2) Never measure the resistance of the airbag squib. This may cause the airbag to inflate, which could cause serious injury. Example:

Z013951E02

(3) Grease or detergents of any kind should not be applied to the front passenger airbag assembly. (4) Store the airbag assembly in an area where the ambient temperature is below 93°C(200°F), the humidity is not high and there is no electrical noise. (5) When using electric welding anywhere on the vehicle, disconnect the airbag ECU connectors (4 pins). These connectors contain shorting springs. This feature reduces the possibility of the airbag deploying due to currents entering the squib wiring. (6) When disposing of the vehicle or the airbag assembly unit by itself, the airbag should be deployed using SST before disposal. Activate in a safe place, away from electrical noise.


INTRODUCTION – REPAIR INSTRUCTION

IN–15

(e) CURTAIN SHIELD AIRBAG ASSEMBLY (1) Always place a removed or new curtain shield airbag assembly in a clear plastic bag, and keep it in a safe place. Example:

CORRECT

IN

INCORRECT

Clear Plastic Bag D031641E01

CAUTION: The plastic bag is not reusable. NOTICE: Never disassemble the curtain shield airbag assembly. (2) Never measure the resistance of the airbag squib. This may cause the airbag to inflate, which could cause serious injury. Example:

D030931E01

(f)

(3) Grease or detergents of any kind should not be applied to the curtain shield airbag assembly. (4) Store the airbag assembly in an area where the ambient temperature is below 93°C (200°F), the humidity is not high and there is no electrical noise. (5) When using electric welding anywhere on the vehicle, disconnect the airbag ECU connectors (4 pins). These connectors contain shorting springs. This feature reduces the possibility of the airbag deploying due to currents entering the squib wiring. (6) When disposing of a vehicle or the airbag assembly unit by itself, the airbag should be deployed using SST before disposal. Activate in a safe place, away from electrical noise. FRONT SEAT AIRBAG ASSEMBLY (1) Always place removed or new front seat airbag assembly with the airbag inflation direction facing up.


IN–16

INTRODUCTION – REPAIR INSTRUCTION

(2) Never measure the resistance of the airbag squib. This may cause the airbag to inflate, which could cause serious injury. Example:

IN

D030924E03

(3) Grease or detergents of any kind should not be applied to the front seat airbag assembly. (4) Store the airbag assembly in an area where the ambient temperature is below 93°C (200°F), the humidity is not high and there is no electrical noise. (5) When using electric welding anywhere on the vehicle, disconnect the airbag ECU connectors (2 pins). These connectors contain shorting springs. This feature reduces the possibility of the airbag deploying due to currents entering the squib wiring. (6) When disposing of a vehicle or the airbag assembly unit by itself, the airbag should be deployed using SST before disposal. Activate in a safe place, away from electrical noise. (g) FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY (SEAT BELT PRETENSIONER) (1) Never measure the resistance of the seat outer belt. This may cause the pretensioner of the seat belt to activate, which could cause serious injury. Example:

D026613E02

(2) Never disassemble the seat outer belt. (3) Never install the seat outer belt on another vehicle. (4) Store the seat outer belt in an area where the ambient temperature is below 80°C (176°F), the humidity is not high and there is no electrical noise.


INTRODUCTION – REPAIR INSTRUCTION

IN–17

(5) When using electric welding anywhere on the vehicle, disconnect the airbag ECU connectors (2 pins). These connectors contain shorting springs. This feature reduces the possibility of the airbag deploying due to currents entering the squib wiring. (6) When disposing of a vehicle or the seat outer belt unit by itself, the seat outer belt should be activated before disposal. Activate in a safe place, away from electrical noise. (7) As the seat outer belt is hot after being activated, allow some time for it to cool down sufficiently before disposal. Never apply water to try to cool down the seat outer belt. (8) Grease, detergents, oil or water should not be applied to the front seat outer belt. (h) AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY (1) Never reuse an airbag sensor assembly that has been involved in a collision where the SRS has deployed. (2) The connectors to the airbag sensor assembly should be connected or disconnected with the sensor placed on the floor. If the connectors are connected or disconnected while the airbag sensor assembly is not placed on the floor, the SRS may activate. (3) Work must be started at least 90 seconds after the engine switch is turned off and the cable is disconnected from the negative (-) battery terminal, even if only loosening the set bolts of the airbag sensor assembly. (i) WIRE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (1) The SRS wire harness is integrated with the instrument panel wire harness assembly. All the connectors in the system are a standard yellow color. If the SRS wire harness becomes disconnected or the connector becomes broken, repair or replace it. 3. Negative (-) Cable

Negative (-) Battery Terminal

D033608E02

ELECTRONIC CONTROL (a) REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF BATTERY TERMINAL NOTICE: Certain systems need to be initialized after disconnecting and reconnecting the cable from the negative (-) battery terminal. (1) Before performing electronic work, disconnect the cable from the negative (-) battery terminal to prevent component and wire damage caused by accidental short circuits. (2) When disconnecting the cable, turn the engine switch and headlight dimmer switch OFF and loosen the cable nut completely. Perform these operations without twisting or prying the cable. Then disconnect the cable.

IN


IN–18

INTRODUCTION – REPAIR INSTRUCTION

(3) Clock settings, radio settings, audio system memory, DTCs and other data are erased when the cable is disconnected from the negative (-) battery terminal. Write down any necessary data before disconnecting the cable.

IN

INCORRECT

D031751E01

4.

(b) HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC PARTS (1) Do not open the cover or case of the ECU unless absolutely necessary. If the IC terminals are touched, the IC may be rendered inoperative by static electricity. (2) Do not pull the wires when disconnecting electronic connectors. Pull the connector itself. (3) Be careful not to drop electronic components, such as sensors or relays. If they are dropped on a hard surface, they should be replaced. (4) When cleaning the engine with steam, protect the electronic components, air filter and emission-related components from water. (5) Never use an impact wrench to remove or install temperature switches or temperature sensors. (6) When measuring the resistance of a wire connector, insert the tester probe carefully to prevent terminals from bending. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF FUEL CONTROL PARTS (a) PLACE FOR REMOVING AND INSTALLING FUEL SYSTEM PARTS (1) Work in a location with good air ventilation that does not have welders, grinders, drills, electric motors, stoves, or any other ignition sources. (2) Never work in a pit or near a pit as vaporized fuel will collect in those places. (b) REMOVING AND INSTALLING FUEL SYSTEM PARTS (1) Prepare a fire extinguisher before starting the operation. (2) To prevent static electricity, install a ground wire to the fuel changer, vehicle and fuel tank, and do not spray the surrounding area with water. Be careful when performing work in this area, as the work surface will become slippery. Do not clean up gasoline spills with water, as this may cause the gasoline to spread, and possibly create a fire hazard. (3) Avoid using electric motors, working lights and other electric equipment that can cause sparks or high temperatures. (4) Avoid using iron hammers as they may create sparks. (5) Dispose of fuel-contaminated cloth separately using a fire resistant container.


INTRODUCTION – REPAIR INSTRUCTION

5.

D001563E01

Spring Type Clamp

IN–19

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF ENGINE INTAKE PARTS (a) If any metal particles enter inlet system parts, this may damage the engine. (b) When removing and installing inlet system parts, cover the openings of the removed parts and engine openings. Use gummed tape or other suitable materials. (c) When installing inlet system parts, check that no metal particles have entered the engine or the installed parts.

6.

HANDLING OF HOSE CLAMPS (a) Before removing the hose, check the clamp position so that it can be reinstalled in the same position. (b) Replace any deformed or dented clamps with new ones. (c) When reusing a hose, attach the clamp on the clamp track portion of the hose. (d) For a spring type clamp, you may want to spread the tabs slightly after installation by pushing in the direction of the arrows as shown in the illustration.

7.

FOR VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS (a) Install the antenna far away from the ECU and sensors of the vehicle electronic systems as possible. (b) Install an antenna feeder at least 20 cm (7.87 in.) away from the ECU and sensors of the vehicle electronic systems. For details about ECU and sensors locations, refer to the section on the applicable components. (c) Keep the antenna and feeder separate from other wirings as much as possible. This will prevent signals from the communication equipment from affecting vehicle equipment and vice-versa. (d) Check that the antenna and feeder are correctly adjusted. (e) Do not install any high-powered mobile communication system. FOR VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH CATALYTIC CONVERTER CAUTION: If a large amount of unburned gasoline or gasoline vapors flow into the converter, it may cause overheating and create a fire hazard. To prevent this, observe the following precautions. (a) Use only unleaded gasoline. (b) Avoid idling the engine for more than 20 minutes. (c) Avoid performing unnecessary spark jump tests. (1) Perform a spark jump test only when absolutely necessary. Perform this test as rapidly as possible. (2) While testing, never race the engine.

Clamp Track B107182E01

D020025E01

8.

IN


IN–20

IN

INTRODUCTION – REPAIR INSTRUCTION

(d) Avoid a prolonged engine compression measurement. Engine compression measurements must be performed as rapidly as possible. (e) Do not run the engine when the fuel tank is nearly empty. This may cause the engine to misfire and create an extra load on the converter.


INTRODUCTION – REPAIR INSTRUCTION

IN–21

VEHICLE LIFT AND SUPPORT LOCATIONS 1.

2.

3.

Rubber Attatchment

D100288E01

NOTICE ABOUT VEHICLE CONDITION WHEN JACKING UP THE VEHICLE (a) The vehicle must be unloaded before jacking up/ lifting up the vehicle. Never jack up/lift up a heavily loaded vehicle. (b) When removing heavy parts such as the engine and transaxle, the center of gravity of the vehicle may shift. To stabilize the vehicle, place a balance weight in a location where it will not roll or shift, or use a mission jack to hold the jacking support. NOTICE FOR USING 4 POST LIFT (a) Follow the safety procedures outlined in the lift instruction manual. (b) Use precautionary measures to prevent the free wheel beam from damaging tires or wheels. (c) Using a wheel stopper, secure the vehicle. NOTICE FOR USING JACK AND SAFETY STAND (a) Work in a flat area and use a wheel stopper at all times. (b) Use safety stand with a rubber attachment, as shown in the illustration. (c) Apply the jack and rigid rack to the specified location on the vehicle. The jack should not be used without the rigid rack. (d) When jacking up the front wheels, release the parking brake and place wheel stoppers only behind the rear wheels. When jacking up the rear wheels, place wheel stoppers only in front of the front wheels. (e) When jacking up only the front wheels or only the rear wheels, place wheel stoppers on both sides of the wheels touching the ground. (f) When lowering a vehicle with its front wheels jacked up, release the parking brake and place wheel stoppers only in front of the rear wheels. When lowering a vehicle with its rear wheels jacked up, place wheel stoppers only behind the front wheels. NOTICE: Use the correct jack-up points. Do not use any other part of the vehicle as a jack-up point.

IN


IN–22

INTRODUCTION – REPAIR INSTRUCTION

380 mm

IN Hatchback:

Do not place jack at these points

390 mm

Sedan:

Do not place jack at these points

: JACK POSITION : SUPPORT POSITION, PANTOGRAPH JACK POSITION : CENTER OF VEHICLE GRAVITY (unloaded condition) B146400E01

4.

NOTICE FOR USING SWING ARM TYPE LIFT (a) Follow the safety procedures outlined in its instruction manual. (b) Use cradle with a rubber attachment as shown in the illustration.


INTRODUCTION – REPAIR INSTRUCTION

5.

IN–23

(c) When using the lift, its center should be as close to the vehicle's center of gravity as possible. (L becomes short.) (d) Set the vehicle on the cradle as level as possible. Then match the groove of the cradle to the safety stand support location. NOTICE: Do not raise the vehicle too high because the vehicle may become unstable. (e) Be sure to lock the swing arm during the operation. (f) Lift the vehicle up off the ground and shake it to make sure that it is stable. NOTICE FOR USING PLATE TYPE LIFT (a) Follow safety procedures outlined in its instruction manual. (b) Use a plate lift attachment. (c) Refer to the table below to determine how to properly set the vehicle.

Right and left set position

Place the vehicle over the center of the lift.

Front and rear set position

• •

Align the bottom edge of the attachments with the cushion gum ends of the plate (A and C). Align the upper edge of one of the attachments (B) with the rocker flange front side notch.

(d) Lift the vehicle up off the ground, and shake it to make sure that the it is stable.

IN


IN–24

INTRODUCTION – REPAIR INSTRUCTION

Swing Arm Type Lift

Center of Lift

IN L

: CENTER OF VEHICLE GRAVITY (unloaded condition) Rubber Attachment Plate Type Lift

Attachment Dimensions 85 mm (3.35 in.) 70 mm (2.76 in.)

B A

Attachment

C

100 mm (3.94 in.)

200 mm (7.87 in.)

B124567E01


IN–25

INTRODUCTION – REPAIR INSTRUCTION

CUSTOMIZE PARAMETERS HINT: The following can be customized. NOTICE: • When the customer requests a change in a function, first make sure that the function can be customized. • Be sure to make a note of the current settings before customizing. • When troubleshooting a function, first make sure that the function is set to the default setting. 1. THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM Theft Deterrent System Display (Item)

Default

Contents

Setting

PASSIVE MODE (Passive Arming Mode)

OFF

In passive arming mode, theft deterrent system switched from arming preparation state to armed state 30 seconds after both of following operations performed. • Key removed from ignition key cylinder • All doors closed (not locked) In passive arming mode, if following operations are not performed within 14 seconds of door being opened while in armed state, theft deterrent system determines that condition as theft and switches to alarm arming sounding state. • Battery reconnected • Key inserted into ignition key cylinder and ignition switch turned from OFF to ON • Any door unlocked using key

ON/OFF

WARNING (HORN) (Warning horn)

ON

Allows vehicle horn and security horn to be used as warning devices

ON/OFF

ENTRY DELAY (Entry delay time)

14 seconds

Changes entry delay time (time before warning starts) for passive arming mode

0 /14 /30 (seconds)

2.

HINT: Sensitivity adjustments are difficult to confirm. Check by driving the customer's vehicle. LIGHTING SYSTEM

Illuminated Entry Display (Item)

Default

Contents

Setting

LIGHTING TIME (Lighting Time)

15 seconds

Changes illumination duration after door closure. (It will quickly fade out in case of turning the ignition switch ON.)

7.5 seconds / 15 seconds / 30seconds

I/L ON /ACC OFF (Room light illuminates when ignition switch turned off)

ON

Illuminates light when ignition switch turned on (ACC). (Room light illuminated when interior light switch in DOOR position)

ON / OFF

I/L ON / UNLOCK (Room light illuminates when door key unlocked.)

ON

Function to light up the room light, when unlocking with the door key cylinder. (Room light illuminated when interior light switch in DOOR position)

ON/OFF

IN


IN–26

INTRODUCTION – REPAIR INSTRUCTION

3.

HINT: Sensitivity adjustments are difficult to confirm. Check by driving the customer's vehicle. POWER DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM

Power Door Lock Control System

IN

Display (Item)

Default

Contents

Setting

UNLK/KEY TWICE

ON

Unlocks only driver side door when driver side door key cylinder turned to unlocks once, and unlocks all doors when turned to unlock twice. For OFF setting, turning it once unlocks all doors

ON / OFF

4.

WIRELESS DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM

Wireless Door Lock Control System Display (Item)

Default

Contents

Setting

HAZARD ANS BACK

ON

When wireless lock switch on transmitter pressed, illuminates all hazard warning lights once. When unlock switch pressed, all hazard warning lights illuminate twice

ON / OFF

WIRELESS OPER

ON

ON /OFF of wireless door lock function

ON / OFF

ALARM FUNCTION

ON

Operates security alarm when panic switch on transmitter continuously pressed for 1 second

ON / OFF

UNLOCK/2 OPER

All door

Function that unlocks driver side door when unlock switch on transmitter is pressed once, and unlocks all doors when pressed twice. if setting is OFF, pressing unlock switch once makes all doors unlock.

ON / OFF

AUTO LOCK DELAY

30 seconds

Time until relocking after unlocking with wireless door lock function

60 seconds / 30 seconds

5.

GAUGE SYSTEM

Combination Meter Assembly Display (Item)

Default

Contents

Setting

KEY REMIND SOUND

NORMAL

Changes key reminder buzzer intervals

FAST / NORMAL / SLOW

LIGHT REMIND

ON

Turns key reminder light ON and OFF

ON / OFF

SEAT BELT WARN

D/P ON

Turns seat belt warning buzzer ON and OFF

D/P ON / D ON / P ON / D/P OFF

UNITS BY REGION

Different every region

Changes drive monitor display units

KM/L JP / KM/L / ML/G US / ML/ G UK / KM/G


IN–26

INTRODUCTION – HOW TO TROUBLESHOOT ECU CONTROLLED SYSTEMS

HOW TO TROUBLESHOOT ECU CONTROLLED SYSTEMS GENERAL INFORMATION

IN

A large number of ECU controlled systems are used in the YARIS. In general, ECU controlled systems are considered to be very intricate, requiring a high level of technical knowledge to troubleshoot. However, most problem checking procedures only involve inspecting the ECU controlled system's circuits one by one. An adequate understanding of the system and a basic knowledge of electricity is enough to perform effective troubleshooting, accurate diagnoses and necessary repairs. FOR USING INTELLIGENT TESTER • Before using the intelligent tester, read the tester operator's manual thoroughly. • If the tester cannot communicate with the ECU controlled systems when the tester is connected to the DLC3 with the engine switch on (IG) and the tester turned ON, there is a problem on the vehicle side or tester side. (a)If communication is normal when the tester is connected to another vehicle, inspect the diagnosis data link line (Bus (+) line) or ECU power circuit of the vehicle. (b)If communication is still not possible when the tester is connected to another vehicle, the problem is probably in the tester itself. Perform the Self Test procedures outlined in the tester operator's manual.


INTRODUCTION – HOW TO TROUBLESHOOT ECU CONTROLLED SYSTEMS

IN–27

HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING 1.

1

OPERATION FLOW HINT: Perform troubleshooting in accordance with the procedures below. The following is an outline of basic troubleshooting procedures. Confirm the troubleshooting procedures for the circuit you are working on before beginning troubleshooting.

VEHICLE BROUGHT TO WORKSHOP

NEXT

2

INSPECT BATTERY VOLTAGE Standard voltage: 11 to 14 V If the voltage is below 11 V, recharge or replace the battery before proceeding.

NEXT

3

SYMPTOM CONFIRMATION AND DTC (AND FREEZE FRAME DATA) CHECK (a) Visually check the wire harnesses, connectors and fuses for open and short circuits. (b) Warm up the engine to the normal operating temperature. (c) Confirm the problem symptoms and conditions, and check for DTCs Result Result

Proceed to

DTC is output

A

DTC is not output

B

B

Go to step 6

A

4

DTC CHART (a) Check the results obtained in step 4. Then find the output DTC in the DTC chart. Look at the "Trouble Area" column for a list of potentially malfunctioning circuits and / or parts. NEXT

Go to step 7

IN


IN–28

5

INTRODUCTION – HOW TO TROUBLESHOOT ECU CONTROLLED SYSTEMS

PROBLEM SYMPTOMS CHART (a) Check the results obtained in step 4. Then find the problem symptoms in the problem symptoms table. Look at the "Suspected Area" column for a list of potentially malfunctioning circuits and / or parts.

IN NEXT

6

CIRCUIT INSPECTION OR PARTS INSPECTION (a) Confirm the malfunctioning circuit or part.

NEXT

7

ADJUST, REPAIR OR REPLACE (a) Adjust, repair or replace the malfunctioning circuit or parts.

NEXT

8

CONFIRMATION TEST (a) After the adjustment, repairs or replacement, confirm that the malfunction no longer exists. If the malfunction does not reoccur, perform a confirmation test under the same conditions and in the same environment as when the malfunction occurred the first time.

NEXT END 2.

What

CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS HINT: • In troubleshooting, confirm that the problem symptoms have been accurately identified. Preconceptions should be discarded in order to make an accurate judgment. To clearly understand what the problem symptoms are, it is extremely important to ask the customer about the problem and the conditions at the time the malfunction occurred. • Gather as much information as possible for reference. Past problems that seem unrelated may also help in some cases. • The following 5 items are important points in the problem analysis:

Vehicle model, system name

When

Date, time, occurrence frequency

Where

Road conditions


IN–29

INTRODUCTION – HOW TO TROUBLESHOOT ECU CONTROLLED SYSTEMS Under what conditions?

Running conditions, driving conditions, weather conditions

How did it happen?

Problem symptoms

3.

SYMPTOM CONFIRMATION AND DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE HINT: The diagnostic system in the YARIS has various functions. • The first function is the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) check. A DTC is a code stored in the ECU memory whenever a malfunction in the signal circuits to the ECU occurs. In a DTC check, a previous malfunction's DTC can be checked by a technician during troubleshooting. • Another function is the Input Signal Check, which checks if the signals from various switches are sent to the ECU correctly. By using these functions, the problem areas can be narrowed down and troubleshooting is more effective. Diagnostic functions are incorporated in the following system in the YARIS.

System

DTC Check (Normal Mode)

DTC Check (Check Mode)

Freeze-frame Data

Sensor Check/ Test Mode (Input Signal Check)

Data List

Active Test

Customize Parameter

1NZ-FE SFI SYSTEM

{

{

{

-

{

{

-

U340E AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE SYSTEM

{

{

-

-

{

{

-

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

{

-

{

{

{

{

-

ELECTRONIC POWER STEERING SYSTEM

{

-

-

-

{

-

-

AIR CONDITIONIN G SYSTEM

{

-

-

-

{

{

-

AIRBAG SYSTEM

{

{

-

-

{

-

-

OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATI ON SYSTEM

{

{

-

-

{

-

-

SEAT BELT WARNING SYSTEM

-

-

-

-

{

{

{

THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM

{

-

-

-

{

{

{

ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM

{

-

-

-

{

{

-

CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM

{

-

-

-

{

-

-

IN


IN–30

IN

INTRODUCTION – HOW TO TROUBLESHOOT ECU CONTROLLED SYSTEMS

System

DTC Check (Normal Mode)

DTC Check (Check Mode)

Freeze-frame Data

Sensor Check/ Test Mode (Input Signal Check)

Data List

Active Test

Customize Parameter

LIGHTING SYSTEM

-

-

-

-

{

{

{

POWER DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM

-

-

-

-

{

{

{

WIRELESS DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM

{

-

-

-

{

{

{

KEY REMINDER WARNING SYSTEM

-

-

-

-

{

-

{

METER / GAUGE SYSTEM

{

-

-

-

{

{

{

CAN COMMUNICAT ION SYSTEM

{

-

-

-

-

-

-

• In the DTC check, it is very important to determine whether the problem indicated by the DTC is either: 1) still occurring, or 2) occurred in the past but has since returned to normal. In addition, the DTC should be compared to the problem symptom to see if they are related. For this reason, DTCs should be checked before and after confirmation of symptoms (i.e., whether or not problem symptoms exist) to determine current system conditions, as shown in the flowchart below. • Never skip the DTC check. Failing to check DTCs may, depending on the case, result in unnecessary troubleshooting for systems operating normally or lead to repairs not related to the problem. Follow the procedures listed in the flowchart in the correct order. • The following flowchart show how to proceed with troubleshooting using the DTC check. Directions from the flowchart will indicate how to proceed either to DTC troubleshooting or to the troubleshooting of each problem symptom.

1

DTC CHECK

NEXT

2 NEXT

MAKE A NOTE OF DTCS DISPLAYED AND THEN CLEAR THE MEMORY


INTRODUCTION – HOW TO TROUBLESHOOT ECU CONTROLLED SYSTEMS

3

IN–31

SYMPTOM CONFIRMATION Result: Result

Proceed to

No symptoms exist

A

Symptoms exist

B

a

Go to step 5

b

4

SIMULATION TEST USING THE SYMPTOM SIMULATION METHODS

NEXT

5

DTC CHECK Result: Result

Proceed to

DTC is not output

A

DTC is output

B

B

Troubleshooting of problem indicated by DTC

A

6

SYMPTOM CONFIRMATION Result: Result

Proceed to

Symptoms exist

A

No symptoms exist

B

If a DTC was displayed in the initial DTC check, the problem may have occurred in a wire harness or connector in that circuit in the past. Check the wire harness and connectors. IN-34 B

System normal

A TROUBLESHOOTING OF EACH PROBLEM SYMPTOM The problem is still occurring in a place other than the diagnostic circuit (the DTC displayed first is either for a past problem or a secondary problem).

IN


IN–32

INTRODUCTION – HOW TO TROUBLESHOOT ECU CONTROLLED SYSTEMS

4.

IN

SYMPTOM SIMULATION HINT: The most difficult case in troubleshooting is when no problem symptoms occur. In such a case, a thorough problem analysis must be carried out. A simulation of the same or similar conditions and environment in which the problem occurred in the customer's vehicle should be carried out. No matter how much skill or experience a technician has, troubleshooting without confirming the problem symptoms will lead to important repairs being overlooked and mistakes or delays. For example: With a problem that only occurs when the engine is cold or as a result of vibration caused by the road during driving, the problem can never be determined if the symptoms are being checked on a stationary vehicle or a vehicle with a warmed-up engine. Vibration, heat or water penetration (moisture) is difficult to reproduce. The symptom simulation tests below are effective substitutes for the conditions and can be applied on a stationary vehicle. Important points in the symptom simulation test: In the symptom simulation test, the problem symptoms as well as the problem area or parts must be confirmed. First, narrow down the possible problem circuits according to the symptoms. Then, connect the tester and carry out the symptom simulation test, judging whether the circuit being tested is defective or normal. Also, confirm the problem symptoms at the same time. Refer to the problem symptoms table for each system to narrow down the possible causes. (a) VIBRATION METHOD: When malfunction seems to occur as a result of vibration. (1) PART AND SENSOR Apply slight vibration with a finger to the part of the sensor suspected to be the cause of the problem, and check whether or not the malfunction occurs. NOTICE: Applying strong vibration to relays may open relays (2) CONNECTORS Slightly shake the connector vertically and horizontally. (3) WIRE HARNESS Slightly shake the wire harness vertically and horizontally. HINT: The connector joint and fulcrum of the vibration are the major areas that should be checked thoroughly.

Vibrate Slightly

Shake Slightly

Vibrate Slightly B071602E01


INTRODUCTION – HOW TO TROUBLESHOOT ECU CONTROLLED SYSTEMS

IN–33

(b) HEAT METHOD: When a malfunction seems to occur when the area in question is heated. (1) Heat the component that is the possible cause of the malfunction with a hair dryer or similar device. Check if the malfunction occurs. NOTICE: • Do not heat to more than 60°C (140°F). Exceeding this temperature may damage components. • Do not apply heat directly to the parts in the ECU. (c) WATER SPRINKLING METHOD: When a malfunction seems to occur on a rainy day or in high-humidity. (1) Sprinkle water onto the vehicle and check if the malfunction occurs. NOTICE: • Never sprinkle water directly into the engine compartment. Indirectly change the temperature and humidity by spraying water onto the front of the radiator. • Never apply water directly onto the electronic components. HINT: If the vehicle has or had a water leakage problem, the leakage may have damaged the ECU or connections. Look for evidence of corrosion or short circuits. Proceed with caution during water tests.

D025085E02

ON

5.

B002389E01

Item DTC No. Detection Item Trouble Area See Page

(d) HIGH ELECTRICAL LOAD METHOD: When a malfunction seems to occur when electrical load is excessive. (1) Turn on the heater blower, headlight, rear window defogger and all other electrical loads. Check if the malfunction reoccurs. DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART Look for output Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) (from the DTC checks) in the appropriate section's Diagnostic Trouble Code Chart. Use the chart to determine the trouble area and the proper inspection procedure. A description of each of the chart's columns are below. Description Indicates the diagnostic trouble code Indicates the system or details of the problem Indicates the suspect areas of the problem Indicates the page where the inspection procedures for each circuit is to be found, or gives instruction for checking and repairs.

IN


IN–34

INTRODUCTION – HOW TO TROUBLESHOOT ECU CONTROLLED SYSTEMS

6.

IN

PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE When a "Normal" code is output during a DTC check but the problem is still occurring, use the Problem Symptoms Table. The suspected areas (circuits or parts) for each problem symptoms are in the table. The suspected areas are listed in order of probability. A description of each of the chart's columns are below. HINT: In some cases, the problem is not detected by the diagnostic system even though a problem symptom is present. It is possible that the problem is occurring outside the detection range of the diagnostic system, or that the problem is occurring in a completely different system.

Item

Description

Problem Symptom

-

Circuit Inspection, Inspection Order

Indicates the order in which the circuits need to be checked

Circuit or Part Name

Indicates the circuit or part which needs to be checked

See Page

Indicates the page where the flowchart for each circuit is located

7.

CIRCUIT INSPECTION A description of the main areas of each circuit inspection is below.

Item

Description

Circuit Description

The major role, operation of the circuit and its component parts are explained.

Diagnostic Trouble Code No. and Detection item

Indicates the diagnostic trouble codes, diagnostic trouble code settings and suspected areas for a problem

Wiring diagram

This shows a wiring diagram of the circuit. Use this diagram together with ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAM to thoroughly understand the circuit. Wire colors are indicated by an alphabetical code. B = Black L = Blue R = Red BR = Brown LG = Light Green V = Violet G = Green O = Orange W = White GR = Gray P = Pink Y = Yellow SB = Sky Blue The first letter indicates the basic wire color and the second letter indicates the color of the stripe.

Inspection Procedures

Indicates the condition of the connector of the ECU during the check

Use the inspection procedures to determine if the circuit is normal or abnormal. If abnormal, use the inspection procedures to determine whether the problem is located in the sensors, actuators, wire harnesses or ECU. Connector being checked is connected. Connections of tester are indicated by (+) or (-) after the terminal name. Connector being checked is disconnected. The inspections between a connector and body ground, information about the body ground is not shown in the illustration.


INTRODUCTION – HOW TO TROUBLESHOOT ECU CONTROLLED SYSTEMS

IN–35

ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1.

INCORRECT

INCORRECT

CORRECT

D032092E01

Looseness of Crimping

Core Wire

Terminal Deformation Pull Lightly D025087E03

BASIC INSPECTION (a) WHEN MEASURING RESISTANCE OF ELECTRONIC PARTS (1) Unless otherwise stated, all resistance measurements should be made at an ambient temperature of 20°C (68°F). Resistance measurements may be inaccurate if measured at high temperatures, i.e. immediately after the vehicle has been running. Measurements should be made after the engine has cooled down. (b) HANDLING CONNECTORS (1) When disconnecting a connector, first squeeze the mating halves tightly together to release the lock, and then press the lock claw and separate the connector. (2) When disconnecting a connector, do not pull on the harnesses. Grasp the connector directly and separate it. (3) Before connecting a connector, check that there are no deformed, damaged, loose or missing terminals. (4) When connecting a connector, press firmly until it locks with a "click" sound. (5) If checking a connector with a TOYOTA electrical tester, check the connector from the backside (harness side) using a mini test lead. NOTICE: • As a waterproof connector cannot be checked from the backside, check it by connecting a sub-harness. • Do not damage the terminals by moving the inserted tester needle. (c) CHECKING CONNECTORS (1) Checking when a connector is disconnected: Squeeze the connector together to confirm that they are fully connected and locked. (2) Checking when a connector is disconnected: Check by pulling the wire harness lightly from the backside of the connector. Look for unlatched terminals, missing terminals, loose crimps or broken conductor wires. Check visually for corrosion, metallic or foreign matter and water, and bent, rusted, overheated, contaminated, or deformed terminals. NOTICE: When testing a gold-plated female terminal, always use a gold-plated male terminal.

IN


IN–36

INTRODUCTION – HOW TO TROUBLESHOOT ECU CONTROLLED SYSTEMS

(3) Checking the contact pressure of the terminal: Prepare a spare male terminal. Insert it into a female terminal, and check for ample tension when inserting and after full engagement. NOTICE: When testing a gold-plated female terminal, always use a gold-plated male terminal.

IN D025088E02

(d) REPAIR METHOD OF CONNECTOR TERMINAL (1) If there is any foreign matter on the terminal, clean the contact point using an air gun or cloth. Never rub the contact point using sandpaper as the plating may come off. (2) If there is abnormal contact pressure, replace the female terminal. If the male terminal is goldplated (gold color), use a gold-plated female terminal; if it is silver-plated (silver color), use a silver-plated female terminal. (3) Damaged, deformed, or corroded terminals should be replaced. If the terminal does not lock into the housing, the housing may have to be replaced.

INCORRECT

CORRECT

D032093E01

(e) HANDLING OF WIRE HARNESS (1) If removing a wire harness, check the wiring and clamping before proceeding so that it can be restored in the same way. (2) Never twist, pull or slacken the wire harness more than necessary. (3) The wire harness should never come into contact with a high temperature part, or rotating, moving, vibrating or sharp-edged parts. Avoid contact with panel edges, screw tips and other sharp items. (4) When installing parts, never pinch the wire harness. (5) Never cut or break the cover of the wire harness. If it is cut or broken, replace it or repair it with vinyl tape.

INCORRECT

INCORRECT

INCORRECT D032094E01

Fig. 1

ECU B

C OPEN 1

1

2

2

A 1 2

1 2

SENSOR

Z017004E02

2.

CHECK FOR OPEN CIRCUIT (a) For an open circuit in the wire harness in Fig. 1, check the resistance or voltage, as described below.


INTRODUCTION – HOW TO TROUBLESHOOT ECU CONTROLLED SYSTEMS Fig. 2 ECU

1

1

1

2

2

2

SENSOR C

(b) Check the resistance. (1) Disconnect connectors A and C and measure the resistance between them. Standard resistance (Fig. 2) Tester Connection

A

B

Z017005E02

Fig. 3 ECU SENSOR

Specified Condition

Connector A terminal 1 - Connector C terminal 1

10 kΩ or higher

Connector A terminal 2 - Connector C terminal 2

Below 1 Ω

HINT: Measure the resistance while lightly shaking the wire harness vertically and horizontally. If the results match the examples above, an open circuit exists between terminal 1 of connector A and terminal 1 of connector C. (2) Disconnect connector B and measure the resistance between the connectors. Standard resistance (Fig. 3) Tester Connection

1 2

1 2 C

1

1 2 B2

2 A

B1

B004722E03

Fig. 4 ECU 5V

SENSOR 0 V 1 2 C

5V 1 2

2 B

1 2 A Z017007E02

IN–37

Specified Condition

Connector A terminal 1 - Connector B1 terminal 1

Below 1 Ω

Connector B2 terminal 2 - Connector C terminal 2

10 kΩ or higher

If the results match the examples above, an open circuit exists between terminal 1 of connector B2 and terminal 1 of connector C. (c) Check the voltage. (1) In a circuit in which voltage is applied to the ECU connector terminal, an open circuit can be checked by conducting a voltage check. With each connector still connected, measure the voltage between the body ground and these terminals (in this order): 1) terminal 1 of connector A, 2) terminal 1 of connector B, and 3) terminal 1 of connector C. Standard voltage (Fig. 4) Tester Connection

Specified Condition

Connector A terminal 1 - Body ground

5V

Connector B terminal 1 - Body ground

5V

Connector C terminal 1 - Body ground

Below 1 V

If the results match the examples above, an open circuit exists in the wire harness between terminal 1 of connector B and terminal 1 of connector C.

IN


IN–38

INTRODUCTION – HOW TO TROUBLESHOOT ECU CONTROLLED SYSTEMS ECU

Fig. 5

3.

SHORT 1 2

IN

1

1

2

2 A

B

C

CHECK FOR SHORT CIRCUIT (a) If the wire harness is ground shorted (Fig. 5), locate the section by conducting a resistance check with the body ground (below).

Z017008E02

(b) Check the resistance with the body ground. (1) Disconnect connectors A and C and measure the resistance. Standard resistance (Fig. 6)

Fig. 6 ECU SENSOR

Tester Connection

1

1

2

2

C

1 2 A

B

Specified Condition

Connector A terminal 1 - Body ground

Below 1 Ω

Connector A terminal 2 - Body ground

10 kΩ or higher

Z017009E02

HINT: Measure the resistance while lightly shaking the wire harness vertically and horizontally. If your results match the examples above, an open circuit exists between terminal 1 of connector A and terminal 1 of connector C. (2) Disconnect connector B and measure the resistance. Standard resistance (Fig. 7)

Fig. 7

Tester Connection

ECU SENSOR 1 2 C

1 2 B2

1 2 B1

1 2

Specified Condition

Connector A terminal 1 - Body ground

10 kΩ or higher

Connector B2 terminal 2 - Body ground

Below 1 Ω

A Z017808E02

4.

If the results match the examples above, a short circuit exists between terminal 1 of connector B2 and terminal 1 of connector C. CHECK AND REPLACE ECU NOTICE: • The connector should not be disconnected from the ECU. Perform the inspection from the backside of the connector on the wire harness side. • When no measuring condition is specified, perform the inspection with the engine stopped and the ignition switch ON. • Check that the connectors are fully seated. Check for loose, corroded or broken wires.


INTRODUCTION – HOW TO TROUBLESHOOT ECU CONTROLLED SYSTEMS Example: Ground

IN00383E02

ECU Side

Wire Harness Side W/H Side

Ground

Ground

IN00384E03

IN–39

(a) First, check the ECU ground circuit. If it is faulty, repair it. If it is normal, the ECU could be faulty. Temporarily replace the ECU with a normally functioning one and check if the symptoms occur. If the trouble symptoms disappear, replace the original ECU. (1) Measure the resistance between the ECU ground terminal and body ground. Standard resistance: Below 1 Ω (2) Disconnect the ECU connector. Check the ground terminal on the ECU side and wire harness side for bending, corrosion or foreign matter. Lastly, check the contact pressure of the female terminals.

IN


IN–40

INTRODUCTION – TERMS

TERMS ABBREVIATIONS USED IN MANUAL Abbreviations

IN

ABS

Meaning Anti-Lock Brake System

A/C

Air Conditioner

AC

Alternating Current

ACC

Accessory

ACIS

Acoustic Control Induction System

ACM

Active Control Engine Mount

ACSD

Automatic Cold Start Device

A.D.D

Automatic Disconnecting Differential

A/F

Air-Fuel Ratio

AHC

Active Height Control Suspension

ALR

Automatic Locking Retractor

ALT

Alternator

AMP

Amplifier

ANT

Antenna

APPROX.

Approximately

ASSY

Assembly

A/T, ATM

Automatic Transmission (Transaxle)

ATF

Automatic Transmission Fluid

AUTO

Automatic

AUX

Auxiliary

AVG

Average

AVS

Adaptive Variable Suspension

B+

Battery Voltage

BA

Brake Assist

BACS

Boost Altitude Compensation System

BAT

Battery

BDC

Bottom Dead Center

B/L

Bi-Level

B/S

Bore-Stroke Ratio

BTDC

Before Top Dead Center

BVSV

Bimetallic Vacuum Switching Valve

CAN

Controller Area Network

CB

Circuit Breaker

CCo

Catalytic Converter For Oxidation

CCV

Canister Closed Valve

CD

Compact Disc

CF

Cornering Force

CG

Center Of Gravity

CH

Channel

CKD

Complete Knock Down

COMB.

Combination

CPE

Coupe

CPS

Combustion Pressure Sensor

CPU

Central Processing Unit

CRS

Child Restraint System

CTR

Center


IN–41

INTRODUCTION – TERMS Abbreviations

Meaning

C/V

Check Valve

CV

Control Valve

CW

Curb Weight

DC

Direct Current

DEF

Defogger

DFL

Deflector

DIFF.

Differential

DIFF. LOCK

Differential Lock

D/INJ

Direct Injection

DLC

Data Link Connector

DLI

Distributorless Ignition

DOHC

Double Overhead Camshaft

DP

Dash Pot

DS

Dead Soak

DSP

Digital Signal Processor

DTC

Diagnostic Trouble Code

DVD

Digital Versatible Disc

EBD

Electric Brake Force Distribution

EC

Electrochromic

ECAM

Engine Control And Measurement System

ECD

Electronically Controlled Diesel

ECDY

Eddy Current Dynamometer

ECT

Electronic Controlled Automatic Transmission

ECU

Electronic Control Unit

ED

Electro-Deposited Coating

EDU

Electronic Driving Unit

EDIC

Electric Diesel Injection Control

EFI

Electronic Fuel Injection

E/G

Engine

EGR

Exhaust Gas Recirculation

EGR-VM

EGR-Vacuum Modulator

ELR

Emergency Locking Retractor

EPS

Electric Power Steering

ENG

Engine

ES

Easy & Smooth

ESA

Electronic Spark Advance

ETCS-i

Electronic Throttle Control System-intelligent

EVAP

Evaporative Emission Control

EVP

Evaporator

E-VRV

Electric Vacuum Regulating Valve

EX

Exhaust

FE

Fuel Economy

FF

Front-Engine-Front-Wheel-Drive

F/G

Fuel Gauge

FIPG

Formed In Place Gasket

FL

Fusible Link

F/P

Fuel Pump

FPU

Fuel Pressure Up

FR

Front

IN


IN–42

INTRODUCTION – TERMS Abbreviations

IN

Meaning

F/W

Flywheel

FW/D

Flywheel Damper

FWD

Front-Wheel-Drive

GAS

Gasoline

GND

Ground

GPS

Global Positioning System

GSA

Gear Shift Actuator

HAC

High Altitude Compensator

H/B

Hatchback

H-FUSE

High Current Fuse

HI

High

HID

High Intensity Discharge (Headlight)

HPU

Hydraulic Power Unit

HSG

Housing

HT

Hard Top

HV

Hybrid Vehicle

HWS

Heated Windshield System

IC

Integrated Circuit

IDI

Indirect Diesel Injection

IFS

Independent Front Suspension

IG

Ignition

IIA

Integrated Ignition Assembly

IN

Intake (Manifold, Valve)

INT

Intermittent

I/P

Instrument Panel

IRS

Independent Rear Suspension

ISC

Idle Speed Control

J/B

Junction Block

J/C

Junction Connector

KD

Kick-Down

LAN

Local Area Network

LB

Liftback

LCD

Liquid Crystal Display

LED

Light Emitting Diode

LH

Left-Hand

LHD

Left-Hand Drive

L/H/W

Length, Height, Width

LIN

Local Interconnect Network

LLC

Long-Life Coolant

LNG

Liquefied Natural Gas

LO

Low

LPG

Liquefied Petroleum Gas

LSD

Limited Slip Differential

LSP & BV

Load Sensing Proportioning and Bypass Valve

LSPV

Load Sensing Proportioning Valve

MAP

Manifold Absolute Pressure

MAX.

Maximum

MIC

Microphone

MIL

Malfunction Indicator Light


IN–43

INTRODUCTION – TERMS Abbreviations

Meaning

MIN.

Minimum

MG1

Motor Generator No. 1

MG2

Motor Generator No. 2

MMT

Multi-mode Manual Transmission

MP

Multipurpose

MPI

Multipoint Electronic Injection

MPX

Multiplex Communication System

M/T, MTM

Manual Transmission (Transaxle)

MT

Mount

MTG

Mounting

N

Neutral

NA

Natural Aspiration

NO.

Number

O2S

Oxygen Sensor

OC

Oxidation Catalyst

OCV

Oil Control Valve

O/D

Overdrive

OEM

Original Equipment Manufacturing

OHC

Overhead Camshaft

OHV

Overhead Valve

OPT

Option

ORVR

On-board Refueling Vapor Recovery

O/S

Oversize

P & BV

Proportioning and Bypass Valve

PBD

Power Back Door

PCS

Power Control System

PCV

Positive Crankcase Ventilation

PKB

Parking Brake

PPS

Progressive Power Steering

PROM

Programmable Read Only Memory

PS

Power Steering

PSD

Power Slide Door

PTC

Positive Temperature Coefficient

PTO

Power Take-Off

PZEV

Partial Zero Emission Vehicle

P/W

Power Window

R&P

Rack and Pinion

RAM

Random Access Memory

R/B

Relay Block

RBS

Recirculating Ball Type Steering

REAS

Relative Absorber System

R/F

Reinforcement

RFS

Rigid Front Suspension

RH

Right-Hand

RHD

Right-Hand Drive

RLY

Relay

ROM

Read Only Memory

RR

Rear

RRS

Rigid Rear Suspension

IN


IN–44

INTRODUCTION – TERMS Abbreviations

RSE

IN

Meaning Rear Seat Entertainment

RWD

Rear-Wheel Drive

SC

Supercharger

SCV

Swirl Control Valve

SDN

Sedan

SEN

Sensor

SICS

Starting Injection Control System

SOC

State Of Charge

SOHC

Single Overhead Camshaft

SPEC

Specification

SPI

Single Point Injection

SRS

Supplemental Restraint System

SSM

Special Service Materials

SST

Special Service Tools

STD

Standard

STJ

Cold-Start Fuel Injection

SW

Switch

SYS

System

T/A

Transaxle

TACH

Tachometer

TBI

Throttle Body Electronic Fuel Injection

TC

Turbocharger

TCCS

TOYOTA Computer-Controlled System

TCV

Timing Control Valve

TDC

Top Dead Center

TEMP.

Temperature

TFT

TOYOTA Free-Tronic

TIS

Total Information System For Vehicle Development

T/M

Transmission

TMC

TOYOTA Motor Corporation

TMMIN

PT. TOYOTA Motor Manufacturing Indonesia

TMMK

TOYOTA Motor Manufacturing Kentucky, Inc.

TMT

TOYOTA Motor Thailand Co. Ltd.

TRAC/TRC

Traction Control System

TURBO

Turbocharge

TWC

Three-Way Catalyst

U/D

Underdrive

U/S

Undersize

VCV

Vacuum Control Valve

VENT

Ventilator

VIM

Vehicle Interface Module

VGRS

Variable Gear Ratio Steering

VIN

Vehicle Identification Number

VPS

Variable Power Steering

VSC

Vehicle Stability Control

VSV

Vacuum Switching Valve

VTV

Vacuum Transmitting Valve

VVT-i

Variable Valve Timing-intelligent

W/

With


IN–45

INTRODUCTION – TERMS Abbreviations

Meaning

WGN

Wagon

W/H

Wire Harness

W/O

Without

1ST

First

2ND

Second

2WD

Two Wheel Drive Vehicle (4 x 2)

3RD

Third

4TH

Fourth

4WD

Four Wheel Drive Vehicle (4 x 4)

4WS

Four Wheel Steering System

5TH

Fifth

IN


IN–46

INTRODUCTION – TERMS

GLOSSARY OF SAE AND TOYOTA TERMS This glossary lists all SAE-J1930 terms and abbreviations used in this manual in compliance with SAE recommendations, as well as their TOYOTA equivalents.

IN

SAE ABBREVIATIONS A/C

TOYOTA TERMS ( )-ABBREVIATIONS

SAE TERMS Air Conditioning

Air Conditioner

ACL

Air Cleaner

Air Cleaner, A/CL

AIR

Secondary Air Injection

Air Injection (AI)

AP

Accelerator Pedal

-

B+

Battery Positive Voltage

+B, Battery Voltage

BARO

Barometric Pressure

HAC

CAC

Charge Air Cooler

Intercooler

CARB

Carburetor

Carburetor

CFI

Continuous Fuel Injection

-

CKP

Crankshaft Position

Crank Angle

CL

Closed Loop

Closed Loop

CMP

Camshaft Position

Cam Angle

CPP

Clutch Pedal Position

-

CTOX

Continuous Trap Oxidizer

-

CTP

Closed Throttle Position

LL ON, Idle ON

DFI

Direct Fuel Injection

Direct Injection (DI./INJ)

DI

Distributor Ignition

-

DLC3

Data Link Connector 3

OBD II Diagnostic Connector

DTC

Diagnostic Trouble Code

Diagnostic Trouble Code

DTM

Diagnostic Test Mode

-

ECL

Engine Coolant Level

-

ECM

Engine Control Module

Engine ECU (Electronic Control Unit)

ECT

Engine Coolant Temperature

Coolant Temperature, Water Temperature (THW)

EEPROM

Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory

Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM), Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EPROM)

EFE

Early Fuel Evaporation

Cold Mixture Heater (CMH), Heat Control Valve (HCV)

EGR

Exhaust Gas Recirculation

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)

EI

Electronic Ignition

Distributorless Ignition (DLI)

EM

Engine Modification

Engine Modification (EM)

EPROM

Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory

Programmable Read Only Memory (PROM)

EVAP

Evaporative Emission

Evaporative Emission Control (EVAP)

FC

Fan Control

-

FEEPROM

Flash Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory

-

FEPROM

Flash Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory

-

FF

Flexible Fuel

-

FP

Fuel Pump

Fuel Pump

GEN

Generator

Alternator

GND

Ground

Ground (GND)

HO2S

Heated Oxygen Sensor

Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2s)

IAC

Idle Air Control

Idle Speed Control (ISC)

IAT

Intake Air Temperature

Intake or Inlet Air Temperature

ICM

Ignition Control Module

-


IN–47

INTRODUCTION – TERMS SAE ABBREVIATIONS

TOYOTA TERMS ( )-ABBREVIATIONS

SAE TERMS

IFI

Indirect Fuel Injection

Indirect Injection (IDL)

IFS

Inertia Fuel-Shutoff

-

ISC

Idle Speed Control

-

KS

Knock Sensor

Knock Sensor

MAF

Mass Airflow

Air Flow Meter

MAP

Manifold Absolute Pressure

Manifold Pressure Intake Vacuum

MC

Mixture Control

Electric Bleed Air Control Valve (EBCV) Mixture Control Valve (MCV) Electric Air Control Valve (EACV)

MDP

Manifold Differential Pressure

-

MFI

Multiport Fuel Injection

Electronic Fuel Injection (EFI)

MIL

Malfunction Indicator Light

Check Engine Light

MST

Manifold Surface Temperature

-

MVZ

Manifold Vacuum Zone

-

NVRAM

Non-Volatile Random Access Memory

-

O2S

Oxygen Sensor

Oxygen Sensor, O2 Sensor (O2S)

OBD

On-Board Diagnostic

On-Board Diagnostic System (OBD)

OC

Oxidation Catalytic Converter

Oxidation Catalytic Convert (OC), CCo

OL

Open Loop

Open Loop

PAIR

Pulsed Secondary Air Injection

Air Suction (AS)

PCM

Powertrain Control Module

-

PNP

Park/Neutral Position

-

PROM

Programmable Read Only Memory

-

PSP

Power Steering Pressure

-

PTOX

Periodic Trap Oxidizer

Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Diesel Particulate Trap (DPT)

RAM

Random Access Memory

Random Access Memory (RAM)

RM

Relay Module

-

ROM

Read Only Memory

Read Only Memory (ROM)

RPM

Engine Speed

Engine Speed

SC

Supercharger

Supercharger

SCB

Supercharger Bypass

E-ABV

SFI

Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection

Electronic Fuel Injection (EFI), Sequential Injection

SPL

Smoke Puff Limiter

-

SRI

Service Reminder Indicator

-

SRT

System Readiness Test

-

ST

Scan Tool

-

TB

Throttle Body

Throttle Body

TBI

Throttle Body Fuel Injection

Single Point Injection Central Fuel Injection (Ci)

TC

Turbocharger

Turbocharger

TCC

Torque Converter Clutch

Torque Converter

TCM

Transmission Control Module

Transmission ECU, ECT ECU

TP

Throttle Position

Throttle Position

TR

Transmission Range

-

TVV

Thermal Vacuum Valve

Bimetallic Vacuum Switching Valve (BVSV) Thermostatic Vacuum Switching Valve (TVSV)

TWC

Three-Way Catalytic Converter

Three-Way Catalytic (TWC) Manifold Converter CCRO

IN


IN–48

INTRODUCTION – TERMS

SAE ABBREVIATIONS

IN

TOYOTA TERMS ( )-ABBREVIATIONS

SAE TERMS

TWC+OC

Three-Way + Oxidation Catalytic Converter

CCR + CCo

VAF

Volume Airflow

Air Flow Meter

VR

Voltage Regulator

Voltage Regulator

VSS

Vehicle Speed Sensor

Vehicle Speed Sensor

WOT

Wide Open Throttle

Full Throttle

WU-OC

Warm Up Oxidation Catalytic Converter

-

WU-TWC

Warm Up Three-Way Catalytic Converter

-

3GR

Third Gear

-

4GR

Fourth Gear

-


AUDIO / VISUAL – AUDIO AND VISUAL SYSTEM

AV–1

AUDIO AND VISUAL SYSTEM BODY ELECTRICAL AUDIO / VISUAL

PARTS LOCATION HATCHBACK (5-Door Models):

AMPLIFIER ANTENNA ASSEMBLY

ANTENNA CORD SUB-ASSEMBLY

RADIO ANTENNA POLE SUB-ASSEMBLY

REAR SPEAKER RH

AV

REAR SPEAKER LH

FRONT NO. 1 SPEAKER LH

FRONT NO. 1 SPEAKER RH

ENGINE ROOM R/B - DOME FUSE

C117847E05


AV–2

AUDIO / VISUAL – AUDIO AND VISUAL SYSTEM

HATCHBACK (3-Door Models):

AMPLIFIER ANTENNA RADIO ANTENNA POLE ANTENNA CORD

REAR SPEAKER RH

AV

REAR SPEAKER LH

FRONT NO. 1 SPEAKER LH

FRONT NO. 1 SPEAKER RH ENGINE ROOM R/B - DOME FUSE

E118200E05


AV–3

AUDIO / VISUAL – AUDIO AND VISUAL SYSTEM

HATCHBACK:

w/ CD Player:

RADIO RECEIVER

AV

w/o CD Player:

MAIN BODY ECU (DRIVER SIDE J/B)

STEREO JACK ADAPTER (*1)

- ACC FUSE - AM1 FUSE *1: w/ CD Player C117846E03


AV–4

AUDIO / VISUAL – AUDIO AND VISUAL SYSTEM

SEDAN:

FRONT NO. 1 SPEAKER RH

FRONT NO. 1 SPEAKER LH

AV WINDOW GLASS ANTENNA

REAR SPEAKER RH REAR SPEAKER LH

ENGINE ROOM R/B - DOME FUSE C138617E02


AUDIO / VISUAL – AUDIO AND VISUAL SYSTEM

AV–5

SEDAN: For integrated w/ Panel:

Except integrated w/ Panel:

RADIO RECEIVER

STEREO JACK ADAPTER (*1)

MAIN BODY ECU (DRIVER SIDE J/B) -ACC FUSE -AM1 FUSE

*1: w/ STEREO JACK ADAPTER E132579E01

AV


AV–6

AUDIO / VISUAL – AUDIO AND VISUAL SYSTEM

SYSTEM DIAGRAM

Antenna Front Speaker (LH) Sound Signal

Front Speaker (RH) Radio Receiver

AV Rear Speaker (LH)

Stereo Jack Adapter (*1)

Rear Speaker (RH)

*1: w/ Stereo Jack Adapter E132580E01


AUDIO / VISUAL – AUDIO AND VISUAL SYSTEM

AV–7

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION CAUTION: The CD player uses an invisible laser beam which could cause hazardous radiation exposure. Be sure to operate the player as instructed. 1. CD PLAYER OUTLINE (a) A CD player uses a laser pickup to read digital signals recorded on CDs. By converting the digital signals to analog, music and other contents can be played. CAUTION: Do not look directly at the laser pickup because the CD player uses an invisible laser beam. Be sure to operate the player only as instructed. NOTICE: • Do not disassemble any part of the CD player. • Do not apply oil to the CD player. • Do not insert anything but a CD into the CD player. (b) Usable CDs

AV

E119759

(c) Precautions for use of discs NOTICE: • Copy-protected CDs cannot be played. • Dual discs cannot be played. Playing dual discs may cause malfunctions of the CD player. • CD-Rs and CD-RWs may not be played depending on the recording conditions or characteristics of the discs, or due to damage, dirt, or deterioration caused by leaving the discs in the cabin for a long time. • Unfinalized CD-Rs and CD-RWs cannot be played. • PAL or SECAM color television standard discs cannot be played. (Only NTSC discs can be played.) • Keep the discs away from dirt. Be careful not to damage the discs or leave your fingerprints on them. • Hold discs by the outer edge and center hole with the label side up.


AV–8

AUDIO / VISUAL – AUDIO AND VISUAL SYSTEM

AV

2.

• Leaving the disc exposed halfway out of the slot for a long time after pressing the disc eject button may cause deformation of the disc, making the disc unusable. • If discs have adhesive tape, stickers, CDR labels, or any traces of such labels attached, the discs may not be ejected or player malfunctions may result. • Keep the discs away from direct sunlight. (Exposure to direct sunlight may cause deformation of the disc, making the disc unusable.) • Do not use odd-shaped CDs because these may cause player malfunctions. • Do not use discs whose recording portion is transparent or translucent because they may not be inserted, ejected, or played normally. HINT: • When it is cold or it is raining, if the windows mist up, mist and also dew may form in the player. In such a case, the CD may skip or the CD may stop in the middle of play. Ventilate or dehumidify the cabin for a while before using the player. • The CD may skip if the player experiences strong vibrations when the vehicle is driven on rough road or similar uneven surface(s). (d) Cleaning NOTICE: Do not use a lens cleaner because it may cause a malfunction in the pickup portion of the player. (1) If dirt is on the disc surface, wipe it clean with a soft dry cloth such as an eyeglass cleaner for plastic lenses from the center to the outside in a radial direction. NOTICE: • Pressing on the disc by hand or rubbing the disc with a hard cloth may scratch the disc surface. • Use of solvent such as a record spray, antistatic agent, alcohol, benzine, and thinner, or a chemical cloth may cause damage to the disc, making the disc unusable. MP3/WMA OUTLINE (a) Playable MP3 file standards

Compatible standard

MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER 3)

Compatible sampling frequency

• •

MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz) MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)

MPEG1 LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256, 320 (kbps) MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160 (kbps) Compatible with VBR

Compatible bit rate

Compatible channel mode

• •

Stereo, joint stereo, dual channel, monaural


AUDIO / VISUAL – AUDIO AND VISUAL SYSTEM

AV–9

(b) Playable WMA file standards Compatible standard

WMA Ver. 7, 8, and 9

Compatible sampling frequency

32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)

Compatible bit rate

• • •

Ver. 7, 8: CBR48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192 (kbps) Ver. 9: CBR48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192, 256, 320 (kbps) Compatible with playback of channel 2 only

(c) ID3 tags and WMA tags (1) Additional textual information called ID3 tags can be input to MP3 files. Information such as song titles and artist names can be stored. HINT: This player is compatible with the ID3 tags of ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1, and ID3 Ver. 2.2 and 2.3. (Number of characters complies with ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.) (2) Additional textual information called WMA tags can be input to WMA files. Information such as song titles and artist names can be stored. (d) Usable media (1) Only CD-ROMs, CD-Rs (CD-Recordable), and CD-RWs (CD-ReWritable) can be used to play MP3/WMA files. NOTICE: • CD-Rs and CD-RWs are more easily affected by a hot and humid environment than discs used for normal audio CDs. For this reason, some CD-Rs and CD-RWs may not be played. • If there are fingerprints or scratches on the disc, the disc may not be played or the CD may skip. • Some CD-Rs and CD-RWs deteriorate if they are left in the cabin for a long time. • Keep CD-Rs and CD-RWs in a storage case that is impenetrable to light. (e) Usable media format (1) Usable media format Disc format

CD-ROM Mode 1, CD-ROM XA Mode 2 Form1

File format

ISO9660 Level 1 and Level 2 (Juliet and Romeo)

HINT: • As for MP3/WMA files written in any format other than those above, the contents of the files may not be played normally or the file names or folder names may not be displayed correctly. • This player is compatible with multi-session discs and can play CD-Rs and CD-RWs on which MP3/WMA files are added. However, only the first session can be played. • Discs whose first session includes both music data and MP3 or WMA format data cannot be played.

AV


AV–10

AUDIO / VISUAL – AUDIO AND VISUAL SYSTEM

(2) Standard and restrictions Maximum directory levels

8 levels

Maximum number of characters for a folder name/file name

32 characters

Maximum number of folders

192 (Including empty folders, route folders, and folders that do not contain MP3/WMA files)

Maximum number of files in a disc

255 (Including non-MP3/WMA files)

(f)

AV

File names (1) Only files with an extension of ".mp3" or ".wma" can be recognized and played as MP3 or WMA files. (2) Save MP3 or WMA files with an extension of ".mp3" or ".wma". NOTICE: If saving non-MP3 or non-WMA files with an extension of ".mp3" or ".wma", those files are wrongly recognized as MP3 or WMA files and played. A loud noise may occur and damage to the speakers may result.


AV–11

AUDIO / VISUAL – AUDIO AND VISUAL SYSTEM

HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING HINT: In accordance with the following procedures, troubleshoot the audio and visual system.

1

VEHICLE BROUGHT TO WORKSHOP

NEXT

2

INSPECT BATTERY VOLTAGE Standard voltage: 11 to 14 V If the voltage is below 11 V, recharge or replace the battery before proceeding.

NEXT

3

AV

BASIC INSPECTION (a) Turn the ignition switch to ACC. (b) Check whether the display appears on the radio receiver. Result

Proceed to

Display appears

A

Display does not appear

B

B

PROCEED TO PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE

A

4

PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE Result

Proceed to

Fault not listed in problem symptoms table

A

Fault listed in problem symptoms table

B

B

Go to step 6

A

5

OVERALL ANALYSIS AND TROUBLESHOOTING (a) Terminals of ECU (See page AV-14) (b) Inspection (See page AV-159, AV-172)

NEXT


AV–12

6

AUDIO / VISUAL – AUDIO AND VISUAL SYSTEM

ADJUST, REPAIR OR REPLACE

NEXT

7 NEXT END

AV

CONFIRMATION TEST


AV–13

AUDIO / VISUAL – AUDIO AND VISUAL SYSTEM

IDENTIFICATION OF NOISE SOURCE 1.

Frequency

300 kHz

30 kHz

Designation

Radio Description (a) Radio frequency band (1) Radio broadcasts use the radio frequency bands shown in the table below.

LF

MF

Modulation

HF

VHF FM

Amplitude modulation MF: Medium frequency

300 MHz

30 MHz

AM

Radio Wave

LF: Low frequency

3 MHz

HF: High frequency

Frequency modulation VHF: Very high frequency E108734E02

(b) Service area (1) The service areas of AM and FM broadcasts are vastly different. Sometimes an AM broadcast can be received very clearly but an FM stereo cannot. FM stereo has the smallest service area, and is prone to pick up static and other types of interference such as noise. (c) Radio reception problems HINT: In addition to static, other problems such as "phasing", "multipath", and "fade out" exist. These problems are not caused by electrical noise, but by the radio signal propagation method itself.

FM (Stereo) FM (Monaural) AM

E108735E01

Phasing Ionosphere

I100011E02

(1) Phasing AM broadcasts are susceptible to electrical interference and another kind of interference called phasing. Occurring only at night, phasing is the interference created when a vehicle receives 2 radio wave signals from the same transmitter. One signal is reflected off the ionosphere and the other signal is received directly from the transmitter.

AV


AV–14

AUDIO / VISUAL – AUDIO AND VISUAL SYSTEM

(2) Multipath Multipath is a type of interference created when a vehicle receives 2 radio wave signals from the same transmitter. One signal is reflected off buildings or mountains and the other signal is received directly from the transmitter.

Multipath

I100012E02

Fade Out

I100013E02

AV Radio Frequency

(3) Fade out Fade out is caused by objects (buildings, mountains, and other such large obstacles) that deflect away part of a signal, resulting in a weaker signal when the object is between the transmitter and vehicle. High frequency radio waves, such as FM broadcasts, are easily deflected by obstructions. Low frequency radio waves, such as AM broadcasts, are much more difficult to deflect. (d) Noise problem Technicians must have a clear understanding about each customer's noise complaint. Use the following table to diagnose noise problems. Noise Occurrence Condition

Presumable Cause

AM

Noise occurs in specific area

Foreign noise

AM

Noise occurs when listening to an intermittent broadcast

An identical program transmitted from multiple towers can cause noise where the signals overlap

AM

Noise occurs only at night

Music beat from a distant broadcast

FM

Noise occurs while driving in a specified area

Multipath or phasing noise resulting from a change in FM frequency

HINT: If the noise does not match the examples above, refer to the descriptions about phasing and multipath.


AV–15

AUDIO / VISUAL – AUDIO AND VISUAL SYSTEM

PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE HINT: Use the table below to determine the cause of the problem symptom. The potential causes of the symptom are listed in order of probability in the "Suspected Area" column of the table. Check each symptom by checking the suspected areas in the order they are listed. Replace parts as necessary. Audio Function Symptom Noise occurs

Pressing power switch does not turn on system

Suspected area 1. Proceed to "Noise Occurs" 2. Radio Receiver

2. Proceed to "Radio Receiver Power Source Circuit"

AV-33

AV-18

2. Proceed to "Speaker Circuit"

AV-28

3. Proceed to "Radio Receiver Power Source Circuit"

AV-33

AV-19

2. Proceed to "Speaker Circuit"

AV-28

Radio broadcast cannot be received (bad reception)

Poor sound quality in all modes (low volume)

AV-20

2. Proceed to "Radio Receiver Power Source Circuit"

AV-33 -

1. Proceed to "CD cannot be Inserted or is Ejected Right After Insertion"

AV-21

2. Proceed to "Radio Receiver Power Source Circuit"

AV-33

1. Proceed to "CD Sound Skips" 2. Radio Receiver

AV-23 -

1. Proceed to "Radio Broadcast cannot be Received (Bad Reception)"

AV-25

1. Proceed to "Poor Sound Quality in All Modes (Low Volume)"

AV-27

2. Proceed to "Speaker Circuit"

AV-28

3. Radio Receiver External device sound cannot be heard or sound quality is bad (stereo jack is used)

-

1. Proceed to "CD cannot be ejected"

3. Radio Receiver CD sound skips

-

1. Proceed to "Sound Quality is Bad Only when CD is played (Volume is too low)"

3. Radio Receiver

CD cannot be inserted or CD is ejected right after insertion

-

1. Proceed to "No Sound can be Heard from Speakers"

3. Radio Receiver

CD cannot be ejected

AV-17

4. Radio Receiver

Sound quality is bad only when CD is played (volume is too low)

AV-16

1. Proceed to "Pressing Power Switch does not Turn on System"

3. Radio Receiver

No sound can be heard from speakers

See page

1. Proceed to "Sound Signal Circuit between Radio Receiver and Stereo Jack Adapter" 2. Radio Receiver

AV-31 -

AV


AV–16

AUDIO / VISUAL – AUDIO AND VISUAL SYSTEM

TERMINALS OF ECU 1.

D10

CHECK RADIO RECEIVER

D11

D74

E130763E02

(a) Disconnect the D10 receiver connector. (b) Measure the resistance and voltage of the wire harness side connector. Standard:

AV

Symbols (Terminal No.)

Wiring Color

Terminal Description

Condition

Specified Condition

GND (D10-7) - Body ground

W-B - Body ground

Ground

Always

Below 1 Ω

ACC (D10-3) - GND (D10-7)

GR - W-B

ACC power supply

Ignition switch ACC

11 to 14 V

B (D10-4) - GND (D10-7)

L - W-B

Battery power supply

Always

11 to 14 V

HINT: If the results are not as specified, there may be a malfunction in the wire harness. (c) Reconnect the D10 receiver connector. (d) Measure the voltage and resistance of the connector. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.)

Wiring Color

Terminal Description

Condition

Specified Condition

FR+ (D10-1) - GND (D10-7)

GR - W-B

Sound signals (front right)

Audio system operating

Waveform synchronized with sound output

FL+ (D10-2) - GND (D10-7)

P - W-B

Sound signals (front left)

Audio system operating

Waveform synchronized with sound output

FR- (D10-5) - GND (D10-7)

Y - W-B

Sound signals (front right)

Audio system operating

Waveform synchronized with sound output

FL- (D10-6) - GND (D10-7)

V - W-B

Sound signals (front left)

Audio system operating

Waveform synchronized with sound output

RR+ (D11-1) - GND (D10-7)

R - W-B

Sound signals (rear right)

Audio system operating

Waveform synchronized with sound output

RL+ (D11-2) - GND (D10-7)

B - W-B

Sound signals (rear left)

Audio system operating

Waveform synchronized with sound output

RR- (D11-3) - GND (D10-7)

W - W-B

Sound signals (rear right)

Audio system operating

Waveform synchronized with sound output

RL- (D11-6) - GND (D10-7)

Y - W-B

Sound signals (rear left)

Audio system operating

Waveform synchronized with sound output

ANT (D10-8) - GND (D10-7)

B - W-B

Power source of antenna

Radio switch ON (AM or FM)

11 to 14 V

ARI (D74-15) - GND (D107)

R - W-B

Sound signal (Right)

External device playing (When stereo jack adapter used)

ASGN (D74-16) GND (D10-7)

(Shielded) - W-B

Ground (Shielded)

Always

Waveform synchronized with sound output Below 1 Ω


AUDIO / VISUAL – AUDIO AND VISUAL SYSTEM Symbols (Terminal No.)

Wiring Color

Terminal Description

AV–17

Condition

Specified Condition Waveform synchronized with sound output Below 1 Ω

ALI (D74-17) - GND (D107)

G - W-B

Sound signal (Left)

External device playing (When stereo jack adapter used)

AUXI (D74-19) - GND (D10-7)

R - W-B

External device connection detection signal

External device connected

SPD (D74-3)

W - W-B

Speed signal

Ignition switch ON, drive wheels turned slowly

Pulse generation

HINT: If the results are not as specified, there may be a malfunction in the wire harness.

AV


AV–18

AUDIO / VISUAL – AUDIO AND VISUAL SYSTEM

Noise Occurs INSPECTION PROCEDURE

1

CHECK SPEAKER INSTALLATION (a) Check that each speaker is securely installed. OK: Speakers are installed securely. HINT: The radio has a noise prevention function to reduce noise when listening to the radio. If severe noise occurs, check whether the ground at the antenna mounting base and the noise prevention unit are installed and wired correctly.

AV

Condition in Which Noise Occurs

Noise Type

Increases when accelerator pedal is depressed, and stops immediately when engine is stopped

Generator noise

When A/C or heater is operating

Blower motor noise

• •

When vehicle is rapidly accelerated on unpaved road When ignition switch is ON

Fuel pump noise

• •

When horn switch is pressed and released When horn switch is pressed and held down

Horn noise

Occurs faintly when engine is running, and stops immediately when engine is stopped

Ignition noise

When turn signal is operating

Flasher noise

When window washer is operating

Washer noise

When engine is running, and continues even when engine is stopped

Engine coolant temperature noise

When wipers are operating

Wiper noise

When brake pedal is depressed

Stop light switch noise

Other than above

Static electricity on vehicle

HINT: • Use the table above to identify the part that is causing the noise. Check the noise filter on the part. • To save time and avoid a misdiagnosis, first make sure that the noise is not originating from outside the vehicle. • Troubleshoot noise problems in order of loudness, starting with the loudest noise. • Setting the radio to a frequency that receives no signal may make recognition of the noise problem easier. NG OK IDENTIFY NOISE SOURCE

INSTALL SPEAKER PROPERLY


AUDIO / VISUAL – AUDIO AND VISUAL SYSTEM

AV–19

Pressing Power Switch does not Turn on System INSPECTION PROCEDURE

1

CHECK WHETHER RAPID TEMPERATURE CHANGE OCCURRED IN CABIN (a) Check whether or not a rapid temperature change occurred in the cabin. OK: Rapid temperature change occurred. HINT: Rapid temperature changes create condensation inside the radio receiver, which may cause a short circuit. NG

REPLACE RADIO RECEIVER

OK PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION SHOWN IN PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE

AV


AV–20

AUDIO / VISUAL – AUDIO AND VISUAL SYSTEM

No Sound can be Heard from Speakers INSPECTION PROCEDURE

1

CHECK RADIO RECEIVER (VOLUME AND MUTE SWITCH) (a) Check the radio receiver setting. (1) Check that the volume is not set to minimum. (2) Check that MUTE is OFF. OK: Malfunction disappears. NG

OK END

AV

PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION SHOWN IN PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE


AUDIO / VISUAL – AUDIO AND VISUAL SYSTEM

AV–21

Sound Quality is Bad Only when CD is Played (Volume is Too Low) INSPECTION PROCEDURE

1

OPERATION USING ANOTHER CD (a) Replace the CD with a normal one and check if the same problem occurs again. OK: Malfunction disappears. NG

PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION SHOWN IN PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE

OK CD IS FAULTY

AV


AV–22

AUDIO / VISUAL – AUDIO AND VISUAL SYSTEM

CD cannot be Ejected INSPECTION PROCEDURE

1

CHECK OPERATION (a) Press the CD EJECT switch of the radio receiver for 2 seconds or more to check whether the CD can be ejected. OK: CD is ejected. NG

REPLACE RADIO RECEIVER

OK

2

OPERATION USING ANOTHER CD (a) Replace the CD with a normal one and check that the CD can be ejected. OK: CD is ejected.

AV

NG OK CD IS FAULTY

REPLACE RADIO RECEIVER


AUDIO / VISUAL – AUDIO AND VISUAL SYSTEM

AV–23

CD cannot be Inserted or is Ejected Right After Insertion INSPECTION PROCEDURE

1

CHECK CD (a) Make sure that the CD is a normal audio CD, and that it is not deformed, flawed, stained, burred or otherwise defective. OK: Normal audio CD. HINT: Translucent or uniquely-shaped CDs cannot be played. NG

CD IS FAULTY

OK

2

CHECK THAT CD HAS BEEN INSERTED PROPERLY (a) Check whether or not the CD was inserted upside down. OK: CD was properly inserted. NG

INSERT CD PROPERLY

OK

3

CLEAN CD (a) Clean the disc by wiping the CD's dataside radially with a soft cloth. OK: Malfunction disappears. NOTICE: Do not use a conventional record cleaner or antistatic preservative. OK

CD WAS DIRTY

I100151

NG

4

REPLACE CD (a) Replace the CD with a normal one and check if the same problem occurs again. OK: Malfunction disappears. NG

REPLACE RADIO RECEIVER

AV


AV–24 OK CD IS FAULTY

AV

AUDIO / VISUAL – AUDIO AND VISUAL SYSTEM


AUDIO / VISUAL – AUDIO AND VISUAL SYSTEM

AV–25

CD Sound Skips INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: The sound may skip when driving on an unpaved road.

1

CLEAN CD (a) If the disc is dirty, clean the disc by wiping the CD's dataside radially with a soft cloth. OK: Malfunction disappears. NOTICE: Do not use a conventional record cleaner or antistatic preservative. OK

CD WAS DIRTY

E050013

NG

2

AV OPERATION USING ANOTHER CD (a) Replace the CD with a normal one and check if the same problem occurs again. OK: Malfunction disappears. OK

CD IS FAULTY

NG

3

CHECK RADIO RECEIVER INSTALLATION (a) Check the installation condition of the radio receiver. OK: Installed properly. NG

INSTALL RADIO RECEIVER PROPERLY

OK

4

CHECK WHETHER RAPID TEMPERATURE CHANGE OCCURRED IN CABIN (a) Check whether or not a rapid temperature change occurred in the cabin. OK: Rapid temperature change occurred. HINT: Rapid temperature changes create condensation inside the CD player, which may prevent CDs from being played.


AV–26

AUDIO / VISUAL – AUDIO AND VISUAL SYSTEM

NG

REPLACE RADIO RECEIVER

OK CONDENSATION DUE TO TEMPERATURE CHANGE (LET IT SIT FOR A WHILE BEFORE USING)

AV


AUDIO / VISUAL – AUDIO AND VISUAL SYSTEM

AV–27

Radio Broadcast cannot be Received (Bad Reception) INSPECTION PROCEDURE

1

CHECK WHETHER RAPID TEMPERATURE CHANGE OCCURRED IN CABIN (a) Check whether the radio auto-search functions properly. (1) Tune the radio using the auto-search function and check that it operates normally. OK: The radio auto-search functions properly. OK

END

NG

2

CHECK OPTIONAL COMPONENTS (a) Check whether any optional components, such as telephone antenna, are installed. OK: Optional component(s) installed. OK

EFFECT FROM OPTIONAL COMPONENTS

NG

3

CHECK ANTENNA FOR NOISE PRODUCTION (a) With the ignition switch on (ACC), turn on the radio and select the AM mode. (b) Place the tip of a screwdriver on the antenna and check that noise is heard from the speaker. OK: Noise occurs. OK

NG

REPLACE ROOF ANTENNA POLE SUBASSEMBLY

AV


AV–28

4

AUDIO / VISUAL – AUDIO AND VISUAL SYSTEM

INSPECT RADIO RECEIVER (ANTENNA) (a) Remove the antenna plug of the radio receiver. (b) With the radio receiver connector connected, turn the ignition switch to ACC. (c) Turn on the radio and select the AM mode. (d) Place a flat-head screwdriver or piece of metal, such as a thin wire, on the antenna jack of the radio receiver. Check that noise is heard from the speakers. OK: Noise occurs. E108381

OK REPLACE RADIO RECEIVER

AV

NG

REPLACE ANTENNA CORD SUBASSEMBLY


AUDIO / VISUAL – AUDIO AND VISUAL SYSTEM

AV–29

Poor Sound Quality in All Modes (Low Volume) INSPECTION PROCEDURE

1

ADJUST SOUND QUALITY (a) Operate the radio receiver to adjust the sound quality. OK: Sound quality returns to normal. OK

SYSTEM IS OK (POOR SOUND QUALITY)

NG

2

COMPARE WITH ANOTHER VEHICLE OF SAME MODEL (a) Compare the vehicle with another vehicle that has a normally functioning audio system. Check if there is any difference in the sound quality. OK: No difference is found. OK

SYSTEM IS OK (POOR SOUND QUALITY)

NG PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION SHOWN IN PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE

AV


AV–30

AUDIO / VISUAL – AUDIO AND VISUAL SYSTEM

Speaker Circuit DESCRIPTION Sound signals that have been amplified by the stereo component amplifier are sent to the speakers from the radio receiver through this circuit. If there is a short in this circuit, the sound cannot be heard from the speakers even though there is no malfunction in the speakers.

WIRING DIAGRAM

Radio Receiver FL+ Front No. 1 Speaker LH FL-

AV FR+ Front No. 1 Speaker RH FRRL+ Rear Speaker LH RLRR+ Rear Speaker RH RR-

E118196E01

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

1

CHECK SPEAKER (a) Check whether sound is emitted from each speaker.


AV–31

AUDIO / VISUAL – AUDIO AND VISUAL SYSTEM

Result Result

Proceed to

Front No. 1 speakers have problems

A

Rear speakers have problems

B

B

Go to step 4

A

2

INSPECT FRONT NO. 1 SPEAKERS (a) Check the left and right front No. 1 speakers (See page AV-163 or AV-159). OK: Front No. 1 speakers are normal. NG

REPLACE FRONT NO. 1 SPEAKER

OK

3

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (RADIO RECEIVER - FRONT NO. 1 SPEAKER) (a) Disconnect the D10 receiver connector. (b) Disconnect the front No. 1 speaker connector. (c) Measure the resistance. Standard resistance

Radio Receiver (harness side connector):

D10 FR+ FR-

FLFront No. 1 Speaker (harness side connector):

Below 1 Ω

D10-6 (FL-) - G6-2

Below 1 Ω 10 kΩ or higher

D10-6(FL-) - Body ground

10 kΩ or higher

D10-1 (FR+) - F6-1

Below 1 Ω

D10-5 (FR-) - F6-2

Below 1 Ω

D10-1 (FR+) - Body ground

10 kΩ or higher

D10-1 (FR+) - Body ground

10 kΩ or higher

NG

F6 *2

Specified Condition

D10-2 (FL+) - G6-1

D10-2 (FL+) - Body ground

FL+

G6 *1

Tester Connection

REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS OR CONNECTOR

*1: LH *2: RH I044961E04

OK PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION SHOWN IN PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE

AV


AV–32

AUDIO / VISUAL – AUDIO AND VISUAL SYSTEM

4

INSPECT REAR SPEAKERS (a) Check the left and right rear speakers (See page AV172, AV-177 or AV-183). OK: Rear speakers are normal. NG

REPLACE REAR SPEAKER

OK

5

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (RADIO RECEIVER - REAR SPEAKER) (a) Disconnect the D11 receiver connector. (b) Disconnect the rear speaker connectors. (c) Measure the resistance. Standard resistance (Hatchback 3-Door Models)

Radio Receiver (harness side connector):

AV

Tester Connection

RL+

RR+ D11

1 3

2 4

5

6

RL-

RR-

3-Door Models:

J26 *2

5-Door Models: 1 2

I4

*1

H4 *2

Below 1 Ω

D11-6 (RL-) - J27-2

Below 1 Ω

D11-1 (RR+) - J26-1

Below 1 Ω

D11-3 (RR-) - J26-2

Below 1 Ω

J39 *1 2 1

*1: LH

Tester Connection

Specified Condition

D11-2 (RL+) - I4-1

Below 1 Ω

D11-6 (RL-) - I4-2

Below 1 Ω

D11-1 (RR+) - H4-1

Below 1 Ω

D11-3 (RR-) - H4-2

Below 1 Ω

Standard resistance (Sedan)

Rear Speaker for Sedan (harness side connector):

J38 *2

D11-2 (RL+) - J27-1

Standard resistance (Hatchback 5-Door Models)

Rear Speaker for Hatchback (harness side connector):

J27 *1

Specified Condition

Tester Connection

Specified Condition

D11-2 (RL+) - J39-1

Below 1 Ω

D11-6 (RL-) -J39-2

Below 1 Ω

D11-1 (RR+) - J38-1

Below 1 Ω

D11-3 (RR-) - J38-2

Below 1 Ω

Standard resistance

*2: RH

Tester Connection

Specified Condition

D11-2 (RL+) - Body ground

10 kΩ or higher

E132581E01

D11-6 (RL-) - Body ground

10 kΩ or higher

D11-1 (RR+) - Body ground

10 kΩ or higher

D11-3 (RR-) - Body ground

10 kΩ or higher

NG

REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS OR CONNECTOR

OK PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION SHOWN IN PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE


AV–33

AUDIO / VISUAL – AUDIO AND VISUAL SYSTEM

Sound Signal Circuit between Radio Receiver and Stereo Jack Adapter DESCRIPTION The stereo jack adapter sends an external device sound signal to the radio receiver through this circuit. The sound signal that has been sent is amplified by the stereo component amplifier, and then is sent to the speakers. If there is an open or short in the circuit, sound cannot be heard from the speakers even if there is no malfunction in the stereo component amplifier, radio receiver, or speakers.

WIRING DIAGRAM Stereo Jack Adapter

Radio Receiver

Noise Filter

AUXO (Shielded) ALO

AUXI (Shielded)

ALI

ALO

ALI

AV ARO

ASGN

ARI

ASG1

ARO

ASGO

ARI

ASGN

E130771E01


AV–34

AUDIO / VISUAL – AUDIO AND VISUAL SYSTEM

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

1

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (RADIO RECEIVER - STEREO JACK ADAPTER) (a) Disconnect the D74 radio receiver connector and D75 stereo jack adapter connector. (b) Measure the resistance. Standard resistance

Radio Receiver (harness side connector): ASGN

ALI

D74

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

ARI

AUXI

Stereo Jack Adapter (harness side connector): ALO

AV

ASGN

D75 ARO

AUXO

Tester Connection

Specified Condition

AUXI (D74-19) - AUXO (D75-4)

Below 1 Ω

ALI (D74-17) - ALO (D75-1)

Below 1 Ω

ARI (D74-15) - ARO (D75-2)

Below 1 Ω

ASGN (D74-16) - ASGN (D75-3)

Below 1 Ω

AUXI (D74-19) or AUXO (D75-4) Body ground

10 kΩ or higher

ALI (D74-17) - or ALO (D75-1) - Body ground

10 kΩ or higher

ARI (D74-15) or ARO (D75-2) - Body ground

10 kΩ or higher

ASGN (D74-16) or ASGN (D75-3) Body ground

10 kΩ or higher

NG

REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS OR CONNECTOR

E132582E01

OK PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION SHOWN IN PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE


AV–35

AUDIO / VISUAL – AUDIO AND VISUAL SYSTEM

Radio Receiver Power Source Circuit DESCRIPTION This circuit provides power to the radio receiver.

WIRING DIAGRAM

Radio Receiver

ACC Cut ACC AM1

ACC

ACC

Ignition Switch

AV

AM1 B

ACCR ECM ALT

MAIN

DOME GND

E118194E02

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

1

INSPECT FUSE (ACC, AM1, DOME) (a) Remove the ACC fuse and AM1 fuse from the main body ECU. (b) Remove the DOME fuse from the engine room R/B.


AV–36

AUDIO / VISUAL – AUDIO AND VISUAL SYSTEM

(c) Measure the resistance of the fuses. Standard resistance: Below 1 Ω NG

REPLACE FUSE

OK

2

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (RADIO RECEIVER - BATTERY AND BODY GROUND) (a) Disconnect the D10 receiver connector. (b) Measure the voltage. Standard voltage

Radio Receiver (harness side connector): ACC D10

1 2 5

6 7 8 9 10

GND

AV

3 4

B

E106746E05

Tester Connection

Condition

Specified Condition

D10-4 (B) - Body ground

Always

11 to 14 V

D10-3 (ACC) - Body ground

Ignition switch ACC

11 to 14 V

(c) Measure the resistance. Standard resistance Tester Connection

Specified Condition

D10-7 (GND) - Body ground

Below 1 Ω

NG

REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS OR CONNECTOR

OK PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION SHOWN IN PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE


AV–35

AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO RECEIVER (for Sedan)

RADIO RECEIVER (for Sedan) BODY ELECTRICAL AUDIO / VISUAL

COMPONENTS

except Integrated with Panel: HAZARD WARNING SIGNAL SWITCH CONNECTOR

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER CENTER FINISH PANEL SUB-ASSEMBLY

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER FINISH PANEL

INSTRUMENT PANEL FINISH PANEL END RH

INSTRUMENT PANEL FINISH PANEL END LH INSTRUMENT PANEL LOWER CENTER FINISH PANEL

B138612E01

AV


AV–36

AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO RECEIVER (for Sedan)

RADIO CONNECTOR x4

AV PLUG

RADIO RECEIVER ASSEMBLY

for Integrated with Panel: HAZARD WARNING SIGNAL SWITCH CONNECTOR

RADIO CONNECTOR

x4

PLUG

RADIO RECEIVER ASSEMBLY

B138573E01


AV–37

AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO RECEIVER (for Sedan)

RADIO BRACKET RH

x4 RADIO BRACKET LH

x4

AV

for Integrated with Panel: INSTRUMENT PANEL CENTER REGISTER ASSEMBLY

RADIO BRACKET RH

x4 RADIO BRACKET LH

x4

B138574E01


AV–38

AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO RECEIVER (for Sedan)

REMOVAL

AV

1.

DISCONNECT CABLE FROM NEGATIVE BATTERY TERMINAL

2.

REMOVE INSTRUMENT PANEL LOWER CENTER FINISH PANEL (See page ME-138)

3.

REMOVE INSTRUMENT PANEL FINISH PANEL END RH (See page ME-138)

4.

REMOVE INSTRUMENT PANEL FINISH PANEL END LH (See page ME-138)

5.

REMOVE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER FINISH PANEL (See page ME-139)

6.

REMOVE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER CENTER FINISH PANEL SUB-ASSEMBLY (except Integrated with Panel) (See page IP-43)

7.

REMOVE RADIO RECEIVER ASSEMBLY (a) for Integrated with Panel: (1) Disconnect the hazard warning signal switch connector. (2) Remove the 4 bolts.

B138579

(3) Disengage the 4 clips and the 4 claws and remove the radio receiver.

B138580


AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO RECEIVER (for Sedan)

AV–39

(4) Disconnect the plug. (5) Disconnect the 3 radio connectors.

B138582

(b) except Integrated with Panel: (1) Remove the 4 bolts and the radio receiver.

B138575

(2) Disconnect the plug. (3) Disconnect the 2 radio connectors.

B138304

AV


AV–40

AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO RECEIVER (for Sedan)

DISASSEMBLY 1.

REMOVE INSTRUMENT PANEL CENTER REGISTER ASSEMBLY (for Integrated with Panel) (See page LI166)

2.

REMOVE RADIO BRACKET RH (a) for Integrated with Panel: (1) Remove the 4 screws and the radio bracket.

B138583

(b) except Integrated with Panel: (1) Remove the 4 screws and the radio bracket. 3.

REMOVE RADIO BRACKET LH HINT: Use the same procedure as for the RH side.

AV B138577

REASSEMBLY 1.

INSTALL RADIO BRACKET RH (a) for Integrated with Panel: (1) Align the 6 bosses of the radio bracket with the hole in the radio receiver and install the radio bracket with the 2 screws.

B138584

(b) except Integrated with Panel: (1) Align the 6 bosses of the radio bracket with the hole in the radio receiver and install the radio bracket with the 4 screws.

B138578

2.

REMOVE RADIO BRACKET LH HINT: Use the same procedure as for the RH side.

3.

INSTALL INSTRUMENT PANEL CENTER REGISTER ASSEMBLY (for Integrated with Panel) (See page LI168)


AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO RECEIVER (for Sedan)

AV–41

INSTALLATION 1.

INSTALL RADIO RECEIVER ASSEMBLY (a) for Integrated with Panel: (1) Connect the plug. (2) Connect the 3 radio connectors.

B138582

(3) Align the 2 bosses of the instrument panel with the hole in the radio bracket. (4) Engage the 4 clips and 4 claws and install the radio receiver.

AV

B138581

(5) Tighten the 4 bolts. (6) Connect the hazard warning signal switch connector.

B138579


AV–42

AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO RECEIVER (for Sedan)

(b) except Integrated with Panel: (1) Connect the plug. (2) Connect the 2 radio connectors.

B138304

(3) Align the 2 bosses of the instrument panel with the hole in the radio bracket. (4) Install the radio receiver with the 4 bolts.

AV B138576

2.

INSTALL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER CENTER FINISH PANEL SUB-ASSEMBLY (except Integrated with Panel) (See page IP-56)

3.

INSTALL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER FINISH PANEL (See page ME-140)

4.

INSTALL INSTRUMENT PANEL FINISH PANEL END RH (See page ME-141)

5.

INSTALL INSTRUMENT PANEL FINISH PANEL END LH (See page ME-141)

6.

INSTALL INSTRUMENT PANEL LOWER CENTER FINISH PANEL (See page ME-142)

7.

CONNECT CABLE TO NEGATIVE BATTERY TERMINAL Torque: 5.4 N*m (55 kgf*cm, 48 in.*lbf)


AV–42

AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO RECEIVER (for Hatchback)

RADIO RECEIVER (for Hatchback) BODY ELECTRICAL AUDIO / VISUAL

COMPONENTS INSTRUMENT CLUSTER FINISH PANEL

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER CENTER FINISH PANEL SUB-ASSEMBLY

INSTRUMENT PANEL FINISH PANEL END RH INSTRUMENT PANEL FINISH PANEL END LH

AV

x4

RADIO RECEIVER ASSEMBLY

w/ CD Player:

x4

RADIO RECEIVER ASSEMBLY

B138642E01


AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO RECEIVER (for Hatchback)

AV–43

STEREO OPENING COVER x2 RADIO BRACKET RH x2 RADIO BRACKET LH

AV w/ CD Player:

x4

RADIO BRACKET RH x4

RADIO BRACKET LH

B138643E01


AV–44

AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO RECEIVER (for Hatchback)

REMOVAL 1.

DISCONNECT CABLE FROM NEGATIVE BATTERY TERMINAL

2.

REMOVE INSTRUMENT PANEL FINISH PANEL END RH (See page ME-145)

3.

REMOVE INSTRUMENT PANEL FINISH PANEL END LH (See page ME-145)

4.

REMOVE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER FINISH PANEL (See page ME-145)

5.

REMOVE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER CENTER FINISH PANEL SUB-ASSEMBLY (See page AC-250)

6.

REMOVE RADIO RECEIVER ASSEMBLY (a) Remove the 4 screws. (b) Disconnect the connectors and remove the radio receiver.

AV E116762

DISASSEMBLY 1.

REMOVE RADIO BRACKET RH (a) w/ CD Player: (1) Remove the 4 screws and remove the radio bracket.

E107794

(b) w/o CD Player: (1) Remove the 3 screws and remove the radio bracket.

E107789


AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO RECEIVER (for Hatchback)

2.

AV–45

REMOVE RADIO BRACKET LH (a) w/ CD Player: (1) Remove the 4 screws and remove the radio bracket.

E107793

(b) w/o CD Player: (1) Remove the 3 screws and remove the radio bracket.

E107790

REASSEMBLY 1.

INSTALL RADIO BRACKET RH (a) w/ CD Player: (1) Install the radio bracket with the 4 screws.

E107794

(b) w/o CD Player: (1) Install the radio bracket with the 3 screws.

E107789

2.

E107793

INSTALL RADIO BRACKET LH (a) w/ CD Player: (1) Install the radio bracket with the 4 screws.

AV


AV–46

AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO RECEIVER (for Hatchback)

(b) w/o CD Player: (1) Install the radio bracket with the 3 screws.

E107790

INSTALLATION 1.

INSTALL RADIO RECEIVER ASSEMBLY (a) Connect the connectors. (b) Install the radio receiver with the 4 screws.

2.

INSTALL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER CENTER FINISH PANEL SUB-ASSEMBLY (See page AC-258)

3.

INSTALL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER FINISH PANEL (See page ME-148)

4.

INSTALL INSTRUMENT PANEL FINISH PANEL END RH (See page ME-149)

5.

INSTALL INSTRUMENT PANEL FINISH PANEL END LH (See page ME-149)

6.

CONNECT CABLE TO NEGATIVE BATTERY TERMINAL Torque: 5.4 N*m (55 kgf*cm, 48 in.*lbf)

E116762

AV


AV–47

AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Sedan)

RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Sedan) BODY ELECTRICAL AUDIO / VISUAL

COMPONENTS for 60/40 Split Seat Type:

REAR SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY

REAR CENTER SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY

REAR SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY

REAR SEATBACK ASSEMBLY RH

AV

x2 REAR SEATBACK ASSEMBLY LH x2

37 (375, 27)

37 (375, 27)

REAR SEAT INNER BELT ASSEMBLY RH

37 (375, 27)

37 (375, 27)

REAR SEAT INNER BELT ASSEMBLY LH

REAR SEAT CUSHION COVER PAD SUB-ASSEMBLY N*m (kgf*cm, ft*lbf) : Specified torque B138665E04


AV–48

AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Sedan)

for Fixed Seat Type:

REAR SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY RH

REAR CENTER SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY

REAR SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY LH

AV 7.9 (80, 70 in.*lbf)

x3 REAR SEATBACK ASSEMBLY

REAR SEAT INNER BELT ASSEMBLY RH

REAR SEAT INNER BELT ASSEMBLY LH

REAR SEAT CUSHION COVER PAD SUB-ASSEMBLY

N*m (kgf*cm, ft*lbf) : Specified torque B138611E01


AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Sedan)

AV–49

for 60/40 Split Seat Type:

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT FLOOR MAT

AV SPARE WHEEL COVER ASSEMBLY

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT TRIM INNER PAD

for Grand Tire:

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT TRIM INNER PAD

B138565E01


AV–50

AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Sedan)

w/ Curtain Shield Airbag:

x2

CENTER PILLAR UPPER GARNISH RH

FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY RH

42 (430, 31)

AV FRONT PILLAR GARNISH RH

FRONT DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP RH

SEAT BELT ANCHOR COVER CAP

CENTER PILLAR LOWER GARNISH RH FRONT DOOR SCUFF PLATE RH COWL SIDE TRIM BOARD RH

INSTRUMENT PANEL UNDER COVER SUB-ASSEMBLY RH

N*m (kgf*cm, ft*lbf) : Specified torque Non-reusable part B138593E01


AV–51

AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Sedan)

w/ Curtain Shield Airbag:

x2 SEAT BELT ANCHOR COVER CAP 42 (430, 31)

CENTER PILLAR UPPER GARNISH LH

FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY LH

AV

FRONT PILLAR GARNISH LH

x2

FRONT DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP LH

CENTER PILLAR LOWER GARNISH LH

INSTRUMENT PANEL UNDER COVER SUB-ASSEMBLY LH FRONT DOOR SCUFF PLATE LH COWL SIDE TRIM BOARD LH

N*m (kgf*cm, ft*lbf) : Specified torque Non-reusable part B138594E01


AV–52

AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Sedan)

w/ Curtain Shield Airbag:

AV

ROOF SIDE INNER GARNISH RH REAR DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP RH

REAR SEAT SIDE COVER RH

REAR DOOR SCUFF PLATE RH

Non-reusable part B134769E01


AV–53

AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Sedan)

w/ Curtain Shield Airbag:

ROOF SIDE INNER GARNISH LH REAR DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP LH

REAR SEAT SIDE COVER LH

REAR DOOR SCUFF PLATE LH

Non-reusable part B134770E01

AV


AV–54

AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Sedan)

HAZARD WARNING SIGNAL SWITCH CONNECTOR

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER CENTER FINISH PANEL SUB-ASSEMBLY

for Integrated with Panel:

AV

x4 RADIO RECEIVER ASSEMBLY

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER FINISH PANEL

INSTRUMENT PANEL FINISH PANEL END RH

INSTRUMENT PANEL FINISH PANEL END LH INSTRUMENT PANEL LOWER CENTER FINISH PANEL

B138571E01


AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Sedan)

COMBINATION METER ASSEMBLY

AV–55

x2 x2

UPPER INSTRUMENT PANEL SUB-ASSEMBLY

x2

20 (204, 15)

GLOVE COMPARTMENT DOOR ASSEMBLY

N*m (kgf*cm, ft*lbf) : Specified torque B138613E01

AV


AV–56

AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Sedan)

ROOF HEADLINING ASSEMBLY

x2

x4

AV

x2 ASSIST GRIP COVER

ASSIST GRIP SUB-ASSEMBLY

ROOM LIGHT ASSEMBLY

MAP LIGHT ASSEMBLY VISOR ASSEMBLY RH

VISOR HOLDER RH VISOR HOLDER LH

VISOR ASSEMBLY LH

B138690E01


AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Sedan)

AV–57

ANTENNA AMPLIFIER CONNECTOR

ANTENNA CORD SUB-ASSEMBLY

AV w/ Curtain Shield Airbag:

NO. 2 ANTENNA CORD SUB-ASSEMBLY

x8

x6

Non-reusable part B138586E01


AV–58

AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Sedan)

REMOVAL CAUTION: Some of these service operations affect the SRS airbag system. Read the precautionary notices concerning the SRS airbag system before servicing (See page RS-1).

AV

1.

DISCONNECT CABLE FROM NEGATIVE BATTERY TERMINAL CAUTION: Wait for at least 90 seconds after disconnecting the cable to prevent the airbag from working.

2.

REMOVE REAR SEAT CUSHION COVER PAD SUBASSEMBLY (a) for 60/40 Split Seat Type: (1) Remove the rear seat cushion cover pad subassembly (See page SE-46). (b) for Fixed Seat Type: (1) Remove the rear seat cushion cover pad subassembly (See page SE-106).

3.

REMOVE REAR SEATBACK ASSEMBLY RH (for 60/ 40 Split Seat Type) (See page SE-57)

4.

REMOVE REAR SEATBACK ASSEMBLY LH (for 60/ 40 Split Seat Type) (See page SE-46)

5.

REMOVE REAR SEATBACK ASSEMBLY (for Fixed Seat Type) (See page SE-106)

6.

REMOVE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT FLOOR MAT (for 60/40 Split Seat Type) (See page ED-133)

7.

REMOVE SPARE WHEEL COVER ASSEMBLY (for 60/ 40 Split Seat Type) (See page ED-133)

8.

REMOVE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT TRIM INNER PAD (for 60/40 Split Seat Type) (See page ED-134)

9.

REMOVE FRONT DOOR SCUFF PLATE RH (See page IR-14)

10. REMOVE FRONT DOOR SCUFF PLATE LH (See page IR-14) 11. REMOVE INSTRUMENT PANEL UNDER COVER SUBASSEMBLY RH (See page IR-14) 12. REMOVE INSTRUMENT PANEL UNDER COVER SUBASSEMBLY LH (See page IR-14) 13. REMOVE COWL SIDE TRIM BOARD RH (See page IR-15) 14. REMOVE COWL SIDE TRIM BOARD LH (See page IR15) 15. REMOVE FRONT DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP RH (See page IR-15) 16. REMOVE FRONT DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP LH (See page IR-15)


AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Sedan)

AV–59

17. REMOVE REAR DOOR SCUFF PLATE RH (See page IR-15) 18. REMOVE REAR DOOR SCUFF PLATE LH (See page IR-15) 19. REMOVE REAR DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP RH (See page IR-15) 20. REMOVE REAR DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP LH (See page IR-15) 21. REMOVE REAR SEAT SIDE COVER RH (See page IR16) 22. REMOVE REAR SEAT SIDE COVER LH (See page IR16) 23. REMOVE ROOF SIDE INNER GARNISH RH (See page IR-16) 24. REMOVE ROOF SIDE INNER GARNISH LH (See page IR-16) 25. REMOVE CENTER PILLAR LOWER GARNISH RH (See page IR-16) 26. REMOVE CENTER PILLAR LOWER GARNISH LH (See page IR-16) 27. REMOVE SEAT BELT ANCHOR COVER CAP (See page IR-17) 28. REMOVE FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY RH (See page IR-17) 29. REMOVE FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY LH (See page IR-17) 30. REMOVE CENTER PILLAR UPPER GARNISH RH (See page IR-17) 31. REMOVE CENTER PILLAR UPPER GARNISH LH (See page IR-17) 32. REMOVE FRONT PILLAR GARNISH RH (See page IR18) 33. REMOVE FRONT PILLAR GARNISH LH (See page IR19) 34. REMOVE INSTRUMENT PANEL LOWER CENTER FINISH PANEL (See page ME-138) 35. REMOVE INSTRUMENT PANEL FINISH PANEL END RH (See page ME-138) 36. REMOVE INSTRUMENT PANEL FINISH PANEL END LH (See page ME-138) 37. REMOVE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER FINISH PANEL (See page ME-139) 38. REMOVE COMBINATION METER ASSEMBLY (See page ME-139)

AV


AV–60

AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Sedan)

39. REMOVE GLOVE COMPARTMENT DOOR ASSEMBLY (See page IP-6) 40. REMOVE UPPER INSTRUMENT PANEL SUBASSEMBLY (See page IP-6) 41. REMOVE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER CENTER FINISH PANEL SUB-ASSEMBLY (except Integrated with Panel) (See page IP-43) 42. REMOVE RADIO RECEIVER ASSEMBLY (See page AV-38) 43. REMOVE ANTENNA CORD SUB-ASSEMBLY (a) Remove the bolt, the hook and the bracket. (b) Using a clip remover, remove the clamp. (c) Disconnect the antenna amplifier connector. (d) Remove the 5 clamps and the antenna cord.

AV

B138389

44. REMOVE ASSIST GRIP COVER (See page IR-21) 45. REMOVE ASSIST GRIP SUB-ASSEMBLY (See page IR-21) 46. REMOVE VISOR ASSEMBLY RH (See page IR-21) 47. REMOVE VISOR ASSEMBLY LH (See page IR-22) 48. REMOVE VISOR HOLDER RH (See page IR-22) 49. REMOVE VISOR HOLDER LH (See page IR-22) 50. REMOVE ROOM LIGHT ASSEMBLY (See page IR-22) 51. REMOVE MAP LIGHT ASSEMBLY (See page IR-23)


AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Sedan)

AV–61

52. REMOVE ROOF HEADLINING ASSEMBLY (a) Using a clip remover, remove the clamp. (b) Disconnect the antenna connector.

B134788

(c) w/ Curtain Shield Airbag: (1) Using a clip remover, remove the 2 clips. (2) Disengage the 4 hooks and remove the roof headlining.

B134793

AV

(d) w/o Curtain Shield Airbag: (1) Using a clip remover, remove the 2 clips. (2) Disengage the 2 claws and 4 hooks and remove the roof headlining. 53. REMOVE NO. 2 ANTENNA CORD SUB-ASSEMBLY (a) w/ Curtain Shield Airbag: (1) Remove the 8 pieces of tape. (2) Remove the No. 2 antenna cord from the 4 claws of the front and rear side real spacers. B134794

B138628

(b) w/ Curtain Shield Airbag: (1) Remove the 6 pieces of tape. (2) Remove the No. 2 antenna cord from the 6 claws of the front and rear side real spacers.


AV–62

AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Sedan)

B138629

AV


AV–63

AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Sedan)

INSTALLATION CAUTION: Some of these service operations affect the SRS airbag system. Read the precautionary notices concerning the SRS airbag system before servicing (See page RS-1). 1.

INSTALL NO. 2 ANTENNA CORD SUB-ASSEMBLY (a) w/ Curtain Shield Airbag: (1) Install the antenna cord positioning tapes into the 4 claws of the front and rear side rail spacers. (2) Align the antenna cord positioning tapes with the markings on the roof headlining. (3) Install the antenna cord onto the roof headlining with 8 new pieces of tape.

b a

AV Tape

Positioning Tape

Marking B138630E01

Tape size: Mark

Measurement

a

80 mm (3.15 in.)

b

20 mm (0.787 in.)

NOTICE: • Apply the tape securely in place. • Do not touch the adhesive surface when applying the tape to prevent adhesion failure. (b) w/o Curtain Shield Airbag: (1) Install the antenna cord positioning tapes into the 6 claws of the front and rear side rail spacers. (2) Align the antenna cord positioning tapes with the markings on the roof headlining.


AV–64

AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Sedan)

(3) Install the antenna cord onto the roof headlining with 6 new pieces of tape.

b a Tape

Positioning Tape

Marking B138631E01

Tape size: Mark

AV

Measurement

a

80 mm (3.15 in.)

b

20 mm (0.787 in.)

NOTICE: • Apply the tape securely in place. • Do not touch the adhesive surface when applying the tape to prevent adhesion failure. 2.

INSTALL ROOF HEADLINING ASSEMBLY (a) w/ Curtain Shield Airbag: (1) Engage the 4 hooks and install the roof headlining. (2) Install the 2 clips.

B134793

(b) w/o Curtain Shield Airbag: (1) Engage the 2 claws and 4 hooks and install the roof headlining. (2) Install the 2 clips.

B134794


AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Sedan)

AV–65

(c) Connect the antenna connector. (d) Install the clamp. 3.

INSTALL MAP LIGHT ASSEMBLY (See page IR-26)

4.

INSTALL ROOM LIGHT ASSEMBLY (See page IR-27)

5.

INSTALL VISOR HOLDER RH (See page IR-28)

6.

INSTALL VISOR HOLDER LH (See page IR-28)

7.

INSTALL VISOR ASSEMBLY RH (See page IR-28)

8.

INSTALL VISOR ASSEMBLY LH (See page IR-28)

9.

INSTALL ASSIST GRIP SUB-ASSEMBLY (See page IR-28)

B134788

10. INSTALL ASSIST GRIP COVER (See page IR-29) 11. INSTALL ANTENNA CORD SUB-ASSEMBLY (a) Install the antenna cord with the 5 clamps. (b) Connect the antenna amplifier connector. (c) Insert the hook into the body hole and install the bracket with the bolt.

AV

B138389

12. INSTALL RADIO RECEIVER ASSEMBLY (See page AV-40) 13. INSTALL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER CENTER FINISH PANEL SUB-ASSEMBLY (except Integrated with Panel) (See page IP-56) 14. INSTALL UPPER INSTRUMENT PANEL SUBASSEMBLY (See page IP-11) 15. INSTALL GLOVE COMPARTMENT DOOR ASSEMBLY (See page IP-13)


AV–66

AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Sedan)

16. INSTALL COMBINATION METER ASSEMBLY (See page ME-140) 17. INSTALL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER FINISH PANEL (See page ME-140) 18. INSTALL INSTRUMENT PANEL FINISH PANEL END RH (See page ME-141) 19. INSTALL INSTRUMENT PANEL FINISH PANEL END LH (See page ME-141) 20. INSTALL INSTRUMENT PANEL LOWER CENTER FINISH PANEL (See page ME-142) 21. INSTALL FRONT PILLAR GARNISH RH (See page IR29) 22. INSTALL FRONT PILLAR GARNISH LH (See page IR30) 23. INSTALL CENTER PILLAR UPPER GARNISH RH (See page IR-31)

AV

24. INSTALL CENTER PILLAR UPPER GARNISH LH (See page IR-31) 25. INSTALL FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY RH (See page IR-31) 26. INSTALL FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY LH (See page IR-31) 27. INSTALL SEAT BELT ANCHOR COVER CAP (See page IR-32) 28. INSTALL CENTER PILLAR LOWER GARNISH RH (See page IR-16) 29. INSTALL CENTER PILLAR LOWER GARNISH LH (See page IR-32) 30. INSTALL ROOF SIDE INNER GARNISH RH (See page IR-32) 31. INSTALL ROOF SIDE INNER GARNISH LH (See page IR-33) 32. INSTALL REAR SEAT SIDE COVER RH (See page IR33) 33. INSTALL REAR SEAT SIDE COVER LH (See page IR33) 34. INSTALL REAR DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP RH (See page IR-33) 35. INSTALL REAR DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP LH (See page IR-33) 36. INSTALL REAR DOOR SCUFF PLATE RH (See page IR-34) 37. INSTALL REAR DOOR SCUFF PLATE LH (See page IR-34)


AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Sedan)

AV–67

38. INSTALL FRONT DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP RH (See page IR-34) 39. INSTALL FRONT DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP LH (See page IR-34) 40. INSTALL COWL SIDE TRIM BOARD RH (See page IR34) 41. INSTALL COWL SIDE TRIM BOARD LH (See page IR34) 42. INSTALL INSTRUMENT PANEL UNDER COVER SUBASSEMBLY RH (See page IR-35) 43. INSTALL INSTRUMENT PANEL UNDER COVER SUBASSEMBLY LH (See page IR-35) 44. INSTALL FRONT DOOR SCUFF PLATE RH (See page IR-35) 45. INSTALL FRONT DOOR SCUFF PLATE LH (See page IR-35) 46. INSTALL LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT TRIM INNER PAD (for 60/40 Split Seat Type) (See page ED-136) 47. INSTALL SPARE WHEEL COVER ASSEMBLY (for 60/ 40 Split Seat Type) (See page ED-137) 48. INSTALL LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT FLOOR MAT (for 60/40 Split Seat Type) (See page ED-137) 49. INSTALL REAR SEATBACK ASSEMBLY RH (for 60/ 40 Split Seat Type) (See page SE-65) 50. INSTALL REAR SEATBACK ASSEMBLY LH (for 60/40 Split Seat Type) (See page SE-52) 51. INSTALL REAR SEATBACK ASSEMBLY (for Fixed Seat Type) (See page SE-108) 52. INSTALL REAR SEAT CUSHION COVER PAD SUBASSEMBLY (a) for 60/40 Split Seat Type: (1) Install the rear seat cushion cover pad subassembly (See page SE-53). (b) for Fixed Seat Type: (1) Install the rear seat cushion cover pad subassembly (See page SE-109). 53. CONNECT CABLE TO NEGATIVE BATTERY TERMINAL Torque: 5.4 N*m (55 kgf*cm, 48 in.*lbf) 54. INSPECT SRS WARNING LIGHT (See page RS-31)

AV


AV–68

AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Hatchback 5 Door)

RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Hatchback 5 Door) BODY ELECTRICAL AUDIO / VISUAL

COMPONENTS

PACKAGE TRAY TRIM PANEL ASSEMBLY

AV

DECK BOARD SUB-ASSEMBLY

DECK FLOOR BOX RH

DECK FLOOR BOX LH

B114273E01


AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Hatchback 5 Door)

AV–69

for 60/40 Split Seat Type:

REAR SEAT ASSEMBLY RH

NO. 1 REAR SEAT LEG COVER

37 (375, 27)

REAR SEAT ASSEMBLY LH

x6

AV

NO. 2 REAR SEAT LEG COVER

NO. 1 REAR SEAT LEG COVER

37 (375, 27)

x7

for Hold Down Seat Type:

REAR SEATBACK ASSEMBLY REAR SEAT CUSHION COVER PAD SUB-ASSEMBLY

37 (375, 27)

x4

N*m (kgf*cm, ft*lbf) : Specified torque B121713E03


AV–70

AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Hatchback 5 Door)

w/ Curtain Shield Airbag:

FRONT PILLAR GARNISH RH

42 (430, 31)

FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY RH

AV

FRONT PILLAR GARNISH RH

FRONT DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP RH

SEAT BELT ANCHOR COVER CAP

CENTER PILLAR UPPER GARNISH RH

CENTER PILLAR LOWER GARNISH RH FRONT DOOR SCUFF PLATE RH COWL SIDE TRIM BOARD RH INSTRUMENT PANEL UNDER COVER SUB-ASSEMBLY RH

N*m (kgf*cm, ft*lbf) : Specified torque Non-reusable part B114276E02


AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Hatchback 5 Door)

AV–71

w/ Curtain Shield Airbag:

FRONT PILLAR GARNISH LH

42 (430, 31)

SEAT BELT ANCHOR COVER CAP

CENTER PILLAR UPPER GARNISH LH

FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY LH

AV

FRONT PILLAR GARNISH LH

x2

FRONT DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP LH

CENTER PILLAR LOWER GARNISH LH

INSTRUMENT PANEL UNDER COVER SUB-ASSEMBLY LH

FRONT DOOR SCUFF PLATE LH COWL SIDE TRIM BOARD LH

N*m (kgf*cm, ft*lbf) : Specified torque Non-reusable part B114277E02


AV–72

AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Hatchback 5 Door)

w/ Curtain Shield Airbag: ROOF SIDE INNER GARNISH RH REAR CENTER SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY

REAR DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP RH

42 (430, 31)

AV DECK TRIM SIDE PANEL ASSEMBLY RH x2

42 (430, 31)

x2 REAR DOOR SCUFF PLATE RH

REAR DECK TRIM COVER REAR SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY RH

N*m (kgf*cm, ft*lbf) : Specified torque Non-reusable part B114274E07


AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Hatchback 5 Door)

AV–73

REAR SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY LH

ROOF SIDE INNER GARNISH LH

w/ Curtain Shield Airbag: REAR DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP LH

x2

42 (430, 31)

AV

DECK TRIM SIDE PANEL ASSEMBLY LH

REAR DOOR SCUFF PLATE LH

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT ROOM LIGHT CONNECTOR

N*m (kgf*cm, ft*lbf) : Specified torque Non-reusable part B114275E11


AV–74

AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Hatchback 5 Door)

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER FINISH PANEL x2 COMBINATION METER ASSEMBLY x2

x2

AV UPPER INSTRUMENT PANEL SUB-ASSEMBLY

x2

20 (204, 15)

NO. 1 SWITCH HOLE BASE GLOVE COMPARTMENT DOOR ASSEMBLY

INSTRUMENT PANEL FINISH PANEL END LH

INSTRUMENT PANEL FINISH PANEL END RH

N*m (kgf*cm, ft*lbf) : Specified torque B138684E01


AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Hatchback 5 Door)

AV–75

NO. 2 ANTENNA CORD SUB-ASSEMBLY

AV

B138685E01


AV–76

AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Hatchback 5 Door)

w/ Curtain Shield Airbag:

ROOF HEADLINING ASSEMBLY

SEAT BELT ANCHOR COVER

AV x4

x8

ASSIST GRIP SUB-ASSEMBLY

ASSIST GRIP COVER

ROOM LIGHT ASSEMBLY

MAP LIGHT ASSEMBLY VISOR ASSEMBLY RH

VISOR HOLDER RH VISOR HOLDER LH

VISOR ASSEMBLY LH

B138686E01


AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Hatchback 5 Door)

AV–77

w/o Curtain Shield Airbag: ROOF HEADLINING ASSEMBLY

SEAT BELT ANCHOR COVER

x6

AV

ROOF HEADLINING SERVICE HOLE COVER

ASSIST GRIP SUB-ASSEMBLY x2

ASSIST GRIP COVER

ROOM LIGHT ASSEMBLY

VISOR ASSEMBLY RH

MAP LIGHT ASSEMBLY

VISOR HOLDER RH VISOR HOLDER LH

VISOR ASSEMBLY LH

B138687E01


AV–78

AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Hatchback 5 Door)

w/ Curtain Shield Airbag:

x6 ANTENNA CORD SUB-ASSEMBLY

AV

Non-reusable part B138688E01


AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Hatchback 5 Door)

AV–79

w/o Curtain Shield Airbag:

x4 ANTENNA CORD SUB-ASSEMBLY

AV

Non-reusable part B138689E01


AV–80

AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Hatchback 5 Door)

REMOVAL CAUTION: Some of these service operations affect the SRS airbag system. Read the precautionary notices concerning the SRS airbag system before servicing (See page RS-1). NOTICE: Always use "Torx" socket wrench E10 when removing the rear seat. 1.

DISCONNECT CABLE FROM NEGATIVE BATTERY TERMINAL CAUTION: Wait for at least 90 seconds after disconnecting the cable to prevent the airbag from working

2.

REMOVE DECK BOARD SUB-ASSEMBLY (See page IR-48)

3.

REMOVE DECK FLOOR BOX RH (See page IR-48)

4.

REMOVE DECK FLOOR BOX LH (See page IR-48)

5.

REMOVE NO. 1 REAR SEAT LEG COVER (for 60/40 Split Seat Type) (a) for RH Side: (1) Remove the No. 1 rear seat leg cover (See page SE-89). (b) for LH Side: (1) Remove the No. 1 rear seat leg cover (See page SE-70).

6.

REMOVE NO. 2 REAR SEAT LEG COVER (for 60/40 Split Seat Type) (See page SE-70)

7.

REMOVE REAR SEAT ASSEMBLY RH (for 60/40 Split Seat Type) (See page SE-89)

8.

REMOVE REAR SEAT ASSEMBLY LH (for 60/40 Split Seat Type) (See page SE-71)

9.

REMOVE REAR SEAT CUSHION COVER PAD SUBASSEMBLY (for Hold Down Seat Type) (See page SE114)

AV

10. REMOVE REAR SEATBACK ASSEMBLY (for Hold Down Seat Type) (See page SE-115) 11. REMOVE REAR DECK TRIM COVER (See page IR-49) 12. REMOVE FRONT DOOR SCUFF PLATE RH (See page IR-49) 13. REMOVE FRONT DOOR SCUFF PLATE LH (See page IR-49) 14. REMOVE INSTRUMENT PANEL UNDER COVER SUBASSEMBLY RH (See page IR-50) 15. REMOVE INSTRUMENT PANEL UNDER COVER SUBASSEMBLY LH (See page IR-50)


AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Hatchback 5 Door)

AV–81

16. REMOVE COWL SIDE TRIM BOARD RH (See page IR-50) 17. REMOVE COWL SIDE TRIM BOARD LH (See page IR50) 18. REMOVE FRONT DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP RH (See page IR-50) 19. REMOVE FRONT DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP LH (See page IR-50) 20. REMOVE REAR DOOR SCUFF PLATE RH (See page IR-51) 21. REMOVE REAR DOOR SCUFF PLATE LH (See page IR-51) 22. REMOVE REAR DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP RH (See page IR-51) 23. REMOVE REAR DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP LH (See page IR-51) 24. REMOVE REAR SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY RH (See page IR-51) 25. REMOVE REAR SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY LH (See page IR-51) 26. REMOVE DECK TRIM SIDE PANEL ASSEMBLY RH (See page IR-52) 27. REMOVE DECK TRIM SIDE PANEL ASSEMBLY LH (See page IR-52) 28. REMOVE REAR CENTER SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY (See page IR-52) 29. REMOVE ROOF SIDE INNER GARNISH RH (See page IR-53) 30. REMOVE ROOF SIDE INNER GARNISH LH (See page IR-54) 31. REMOVE SEAT BELT ANCHOR COVER CAP (See page IR-54) 32. REMOVE FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY RH (See page IR-55) 33. REMOVE FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY LH (See page IR-55) 34. REMOVE CENTER PILLAR LOWER GARNISH RH (See page IR-55) 35. REMOVE CENTER PILLAR LOWER GARNISH LH (See page IR-55) 36. REMOVE CENTER PILLAR UPPER GARNISH RH (See page IR-55) 37. REMOVE CENTER PILLAR UPPER GARNISH LH (See page IR-55)

AV


AV–82

AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Hatchback 5 Door)

38. REMOVE SEAT BELT ANCHOR COVER (See page SB-159) 39. REMOVE ROOF HEADLINING SERVICE HOLE COVER (w/o Curtain Shield Airbag) (See page IR-55) 40. REMOVE ASSIST GRIP COVER (See page IR-55) 41. REMOVE ASSIST GRIP SUB-ASSEMBLY (See page IR-56) 42. REMOVE VISOR ASSEMBLY RH (See page IR-56) 43. REMOVE VISOR ASSEMBLY LH (See page IR-56) 44. REMOVE VISOR HOLDER RH (See page IR-56) 45. REMOVE VISOR HOLDER LH (See page IR-56) 46. REMOVE ROOM LIGHT ASSEMBLY (See page IR-57) 47. REMOVE MAP LIGHT ASSEMBLY (See page IR-58) 48. REMOVE FRONT PILLAR GARNISH RH (See page IR58)

AV

49. REMOVE FRONT PILLAR GARNISH LH (See page IR59) 50. REMOVE INSTRUMENT PANEL FINISH PANEL END RH (See page ME-145) 51. REMOVE INSTRUMENT PANEL FINISH PANEL END LH (See page ME-145) 52. REMOVE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER FINISH PANEL (See page ME-145) 53. REMOVE COMBINATION METER ASSEMBLY (See page ME-146) 54. REMOVE GLOVE COMPARTMENT DOOR ASSEMBLY (See page IP-20) 55. REMOVE NO. 1 SWITCH HOLE BASE (See page IP20) 56. REMOVE UPPER INSTRUMENT PANEL SUBASSEMBLY (See page IP-21) 57. REMOVE NO. 2 ANTENNA CORD SUB-ASSEMBLY (a) Remove the bolt and the bracket. (b) Disconnect the connector. (c) Disconnect the plug. (d) Using a clip remover, remove the clamp.


AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Hatchback 5 Door)

AV–83

(e) Remove the 3 clamps and the No. 2 antenna cord.

AV

B138691

58. REMOVE ROOF HEADLINING ASSEMBLY (a) Remove the antenna cord from the antenna cord clamp. (b) Disconnect the 2 connectors. (c) Using a clip remover, remove the 2 connectors. (d) w/ Curtain Shield Airbag: (1) Using a clip remover, remove the clip.

B114321


AV–84

AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Hatchback 5 Door)

(2) Disengage the 4 hooks.

B114324

(e) w/o Curtain Shield Airbag: (1) Using a clip remover, remove the clip. (2) Disengage the 2 claws and 4 hooks.

AV

B114322

59. REMOVE ANTENNA CORD SUB-ASSEMBLY (a) w/ Curtain Shield Airbag: (1) Remove the 6 pieces of tape. (2) Remove the antenna cord from the cutout of the roof headlining.


AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Hatchback 5 Door)

AV–85

(3) Remove the antenna cord from the 3 claws of the front and rear side rail spacers.

Tape

Cutout

E107811E01

(b) w/o Curtain Shield Airbag: (1) Remove the 4 pieces of tape. (2) Remove the antenna cord from the cutout of the roof headlining. (3) Remove the antenna cord from the 5 claws of the front and rear side rail spacers.

AV Tape

Cutout

E107812E01


AV–86

AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Hatchback 5 Door)

INSTALLATION CAUTION: Some of these service operations affect the SRS airbag system. Read the precautionary notices concerning the SRS airbag system before servicing (See page RS-1). NOTICE: Always use "Torx" socket wrench E10 when installing the rear seat. 1.

AV

INSTALL ANTENNA CORD SUB-ASSEMBLY (a) w/ Curtain Shield Airbag: (1) Install the part of the antenna cord marked with red positioning tape into claw A of the front side rail spacer. (2) Install the antenna cord positioning tapes into the 2 claws of the front and rear side rail spacers. (3) Insert the antenna cord positioning tape into the cutout of the roof headlining. (4) Align the antenna cord positioning tapes with the markings of the roof headlining. (5) Install the antenna cord onto the roof headlining with 6 new pieces of tape.

A

Cutout

Tape

a b Positioning Tape

Marking E107814E02

Tape size: Mark

Measurement

a

80 mm (3.15 in.)

b

20 mm (0.787 in.)

NOTICE: • Apply the tape securely in place. • Do not touch the adhesive surface when applying the tape to prevent adhesion failure. (b) w/o Curtain Shield Airbag: (1) Install the part of the antenna cord marked with red positioning tape into claw A of the front side rail spacer.


AV–87

AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Hatchback 5 Door)

(2) Install the antenna cord positioning tapes into the 4 claws of the front and rear side rail spacers. (3) Insert the antenna cord positioning tape into the cutout of the roof headlining. (4) Align the antenna cord positioning tapes with the markings of the roof headlining. (5) Install the antenna cord onto the roof headlining with 4 new pieces of tape.

A

Cutout

Tape

a b Positioning Tape

AV

Marking E107815E02

Tape size: Mark

Measurement

a

80 mm (3.15 in.)

b

20 mm (0.787 in.)

NOTICE: • Apply the tape securely in place. • Do not touch the adhesive surface when applying the tape to prevent adhesion failure. 2.

INSTALL ROOF HEADLINING ASSEMBLY (a) w/ Curtain Shield Airbag: (1) Engage the 4 hooks and install the roof headlining.


AV–88

AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Hatchback 5 Door)

(2) Install the clip.

B114324

(b) w/o Curtain Shield Airbag: (1) Engage the 2 claws and the 4 hooks and install the roof headlining. (2) Install the clip.

AV

B114322

(c) Install the 2 connectors. (d) Connect the 2 connectors. (e) Install the antenna cord onto the antenna cord clamp. 3.

B114321

INSTALL NO. 2 ANTENNA CORD SUB-ASSEMBLY (a) Install the No. 2 antenna cord with the 4 clamps. (b) Connect the plug. (c) Connect the connector.


AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Hatchback 5 Door)

AV–89

(d) Install the bracket with the bolt.

AV

B138691

4.

INSTALL UPPER INSTRUMENT PANEL SUBASSEMBLY (See page IP-29)

5.

INSTALL NO. 1 SWITCH HOLE BASE (See page IP32)

6.

INSTALL GLOVE COMPARTMENT DOOR ASSEMBLY (See page IP-32)

7.

INSTALL COMBINATION METER ASSEMBLY (See page ME-148)

8.

INSTALL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER FINISH PANEL (See page ME-148)

9.

INSTALL INSTRUMENT PANEL FINISH PANEL END RH (See page ME-149)

10. INSTALL INSTRUMENT PANEL FINISH PANEL END LH (See page ME-149) 11. INSTALL FRONT PILLAR GARNISH RH (See page IR71) 12. INSTALL FRONT PILLAR GARNISH LH (See page IR72) 13. INSTALL MAP LIGHT ASSEMBLY (See page IR-73) 14. INSTALL ROOM LIGHT ASSEMBLY (See page IR-74)


AV–90

AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Hatchback 5 Door)

15. INSTALL VISOR HOLDER RH (See page IR-75) 16. INSTALL VISOR HOLDER LH (See page IR-75) 17. INSTALL VISOR ASSEMBLY RH (See page IR-75) 18. INSTALL VISOR ASSEMBLY LH (See page IR-75) 19. INSTALL ROOF HEADLINING SERVICE HOLE COVER (w/o Curtain Shield Airbag) (See page IR-76) 20. INSTALL ASSIST GRIP SUB-ASSEMBLY (See page IR-75) 21. INSTALL ASSIST GRIP COVER (See page IR-75) 22. INSTALL SEAT BELT ANCHOR COVER (See page SB-160) 23. INSTALL CENTER PILLAR UPPER GARNISH RH (See page IR-76) 24. INSTALL CENTER PILLAR UPPER GARNISH LH (See page IR-76) 25. INSTALL CENTER PILLAR LOWER GARNISH RH (See page IR-76)

AV

26. INSTALL CENTER PILLAR LOWER GARNISH LH (See page IR-76) 27. INSTALL FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY RH (See page IR-76) 28. INSTALL FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY LH (See page IR-76) 29. INSTALL SEAT BELT ANCHOR COVER CAP (See page IR-76) 30. INSTALL ROOF SIDE INNER GARNISH RH (See page IR-77) 31. INSTALL ROOF SIDE INNER GARNISH LH (See page IR-77) 32. INSTALL REAR CENTER SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY (See page IR-78) 33. INSTALL DECK TRIM SIDE PANEL ASSEMBLY RH (See page IR-79) 34. INSTALL DECK TRIM SIDE PANEL ASSEMBLY LH (See page IR-79) 35. INSTALL REAR SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY RH (See page IR-79) 36. INSTALL REAR SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY LH (See page IR-80) 37. INSTALL REAR DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP RH (See page IR-80) 38. INSTALL REAR DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP LH (See page IR-80)


AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Hatchback 5 Door)

AV–91

39. INSTALL REAR DOOR SCUFF PLATE RH (See page IR-80) 40. INSTALL REAR DOOR SCUFF PLATE LH (See page IR-80) 41. INSTALL FRONT DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP RH (See page IR-81) 42. INSTALL FRONT DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP LH (See page IR-81) 43. INSTALL COWL SIDE TRIM BOARD RH (See page IR81) 44. INSTALL COWL SIDE TRIM BOARD LH (See page IR81) 45. INSTALL INSTRUMENT PANEL UNDER COVER SUBASSEMBLY RH (See page IR-81) 46. INSTALL INSTRUMENT PANEL UNDER COVER SUBASSEMBLY LH (See page IR-82) 47. INSTALL FRONT DOOR SCUFF PLATE RH (See page IR-82) 48. INSTALL FRONT DOOR SCUFF PLATE LH (See page IR-82) 49. INSTALL REAR DECK TRIM COVER (See page IR-82) 50. INSTALL REAR SEAT ASSEMBLY RH (for 60/40 Split Seat Type) (See page SE-102) 51. INSTALL REAR SEAT ASSEMBLY LH (for 60/40 Split Seat Type) (See page SE-84) 52. INSTALL NO. 1 REAR SEAT LEG COVER (for 60/40 Split Seat Type) (a) for RH Side: (1) Remove the No. 1 rear seat leg cover (See page SE-103). (b) for LH Side: (1) Remove the No. 1 rear seat leg cover (See page SE-85). 53. INSTALL NO. 2 REAR SEAT LEG COVER (for 60/40 Split Seat Type) (See page SE-85) 54. INSTALL REAR SEATBACK ASSEMBLY (for Hold Down Seat Type) (See page SE-122) 55. INSTALL REAR SEAT CUSHION COVER PAD SUBASSEMBLY (for Hold Down Seat Type) (See page SE123) 56. INSTALL DECK FLOOR BOX RH (See page IR-83) 57. INSTALL DECK FLOOR BOX LH (See page IR-83) 58. INSTALL DECK BOARD SUB-ASSEMBLY (See page IR-83)

AV


AV–92

AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Hatchback 5 Door)

59. INSTALL PACKAGE TRAY TRIM PANEL ASSEMBLY (See page IR-83) 60. CONNECT CABLE TO NEGATIVE BATTERY TERMINAL Torque: 5.4 N*m (55 kgf*cm, 48 in.*lbf) 61. CHECK SRS WARNING LIGHT (See page RS-31)

AV


AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Hatchback 3 Door)

AV–93

RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Hatchback 3 Door) BODY ELECTRICAL AUDIO / VISUAL

COMPONENTS

PACKAGE TRAY TRIM PANEL ASSEMBLY

AV

DECK BOARD SUB-ASSEMBLY

DECK FLOOR BOX RH

DECK FLOOR BOX LH

B114273E01


AV–94

AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Hatchback 3 Door)

for 60/40 Split Seat Type:

REAR SEAT ASSEMBLY RH

NO. 1 REAR SEAT LEG COVER

37 (375, 27)

AV

REAR SEAT ASSEMBLY LH

x6

NO. 2 REAR SEAT LEG COVER

NO. 1 REAR SEAT LEG COVER

37 (375, 27)

x7

for Hold Down Seat Type:

REAR SEATBACK ASSEMBLY REAR SEAT CUSHION COVER PAD SUB-ASSEMBLY

37 (375, 27)

x4

N*m (kgf*cm, ft*lbf) : Specified torque B121713E03


AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Hatchback 3 Door)

AV–95

w/ Curtain Shield Airbag:

FRONT PILLAR GARNISH RH

AV FRONT PILLAR GARNISH RH

COWL SIDE TRIM BOARD RH

FRONT DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP RH

FRONT DOOR SCUFF PLATE RH

INSTRUMENT PANEL UNDER COVER SUB-ASSEMBLY RH

Non-reusable part B114488E02


AV–96

AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Hatchback 3 Door)

w/ Curtain Shield Airbag:

FRONT PILLAR GARNISH LH

AV

FRONT PILLAR GARNISH LH FRONT DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP LH

x2

INSTRUMENT PANEL UNDER COVER SUB-ASSEMBLY LH FRONT DOOR SCUFF PLATE LH COWL SIDE TRIM BOARD LH

Non-reusable part B114489E02


AV–97

AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Hatchback 3 Door)

w/ Curtain Shield Airbag:

ROOF SIDE INNER GARNISH RH

REAR ROOF SIDE RAIL GARNISH RH

REAR CENTER SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY CENTER PILLAR UPPER GARNISH RH

42 (430, 31)

AV DECK TRIM SIDE PANEL ASSEMBLY RH x2

42 (430, 31)

x2 FRONT QUARTER TRIM PANEL ASSEMBLY RH

REAR SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY RH

REAR DECK TRIM COVER

42 (430, 31)

FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY RH

SEAT BELT ANCHOR COVER CAP

N*m (kgf*cm, ft*lbf) : Specified torque Non-reusable part B117699E06


AV–98

AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Hatchback 3 Door)

SEAT BELT ANCHOR COVER CAP

w/ Curtain Shield Airbag:

42 (430, 31)

FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY LH

REAR ROOF SIDE RAIL GARNISH LH ROOF SIDE INNER GARNISH LH

AV

DECK TRIM SIDE PANEL ASSEMBLY LH CENTER PILLAR UPPER GARNISH LH

x2

FRONT QUARTER TRIM PANEL ASSEMBLY LH

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT ROOM LIGHT CONNECTOR

REAR SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY LH 42 (430, 31)

N*m (kgf*cm, ft*lbf) : Specified torque Non-reusable part B117700E07


AV–99

AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Hatchback 3 Door)

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER FINISH PANEL x2 COMBINATION METER ASSEMBLY x2

x2

AV UPPER INSTRUMENT PANEL SUB-ASSEMBLY

x2

20 (204, 15)

NO. 1 SWITCH HOLE BASE GLOVE COMPARTMENT DOOR ASSEMBLY

INSTRUMENT PANEL FINISH PANEL END LH

INSTRUMENT PANEL FINISH PANEL END RH

N*m (kgf*cm, ft*lbf) : Specified torque B138684E01


AV–100

AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Hatchback 3 Door)

NO. 2 ANTENNA CORD SUB-ASSEMBLY

AV

B138685E01


AV–101

AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Hatchback 3 Door)

w/ Curtain Shield Airbag:

ROOF HEADLINING ASSEMBLY

SEAT BELT ANCHOR COVER

x4

x8

ASSIST GRIP SUB-ASSEMBLY

ASSIST GRIP COVER

ROOM LIGHT ASSEMBLY

VISOR ASSEMBLY RH

MAP LIGHT ASSEMBLY

VISOR HOLDER RH VISOR HOLDER LH

VISOR ASSEMBLY LH

B138692E01

AV


AV–102

AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Hatchback 3 Door)

w/o Curtain Shield Airbag:

ROOF HEADLINING ASSEMBLY

SEAT BELT ANCHOR COVER

AV

x6 ROOF HEADLINING SERVICE HOLE COVER

ASSIST GRIP SUB-ASSEMBLY

x2

ASSIST GRIP COVER

ROOM LIGHT ASSEMBLY

VISOR ASSEMBLY RH

MAP LIGHT ASSEMBLY

VISOR HOLDER RH VISOR HOLDER LH

VISOR ASSEMBLY LH

B138693E01


AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Hatchback 3 Door)

AV–103

w/ Curtain Shield Airbag:

x6

ANTENNA CORD SUB-ASSEMBLY

NO. 4 ROOF HEADLINING PAD

NO. 3 ROOF HEADLINING PAD

AV

NO. 2 ROOF HEADLINING PAD

Non-reusable part B138694E01


AV–104

AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Hatchback 3 Door)

w/o Curtain Shield Airbag:

x4 ANTENNA CORD SUB-ASSEMBLY

AV

Non-reusable part B138695E01


AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Hatchback 3 Door)

AV–105

REMOVAL CAUTION: Some of these service operations affect the SRS airbag system. Read the precautionary notices concerning the SRS airbag system before servicing (See page RS-1). NOTICE: Always use "Torx" socket wrench E10 when removing the rear seat. 1.

DISCONNECT CABLE FROM NEGATIVE BATTERY TERMINAL CAUTION: Wait for at least 90 seconds after disconnecting the cable to prevent the airbag from working.

2.

REMOVE PACKAGE TRAY TRIM PANEL ASSEMBLY (See page IR-48)

3.

REMOVE DECK BOARD SUB-ASSEMBLY (See page IR-48)

4.

REMOVE DECK FLOOR BOX RH (See page IR-48)

5.

REMOVE DECK FLOOR BOX LH (See page IR-48)

6.

REMOVE NO. 1 REAR SEAT LEG COVER (for 60/40 Split Seat Type) (a) for RH Side: (1) Remove the No. 1 rear seat leg cover (See page SE-89). (b) for LH Side: (1) Remove the No. 1 rear seat leg cover (See page SE-70).

7.

REMOVE NO. 2 REAR SEAT LEG COVER (for 60/40 Split Seat Type) (See page SE-70)

8.

REMOVE REAR SEAT ASSEMBLY RH (for 60/40 Split Seat Type) (See page SE-89)

9.

REMOVE REAR SEAT ASSEMBLY LH (for 60/40 Split Seat Type) (See page SE-71)

10. REMOVE REAR SEAT CUSHION COVER PAD SUBASSEMBLY (for Hold Down Seat Type) (See page SE114) 11. REMOVE REAR SEATBACK ASSEMBLY (for Hold Down Seat Type) (See page SE-115) 12. REMOVE FRONT DOOR SCUFF PLATE RH (See page IR-97) 13. REMOVE FRONT DOOR SCUFF PLATE LH (See page IR-97) 14. REMOVE INSTRUMENT PANEL UNDER COVER SUBASSEMBLY RH (See page IR-50) 15. REMOVE INSTRUMENT PANEL UNDER COVER SUBASSEMBLY LH (See page IR-50)

AV


AV–106

AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Hatchback 3 Door)

16. REMOVE COWL SIDE TRIM BOARD RH (See page IR-50) 17. REMOVE COWL SIDE TRIM BOARD LH (See page IR50) 18. REMOVE FRONT DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP RH (See page IR-97) 19. REMOVE FRONT DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP LH (See page IR-97) 20. REMOVE FRONT QUARTER TRIM PANEL ASSEMBLY RH (See page IR-97) 21. REMOVE FRONT QUARTER TRIM PANEL ASSEMBLY LH (See page IR-97) 22. REMOVE REAR DECK TRIM COVER (See page IR-49) 23. REMOVE REAR SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY RH (See page IR-98) 24. REMOVE REAR SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY LH (See page IR-98)

AV

25. REMOVE DECK TRIM SIDE PANEL ASSEMBLY RH (See page IR-98) 26. REMOVE DECK TRIM SIDE PANEL ASSEMBLY LH (See page IR-98) 27. REMOVE SEAT BELT ANCHOR COVER CAP (See page IR-99) 28. REMOVE FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY RH (See page IR-99) 29. REMOVE FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY LH (See page IR-99) 30. REMOVE CENTER PILLAR UPPER GARNISH RH (See page IR-99) 31. REMOVE CENTER PILLAR UPPER GARNISH LH (See page IR-99) 32. REMOVE REAR CENTER SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY (See page IR-52) 33. REMOVE ROOF SIDE INNER GARNISH RH (See page IR-99) 34. REMOVE ROOF SIDE INNER GARNISH LH (See page IR-100) 35. REMOVE REAR ROOF SIDE RAIL GARNISH RH (See page IR-100) 36. REMOVE REAR ROOF SIDE RAIL GARNISH LH (See page IR-100) 37. REMOVE SEAT BELT ANCHOR COVER (See page SB-159)


AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Hatchback 3 Door)

AV–107

38. REMOVE ROOF HEADLINING SERVICE HOLE COVER (w/o Curtain Shield Airbag) (See page IR-55) 39. REMOVE ASSIST GRIP COVER (See page IR-55) 40. REMOVE ASSIST GRIP SUB-ASSEMBLY (See page IR-56) 41. REMOVE VISOR ASSEMBLY RH (See page IR-56) 42. REMOVE VISOR ASSEMBLY LH (See page IR-56) 43. REMOVE VISOR HOLDER RH (See page IR-56) 44. REMOVE VISOR HOLDER LH (See page IR-56) 45. REMOVE ROOM LIGHT ASSEMBLY (See page IR-57) 46. REMOVE MAP LIGHT ASSEMBLY (See page IR-58) 47. REMOVE FRONT PILLAR GARNISH RH (See page IR58) 48. REMOVE FRONT PILLAR GARNISH LH (See page IR59) 49. REMOVE INSTRUMENT PANEL FINISH PANEL END RH (See page ME-145) 50. REMOVE INSTRUMENT PANEL FINISH PANEL END LH (See page ME-145) 51. REMOVE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER FINISH PANEL (See page ME-145) 52. REMOVE COMBINATION METER ASSEMBLY (See page ME-146) 53. REMOVE GLOVE COMPARTMENT DOOR ASSEMBLY (See page IP-20) 54. REMOVE NO. 1 SWITCH HOLE BASE (See page IP20) 55. REMOVE UPPER INSTRUMENT PANEL SUBASSEMBLY (See page IP-21) 56. REMOVE NO. 2 ANTENNA CORD SUB-ASSEMBLY (See page AV-82) 57. REMOVE ROOF HEADLINING ASSEMBLY (a) Remove the antenna cord from the antenna cord clamp. (b) Disconnect the 2 connectors. (c) Using a clip remover, remove the 2 connectors. (d) w/ Curtain Shield Airbag: (1) Using a clip remover, remove the clip.

B114512

AV


AV–108

AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Hatchback 3 Door)

(2) Disengage the 4 hooks.

B114513

(e) w/o Curtain Shield Airbag: (1) Using a clip remover, remove the clip. (2) Disengage the 2 claws and the 4 hooks.

AV

B114514

58. REMOVE NO. 2 ROOF HEADLINING PAD (w/ Curtain Shield Airbag) (a) Remove the No. 2 roof headlining pad.

B114521


AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Hatchback 3 Door)

AV–109

59. REMOVE NO. 3 ROOF HEADLINING PAD (w/ Curtain Shield Airbag) (a) Remove the No. 3 roof headlining pad.

B114522

60. REMOVE NO. 4 ROOF HEADLINING PAD (w/ Curtain Shield Airbag) (a) Remove the No. 4 roof headlining pad.

B114523

61. REMOVE ANTENNA CORD SUB-ASSEMBLY (a) w/ Curtain Shield Airbag: (1) Remove the 6 pieces of tape. (2) Remove the antenna cord from the cutout of the roof headlining. (3) Remove the antenna cord from the 3 claws of the front and rear side rail spacers.

AV Cutout Tape

E116776E01

(b) w/o Curtain Shield Airbag: (1) Remove the 4 pieces of tape. (2) Remove the antenna cord from the cutout of the roof headlining. (3) Remove the antenna cord from the 5 claws of the front and rear side rail spacers.

Cutout Tape

E107820E01


AV–110

AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Hatchback 3 Door)

INSTALLATION CAUTION: Some of these service operations affect the SRS airbag system. Read the precautionary notices concerning the SRS airbag system before servicing (See page RS-1). NOTICE: Always use "Torx" socket wrench E10 when installing the rear seat. 1.

AV

INSTALL ANTENNA CORD SUB-ASSEMBLY (a) w/ Curtain Shield Airbag: (1) Install the part of the antenna cord marked with red positioning tape into claw A of the front side rail spacer. (2) Install the antenna cord positioning tapes into the 2 claws of the front and rear side rail spacers. (3) Insert the antenna cord positioning tape into the cutout of the roof headlining. (4) Align the locating tapes on the antenna cord with the markings on the roof headlining. (5) Install the antenna cord onto the roof headlining with 6 new pieces of tape.

Cutout

A Tape

a b Positioning Tape

Marking E116802E02

Tape size: Mark

Measurement

a

80 mm (3.15 in.)

b

20 mm (0.787 in.)

NOTICE: • Apply the tape securely in place. • Do not touch the adhesive surface when applying the tape to prevent adhesion failure. (b) w/o Curtain Shield Airbag: (1) Install the part of the antenna cord marked with red positioning tape into claw A of the front side rail spacer.


AV–111

AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Hatchback 3 Door)

(2) Install the antenna cord positioning tapes into the 4 claws of the front and rear side rail spacers. (3) Insert the antenna cord positioning tape into the cutout of the roof headlining. (4) Align the locating tapes on the antenna cord with the markings on the roof headlining. (5) Install the antenna cord onto the roof headlining with 4 new pieces of tape.

A Tape

a

Cutout

AV

b

Positioning Tape

Marking E116752E03

Tape size: Mark

Measurement

a

80 mm (3.15 in.)

b

20 mm (0.787 in.)

NOTICE: • Apply the tape securely in place. • Do not touch the adhesive surface when applying the tape to prevent adhesion failure. 2.

B114536

INSTALL NO. 4 ROOF HEADLINING PAD (w/ Curtain Shield Airbag) (a) Align a new No. 4 roof headlining pad with the markings of the roof headlining and install it onto the roof headlining.


AV–112

AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Hatchback 3 Door)

3.

INSTALL NO. 3 ROOF HEADLINING PAD (w/ Curtain Shield Airbag) (a) Align a new No. 3 roof headlining pad with the markings of the roof headlining and install it onto the roof headlining.

4.

INSTALL NO. 2 ROOF HEADLINING PAD (w/ Curtain Shield Airbag) (a) Align a new No. 2 roof headlining pad with the markings of the roof headlining and install it onto the roof headlining.

5.

INSTALL ROOF HEADLINING ASSEMBLY (a) w/ Curtain Shield Airbag: (1) Engage the 4 hooks and install the roof headlining. (2) Install the clip.

Marking B114537E01

Marking B114538E01

AV

B114513

(b) w/o Curtain Shield Airbag: (1) Engage the 2 claws and the 4 hooks and install the roof headlining.


AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Hatchback 3 Door)

AV–113

(2) Install the clip.

B114514

(c) Install the 2 connectors. (d) Connect the 2 connectors. (e) Install the antenna cord onto the antenna cord clamp.

B114512

6.

INSTALL NO. 2 ANTENNA CORD SUB-ASSEMBLY (See page AV-88)

7.

INSTALL UPPER INSTRUMENT PANEL SUBASSEMBLY (See page IP-29)

8.

INSTALL NO. 1 SWITCH HOLE BASE (See page IP32)

9.

INSTALL GLOVE COMPARTMENT DOOR ASSEMBLY (See page IP-32)

10. INSTALL COMBINATION METER ASSEMBLY (See page ME-148) 11. INSTALL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER FINISH PANEL (See page ME-148) 12. INSTALL INSTRUMENT PANEL FINISH PANEL END RH (See page ME-149) 13. INSTALL INSTRUMENT PANEL FINISH PANEL END LH (See page ME-149) 14. INSTALL FRONT PILLAR GARNISH RH (See page IR71) 15. INSTALL FRONT PILLAR GARNISH LH (See page IR72) 16. INSTALL MAP LIGHT ASSEMBLY (See page IR-73) 17. INSTALL ROOM LIGHT ASSEMBLY (See page IR-74) 18. INSTALL VISOR HOLDER RH (See page IR-75) 19. INSTALL VISOR HOLDER LH (See page IR-75) 20. INSTALL VISOR ASSEMBLY RH (See page IR-75) 21. INSTALL VISOR ASSEMBLY LH (See page IR-75)

AV


AV–114

AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Hatchback 3 Door)

22. INSTALL ASSIST GRIP SUB-ASSEMBLY (See page IR-75) 23. INSTALL ASSIST GRIP COVER (See page IR-75) 24. INSTALL ROOF HEADLINING SERVICE HOLE COVER (w/o Curtain Shield Airbag) (See page IR-76) 25. INSTALL SEAT BELT ANCHOR COVER (See page SB-160) 26. INSTALL REAR ROOF SIDE RAIL GARNISH RH (See page IR-115) 27. INSTALL REAR ROOF SIDE RAIL GARNISH LH (See page IR-115) 28. INSTALL ROOF SIDE INNER GARNISH RH (See page IR-115) 29. INSTALL ROOF SIDE INNER GARNISH LH (See page IR-116) 30. INSTALL REAR CENTER SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY (See page IR-78)

AV

31. INSTALL CENTER PILLAR UPPER GARNISH RH (See page IR-116) 32. INSTALL CENTER PILLAR UPPER GARNISH LH (See page IR-116) 33. INSTALL FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY RH (See page IR-117) 34. INSTALL FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY LH (See page IR-117) 35. INSTALL SEAT BELT ANCHOR COVER CAP (See page IR-117) 36. INSTALL DECK TRIM SIDE PANEL ASSEMBLY RH (See page IR-117) 37. INSTALL DECK TRIM SIDE PANEL ASSEMBLY LH (See page IR-118) 38. INSTALL REAR SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY RH (See page IR-118) 39. INSTALL REAR SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY LH (See page IR-118) 40. INSTALL REAR DECK TRIM COVER (See page IR-82) 41. INSTALL FRONT QUARTER TRIM PANEL ASSEMBLY RH (See page IR-118) 42. INSTALL FRONT QUARTER TRIM PANEL ASSEMBLY LH (See page IR-119) 43. INSTALL FRONT DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP RH (See page IR-119) 44. INSTALL FRONT DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP LH (See page IR-119)


AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA CORD (for Hatchback 3 Door)

AV–115

45. INSTALL COWL SIDE TRIM BOARD RH (See page IR81) 46. INSTALL COWL SIDE TRIM BOARD LH (See page IR81) 47. INSTALL INSTRUMENT PANEL UNDER COVER SUBASSEMBLY RH (See page IR-81) 48. INSTALL INSTRUMENT PANEL UNDER COVER SUBASSEMBLY LH (See page IR-82) 49. INSTALL FRONT DOOR SCUFF PLATE RH (See page IR-119) 50. INSTALL FRONT DOOR SCUFF PLATE LH (See page IR-119) 51. INSTALL REAR SEAT ASSEMBLY RH (for 60/40 Slide Reclining Hold Down Seat Type) (See page SE-102) 52. INSTALL REAR SEAT ASSEMBLY LH (for 60/40 Split Seat Type) (See page SE-84) 53. INSTALL NO. 2 REAR SEAT LEG COVER (for 60/40 Split Seat Type) (See page SE-85) 54. INSTALL NO. 1 REAR SEAT LEG COVER (for 60/40 Split Seat Type) (a) for RH Side: (1) Install the No. 1 rear seat leg cover (See page SE-103). (b) for LH Side: (1) Install the No. 1 rear seat leg cover (See page SE-85). 55. INSTALL REAR SEATBACK ASSEMBLY (for Hold Down Seat Type) (See page SE-123) 56. INSTALL REAR SEAT CUSHION COVER PAD SUBASSEMBLY (for Hold Down Seat Type) (See page SE122) 57. INSTALL DECK FLOOR BOX RH (See page IR-83) 58. INSTALL DECK FLOOR BOX LH (See page IR-83) 59. INSTALL DECK BOARD SUB-ASSEMBLY (See page IR-83) 60. INSTALL PACKAGE TRAY TRIM PANEL ASSEMBLY (See page IR-83) 61. CONNECT CABLE TO NEGATIVE BATTERY TERMINAL Torque: 5.4 N*m (55 kgf*cm, 48 in.*lbf) 62. CHECK SRS WARNING LIGHT (See page RS-31)

AV


AV–116

AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA POLE (for Hatchback)

RADIO ANTENNA POLE (for Hatchback) BODY ELECTRICAL AUDIO / VISUAL

COMPONENTS

AV

ROOF ANTENNA POLE SUB-ASSEMBLY

B138656E01


AUDIO / VISUAL – RADIO ANTENNA POLE (for Hatchback)

AV–117

REMOVAL 1.

REMOVE ROOF ANTENNA POLE SUB-ASSEMBLY (a) Remove the roof antenna pole by turning it in the direction of the arrow shown in the illustration.

E107780

INSTALLATION 1.

INSTALL ROOF ANTENNA POLE SUB-ASSEMBLY (a) Install the roof antenna pole by turning it in the direction of the arrow shown in the illustration.

E107781

AV


AV–118

AUDIO / VISUAL – AMPLIFIER ANTENNA (for Sedan)

AMPLIFIER ANTENNA (for Sedan) BODY ELECTRICAL AUDIO / VISUAL

COMPONENTS for 60/40 Split Seat Type:

REAR SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY REAR CENTER SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY

37 (375, 27)

REAR SEATBACK ASSEMBLY

AV x2

37 (375, 27)

REAR SEAT INNER BELT ASSEMBLY LH

REAR SEAT INNER BELT ASSEMBLY LH REAR SEAT CUSHION COVER PAD SUB-ASSEMBLY

N*m (kgf*cm, ft*lbf) : Specified torque B134942E04


AUDIO / VISUAL – AMPLIFIER ANTENNA (for Sedan)

AV–119

for Fixed Seat Type:

REAR SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY RH

REAR CENTER SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY

REAR SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY LH

AV 7.9 (80, 70 in.*lbf)

x3 REAR SEATBACK ASSEMBLY

REAR SEAT INNER BELT ASSEMBLY RH

REAR SEAT INNER BELT ASSEMBLY LH

REAR SEAT CUSHION COVER PAD SUB-ASSEMBLY

N*m (kgf*cm, ft*lbf) : Specified torque B138611E01


AV–120

AUDIO / VISUAL – AMPLIFIER ANTENNA (for Sedan)

for 60/40 Split Seat Type:

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT FLOOR MAT

AV SPARE WHEEL COVER ASSEMBLY

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT TRIM INNER PAD

for Grand Tire:

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT TRIM INNER PAD

B138565E01


AV–121

AUDIO / VISUAL – AMPLIFIER ANTENNA (for Sedan)

w/ Curtain Shield Airbag:

ANTENNA CONNECTOR

AMPLIFIER ANTENNA ASSEMBLY

REAR DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP

ROOF SIDE INNER GARNISH

REAR SEAT SIDE COVER

REAR DOOR SCUFF PLATE

Non-reusable part B134977E01

AV


AV–122

AUDIO / VISUAL – AMPLIFIER ANTENNA (for Sedan)

REMOVAL

AV

1.

DISCONNECT CABLE FROM NEGATIVE BATTERY TERMINAL

2.

REMOVE REAR SEAT CUSHION COVER PAD SUBASSEMBLY (a) for 60/40 Split Seat Type: (1) Remove the rear seat cushion cover pad subassembly (See page SE-46). (b) for Fixed Seat Type: (1) Remove the rear seat cushion cover pad subassembly (See page SE-106).

3.

REMOVE REAR SEATBACK ASSEMBLY (a) for 60/40 Split Seat Type: (1) Remove the rear seatback assembly (See page SE-57). (b) for Fixed Seat Type: (1) Remove the rear seatback assembly (See page SE-106).

4.

REMOVE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT FLOOR MAT (for 60/40 Split Seat Type) (See page ED-133)

5.

REMOVE SPARE WHEEL COVER ASSEMBLY (for 60/ 40 Split Seat Type) (See page ED-133)

6.

REMOVE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT TRIM INNER PAD (for 60/40 Split Seat Type) (See page ED-134)

7.

REMOVE REAR DOOR SCUFF PLATE (See page IR15)

8.

REMOVE REAR DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP (See page AV-173)

9.

REMOVE REAR SEAT SIDE COVER (See page IR-16)

10. REMOVE ROOF SIDE INNER GARNISH (See page IR16) 11. REMOVE AMPLIFIER ANTENNA ASSEMBLY (a) Disconnect the antenna cord connector. (b) Disconnect the 2 amplifier antenna connectors. (c) Disengage the clamp. (d) Remove the bolt and the amplifier antenna.

B138466


AUDIO / VISUAL – AMPLIFIER ANTENNA (for Sedan)

AV–123

INSTALLATION 1.

INSTALL AMPLIFIER ANTENNA ASSEMBLY (a) Insert the hook into the body hole and install the amplifier antenna with the bolt. (b) Engage the clamp. (c) Connect the 2 amplifier antenna connectors. (d) Connect the antenna cord connector.

2.

INSTALL ROOF SIDE INNER GARNISH (See page IR32)

3.

INSTALL REAR SEAT SIDE COVER (See page IR-33)

4.

INSTALL REAR DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP (See page AV-175)

5.

INSTALL REAR DOOR SCUFF PLATE (See page IR34)

6.

INSTALL LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT TRIM INNER PAD (for 60/40 Split Seat Type) (See page ED-136)

7.

INSTALL SPARE WHEEL COVER ASSEMBLY (for 60/ 40 Split Seat Type) (See page ED-137)

8.

INSTALL LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT FLOOR MAT (for 60/40 Split Seat Type) (See page ED-137)

9.

INSTALL REAR SEATBACK ASSEMBLY (a) for 60/40 Split Seat Type: (1) Install the rear seatback assembly (See page SE-65). (b) for Fixed Seat Type: (1) Install the rear seatback assembly (See page SE-108).

B134978

10. INSTALL REAR SEAT CUSHION COVER PAD SUBASSEMBLY (a) for 60/40 Split Seat Type: (1) Install the rear seat cushion cover pad subassembly (See page SE-53). (b) for Fixed Seat Type: (1) Install the rear seat cushion cover pad subassembly (See page SE-109). 11. CONNECT CABLE TO NEGATIVE BATTERY TERMINAL Torque: 5.4 N*m (55 kgf*cm, 48 in.*lbf)

AV


AV–124

AUDIO / VISUAL – AMPLIFIER ANTENNA (for Hatchback 5 Door)

AMPLIFIER ANTENNA (for Hatchback 5 Door) BODY ELECTRICAL AUDIO / VISUAL

COMPONENTS

PACKAGE TRAY TRIM PANEL ASSEMBLY

AV

DECK BOARD SUB-ASSEMBLY

DECK FLOOR BOX RH

DECK FLOOR BOX LH

B114273E01


AUDIO / VISUAL – AMPLIFIER ANTENNA (for Hatchback 5 Door)

AV–125

for 60/40 Split Seat Type:

REAR SEAT ASSEMBLY RH

NO. 1 REAR SEAT LEG COVER

37 (375, 27)

REAR SEAT ASSEMBLY LH

x6

AV

NO. 2 REAR SEAT LEG COVER

NO. 1 REAR SEAT LEG COVER

37 (375, 27)

x7

for Hold Down Seat Type:

REAR SEATBACK ASSEMBLY REAR SEAT CUSHION COVER PAD SUB-ASSEMBLY

37 (375, 27)

x4

N*m (kgf*cm, ft*lbf) : Specified torque B121713E03


AV–126

AUDIO / VISUAL – AMPLIFIER ANTENNA (for Hatchback 5 Door)

w/ Curtain Shield Airbag:

FRONT PILLAR GARNISH RH

42 (430, 31)

FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY RH

AV

FRONT PILLAR GARNISH RH

FRONT DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP RH

SEAT BELT ANCHOR COVER CAP

CENTER PILLAR UPPER GARNISH RH

CENTER PILLAR LOWER GARNISH RH FRONT DOOR SCUFF PLATE RH COWL SIDE TRIM BOARD RH INSTRUMENT PANEL UNDER COVER SUB-ASSEMBLY RH

N*m (kgf*cm, ft*lbf) : Specified torque Non-reusable part B114276E02


AUDIO / VISUAL – AMPLIFIER ANTENNA (for Hatchback 5 Door)

AV–127

w/ Curtain Shield Airbag:

FRONT PILLAR GARNISH LH

42 (430, 31)

SEAT BELT ANCHOR COVER CAP

CENTER PILLAR UPPER GARNISH LH

FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY LH

AV

FRONT PILLAR GARNISH LH

x2

FRONT DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP LH

CENTER PILLAR LOWER GARNISH LH

INSTRUMENT PANEL UNDER COVER SUB-ASSEMBLY LH

FRONT DOOR SCUFF PLATE LH COWL SIDE TRIM BOARD LH

N*m (kgf*cm, ft*lbf) : Specified torque Non-reusable part B114277E02


AV–128

AUDIO / VISUAL – AMPLIFIER ANTENNA (for Hatchback 5 Door)

w/ Curtain Shield Airbag: ROOF SIDE INNER GARNISH RH REAR CENTER SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY

REAR DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP RH

42 (430, 31)

AV DECK TRIM SIDE PANEL ASSEMBLY RH x2

42 (430, 31)

x2 REAR DOOR SCUFF PLATE RH

REAR DECK TRIM COVER REAR SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY RH

N*m (kgf*cm, ft*lbf) : Specified torque Non-reusable part B114274E07


AUDIO / VISUAL – AMPLIFIER ANTENNA (for Hatchback 5 Door)

AV–129

REAR SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY LH

ROOF SIDE INNER GARNISH LH

w/ Curtain Shield Airbag: REAR DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP LH

x2

42 (430, 31)

AV

DECK TRIM SIDE PANEL ASSEMBLY LH

REAR DOOR SCUFF PLATE LH

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT ROOM LIGHT CONNECTOR

N*m (kgf*cm, ft*lbf) : Specified torque Non-reusable part B114275E11


AV–130

AUDIO / VISUAL – AMPLIFIER ANTENNA (for Hatchback 5 Door)

w/ Curtain Shield Airbag:

ROOF HEADLINING ASSEMBLY

SEAT BELT ANCHOR COVER

AV x4

x8

ASSIST GRIP SUB-ASSEMBLY

ASSIST GRIP COVER

ROOM LIGHT ASSEMBLY

MAP LIGHT ASSEMBLY VISOR ASSEMBLY RH

VISOR HOLDER RH VISOR HOLDER LH

VISOR ASSEMBLY LH

B138686E01


AV–131

AUDIO / VISUAL – AMPLIFIER ANTENNA (for Hatchback 5 Door)

w/o Curtain Shield Airbag: ROOF HEADLINING ASSEMBLY

SEAT BELT ANCHOR COVER

x6

AV

ROOF HEADLINING SERVICE HOLE COVER

ASSIST GRIP SUB-ASSEMBLY x2

ASSIST GRIP COVER

ROOM LIGHT ASSEMBLY

VISOR ASSEMBLY RH

MAP LIGHT ASSEMBLY

VISOR HOLDER RH VISOR HOLDER LH

VISOR ASSEMBLY LH

B138687E01


AV–132

AUDIO / VISUAL – AMPLIFIER ANTENNA (for Hatchback 5 Door)

ROOF ANTENNA POLE SUB-ASSEMBLY

AV

AMPLIFIER ANTENNA ASSEMBLY

4.5 (46, 40 in.*lbf)

N*m (kgf*cm, ft.*lbf) : Specified torque E107782E01


AUDIO / VISUAL – AMPLIFIER ANTENNA (for Hatchback 5 Door)

AV–133

REMOVAL CAUTION: Some of these service operations affect the SRS airbag system. Read the precautionary notices concerning the SRS airbag system before servicing (See page RS-1). NOTICE: Always use "Torx" socket wrench E10 when removing the rear seat. 1.

DISCONNECT CABLE FROM NEGATIVE BATTERY TERMINAL

2.

REMOVE PACKAGE TRAY TRIM PANEL ASSEMBLY (See page IR-48)

3.

REMOVE DECK BOARD SUB-ASSEMBLY (See page IR-48)

4.

REMOVE DECK FLOOR BOX RH (See page IR-48)

5.

REMOVE DECK FLOOR BOX LH (See page IR-48)

6.

REMOVE NO. 1 REAR SEAT LEG COVER (for 60/40 Split Seat Type) (a) for RH Side: (1) Remove the No. 1 rear seat leg cover (See page SE-89). (b) for LH Side: (1) Remove the No. 1 rear seat leg cover (See page SE-70).

7.

REMOVE NO. 2 REAR SEAT LEG COVER (for 60/40 Split Seat Type) (See page SE-70)

8.

REMOVE REAR SEAT ASSEMBLY RH (for 60/40 Split Seat Type) (See page SE-89)

9.

REMOVE REAR SEAT ASSEMBLY LH (for 60/40 Split Seat Type) (See page SE-71)

10. REMOVE REAR SEAT CUSHION COVER PAD SUBASSEMBLY (for Hold Down Seat Type) (See page SE114) 11. REMOVE REAR SEATBACK ASSEMBLY (for Hold Down Seat Type) (See page SE-115) 12. REMOVE REAR DECK TRIM COVER (See page IR-49) 13. REMOVE FRONT DOOR SCUFF PLATE RH (See page IR-49) 14. REMOVE FRONT DOOR SCUFF PLATE LH (See page IR-49) 15. REMOVE INSTRUMENT PANEL UNDER COVER SUBASSEMBLY RH (See page IR-50) 16. REMOVE INSTRUMENT PANEL UNDER COVER SUBASSEMBLY LH (See page IR-50) 17. REMOVE COWL SIDE TRIM BOARD RH (See page IR-50)

AV


AV–134

AUDIO / VISUAL – AMPLIFIER ANTENNA (for Hatchback 5 Door)

18. REMOVE COWL SIDE TRIM BOARD LH (See page IR50) 19. REMOVE FRONT DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP RH (See page IR-50) 20. REMOVE FRONT DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP LH (See page IR-50) 21. REMOVE REAR DOOR SCUFF PLATE RH (See page IR-51) 22. REMOVE REAR DOOR SCUFF PLATE LH (See page IR-51) 23. REMOVE REAR DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP RH (See page IR-51) 24. REMOVE REAR DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP LH (See page IR-51) 25. REMOVE REAR SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY RH (See page IR-51)

AV

26. REMOVE REAR SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY LH (See page IR-51) 27. REMOVE DECK TRIM SIDE PANEL ASSEMBLY RH (See page IR-52) 28. REMOVE DECK TRIM SIDE PANEL ASSEMBLY LH (See page IR-52) 29. REMOVE REAR CENTER SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY (See page IR-52) 30. REMOVE ROOF SIDE INNER GARNISH RH (See page IR-53) 31. REMOVE ROOF SIDE INNER GARNISH LH (See page IR-54) 32. REMOVE SEAT BELT ANCHOR COVER CAP (See page IR-54) 33. REMOVE FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY RH (See page IR-55) 34. REMOVE FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY LH (See page IR-55) 35. REMOVE CENTER PILLAR LOWER GARNISH RH (See page IR-55) 36. REMOVE CENTER PILLAR LOWER GARNISH LH (See page IR-55) 37. REMOVE CENTER PILLAR UPPER GARNISH RH (See page IR-55) 38. REMOVE CENTER PILLAR UPPER GARNISH LH (See page IR-55) 39. REMOVE SEAT BELT ANCHOR COVER (See page SB-159)


AUDIO / VISUAL – AMPLIFIER ANTENNA (for Hatchback 5 Door)

AV–135

40. REMOVE ROOF HEADLINING SERVICE HOLE COVER (w/o Curtain Shield Airbag) (See page IR-55) 41. REMOVE ASSIST GRIP COVER (See page IR-55) 42. REMOVE ASSIST GRIP SUB-ASSEMBLY (See page IR-56) 43. REMOVE VISOR ASSEMBLY RH (See page IR-56) 44. REMOVE VISOR ASSEMBLY LH (See page IR-56) 45. REMOVE VISOR HOLDER RH (See page IR-56) 46. REMOVE VISOR HOLDER LH (See page IR-56) 47. REMOVE ROOM LIGHT ASSEMBLY (See page IR-57) 48. REMOVE MAP LIGHT ASSEMBLY (See page IR-58) 49. REMOVE FRONT PILLAR GARNISH RH (See page IR58) 50. REMOVE FRONT PILLAR GARNISH LH (See page IR59) 51. REMOVE ROOF HEADLINING ASSEMBLY (See page AV-83) 52. REMOVE ROOF ANTENNA POLE SUB-ASSEMBLY (See page AV-117) 53. REMOVE AMPLIFIER ANTENNA ASSEMBLY (a) Disengage the 5 clamps. (b) Remove the antenna nut.

E107784

AV


AV–136

AUDIO / VISUAL – AMPLIFIER ANTENNA (for Hatchback 5 Door)

(c) Disengage the 2 claws and remove the amplifier antenna.

E107785

AV


AUDIO / VISUAL – AMPLIFIER ANTENNA (for Hatchback 5 Door)

AV–137

INSTALLATION CAUTION: Some of these service operations affect the SRS airbag system. Read the precautionary notices concerning the SRS airbag system before servicing (See page RS-1). NOTICE: Always use "Torx" socket wrench E10 when installing the rear seat. 1.

INSTALL AMPLIFIER ANTENNA ASSEMBLY (a) Set the amplifier antenna into the hole in the roof, and place the amplifier antenna cord in the cutout of the amplifier antenna. (b) Install the amplifier antenna with the antenna nut. Torque: 4.5 N*m (46 kgf*cm, 40 in.*lbf)

E107786

(c) Engage the 5 clamps. 2.

INSTALL ROOF ANTENNA POLE SUB-ASSEMBLY (See page AV-117)

3.

INSTALL ROOF HEADLINING ASSEMBLY (See page AV-87)

4.

INSTALL FRONT PILLAR GARNISH RH (See page IR71)

5.

INSTALL FRONT PILLAR GARNISH LH (See page IR72)

6.

INSTALL MAP LIGHT ASSEMBLY (See page IR-73)

7.

INSTALL ROOM LIGHT ASSEMBLY (See page IR-74)

8.

INSTALL VISOR HOLDER RH (See page IR-75)

9.

INSTALL VISOR HOLDER LH (See page IR-75)

10. INSTALL VISOR ASSEMBLY RH (See page IR-75) 11. INSTALL VISOR ASSEMBLY LH (See page IR-75) E107783

12. INSTALL ROOF HEADLINING SERVICE HOLE COVER (w/o Curtain Shield Airbag) (See page IR-76) 13. INSTALL ASSIST GRIP SUB-ASSEMBLY (See page IR-75) 14. INSTALL ASSIST GRIP COVER (See page IR-75) 15. INSTALL SEAT BELT ANCHOR COVER (See page SB-160) 16. INSTALL CENTER PILLAR UPPER GARNISH RH (See page IR-76) 17. INSTALL CENTER PILLAR UPPER GARNISH LH (See page IR-76)

AV


AV–138

AUDIO / VISUAL – AMPLIFIER ANTENNA (for Hatchback 5 Door)

18. INSTALL CENTER PILLAR LOWER GARNISH RH (See page IR-76) 19. INSTALL CENTER PILLAR LOWER GARNISH LH (See page IR-76) 20. INSTALL FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY RH (See page IR-76) 21. INSTALL FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY LH (See page IR-76) 22. INSTALL SEAT BELT ANCHOR COVER CAP (See page IR-76) 23. INSTALL ROOF SIDE INNER GARNISH RH (See page IR-77) 24. INSTALL ROOF SIDE INNER GARNISH LH (See page IR-77) 25. INSTALL REAR CENTER SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY (See page IR-78)

AV

26. INSTALL DECK TRIM SIDE PANEL ASSEMBLY RH (See page IR-79) 27. INSTALL DECK TRIM SIDE PANEL ASSEMBLY LH (See page IR-79) 28. INSTALL REAR SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY RH (See page IR-79) 29. INSTALL REAR SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY LH (See page IR-80) 30. INSTALL REAR DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP RH (See page IR-80) 31. INSTALL REAR DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP LH (See page IR-80) 32. INSTALL REAR DOOR SCUFF PLATE RH (See page IR-80) 33. INSTALL REAR DOOR SCUFF PLATE LH (See page IR-80) 34. INSTALL FRONT DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP RH (See page IR-81) 35. INSTALL FRONT DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP LH (See page IR-81) 36. INSTALL COWL SIDE TRIM BOARD RH (See page IR81) 37. INSTALL COWL SIDE TRIM BOARD LH (See page IR81) 38. INSTALL INSTRUMENT PANEL UNDER COVER SUBASSEMBLY RH (See page IR-81) 39. INSTALL INSTRUMENT PANEL UNDER COVER SUBASSEMBLY LH (See page IR-82)


AUDIO / VISUAL – AMPLIFIER ANTENNA (for Hatchback 5 Door)

AV–139

40. INSTALL FRONT DOOR SCUFF PLATE RH (See page IR-82) 41. INSTALL FRONT DOOR SCUFF PLATE LH (See page IR-82) 42. INSTALL REAR DECK TRIM COVER (See page IR-82) 43. INSTALL REAR SEAT ASSEMBLY RH (for 60/40 Split Seat Type) (See page SE-102) 44. INSTALL REAR SEAT ASSEMBLY LH (for 60/40 Split Seat Type) (See page SE-84) 45. INSTALL NO. 2 REAR SEAT LEG COVER (for 60/40 Split Seat Type) (See page SE-85) 46. INSTALL NO. 1 REAR SEAT LEG COVER (for 60/40 Split Seat Type) (a) for RH Side: (1) Remove the No. 1 rear seat leg cover (See page SE-103). (b) for LH Side: (1) Remove the No. 1 rear seat leg cover (See page SE-85). 47. INSTALL REAR SEATBACK ASSEMBLY (for Hold Down Seat Type) (See page SE-122) 48. INSTALL REAR SEAT CUSHION COVER PAD SUBASSEMBLY (for Hold Down Seat Type) (See page SE123) 49. INSTALL DECK FLOOR BOX RH (See page IR-83) 50. INSTALL DECK FLOOR BOX LH (See page IR-83) 51. INSTALL DECK BOARD SUB-ASSEMBLY (See page IR-83) 52. INSTALL PACKAGE TRAY TRIM PANEL ASSEMBLY (See page IR-83) 53. CONNECT CABLE TO NEGATIVE BATTERY TERMINAL Torque: 5.4 N*m (55 kgf*cm, 48 in.*lbf)

AV


AUDIO / VISUAL – AMPLIFIER ANTENNA (for Hatchback 3 Door)

AV–139

AMPLIFIER ANTENNA (for Hatchback 3 Door) BODY ELECTRICAL AUDIO / VISUAL

COMPONENTS

PACKAGE TRAY TRIM PANEL ASSEMBLY

AV

DECK BOARD SUB-ASSEMBLY

DECK FLOOR BOX RH

DECK FLOOR BOX LH

B114273E01


AV–140

AUDIO / VISUAL – AMPLIFIER ANTENNA (for Hatchback 3 Door)

for 60/40 Split Seat Type:

REAR SEAT ASSEMBLY RH

NO. 1 REAR SEAT LEG COVER

37 (375, 27)

AV

REAR SEAT ASSEMBLY LH

x6

NO. 2 REAR SEAT LEG COVER

NO. 1 REAR SEAT LEG COVER

37 (375, 27)

x7

for Hold Down Seat Type:

REAR SEATBACK ASSEMBLY REAR SEAT CUSHION COVER PAD SUB-ASSEMBLY

37 (375, 27)

x4

N*m (kgf*cm, ft*lbf) : Specified torque B121713E03


AUDIO / VISUAL – AMPLIFIER ANTENNA (for Hatchback 3 Door)

AV–141

w/ Curtain Shield Airbag:

FRONT PILLAR GARNISH RH

AV FRONT PILLAR GARNISH RH

COWL SIDE TRIM BOARD RH

FRONT DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP RH

FRONT DOOR SCUFF PLATE RH

INSTRUMENT PANEL UNDER COVER SUB-ASSEMBLY RH

Non-reusable part B114488E02


AV–142

AUDIO / VISUAL – AMPLIFIER ANTENNA (for Hatchback 3 Door)

w/ Curtain Shield Airbag:

FRONT PILLAR GARNISH LH

AV

FRONT PILLAR GARNISH LH FRONT DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP LH

x2

INSTRUMENT PANEL UNDER COVER SUB-ASSEMBLY LH FRONT DOOR SCUFF PLATE LH COWL SIDE TRIM BOARD LH

Non-reusable part B114489E02


AV–143

AUDIO / VISUAL – AMPLIFIER ANTENNA (for Hatchback 3 Door)

w/ Curtain Shield Airbag:

ROOF SIDE INNER GARNISH RH

REAR ROOF SIDE RAIL GARNISH RH

REAR CENTER SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY CENTER PILLAR UPPER GARNISH RH

42 (430, 31)

AV DECK TRIM SIDE PANEL ASSEMBLY RH x2

42 (430, 31)

x2 FRONT QUARTER TRIM PANEL ASSEMBLY RH

REAR SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY RH

REAR DECK TRIM COVER

42 (430, 31)

FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY RH

SEAT BELT ANCHOR COVER CAP

N*m (kgf*cm, ft*lbf) : Specified torque Non-reusable part B117699E06


AV–144

AUDIO / VISUAL – AMPLIFIER ANTENNA (for Hatchback 3 Door)

SEAT BELT ANCHOR COVER CAP

w/ Curtain Shield Airbag:

42 (430, 31)

FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY LH

REAR ROOF SIDE RAIL GARNISH LH ROOF SIDE INNER GARNISH LH

AV

DECK TRIM SIDE PANEL ASSEMBLY LH CENTER PILLAR UPPER GARNISH LH

x2

FRONT QUARTER TRIM PANEL ASSEMBLY LH

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT ROOM LIGHT CONNECTOR

REAR SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY LH 42 (430, 31)

N*m (kgf*cm, ft*lbf) : Specified torque Non-reusable part B117700E07


AV–145

AUDIO / VISUAL – AMPLIFIER ANTENNA (for Hatchback 3 Door)

w/ Curtain Shield Airbag:

ROOF HEADLINING ASSEMBLY

SEAT BELT ANCHOR COVER

x4

x8

ASSIST GRIP SUB-ASSEMBLY

ASSIST GRIP COVER

ROOM LIGHT ASSEMBLY

VISOR ASSEMBLY RH

MAP LIGHT ASSEMBLY

VISOR HOLDER RH VISOR HOLDER LH

VISOR ASSEMBLY LH

B138692E01

AV


AV–146

AUDIO / VISUAL – AMPLIFIER ANTENNA (for Hatchback 3 Door)

w/o Curtain Shield Airbag:

ROOF HEADLINING ASSEMBLY

SEAT BELT ANCHOR COVER

AV

x6 ROOF HEADLINING SERVICE HOLE COVER

ASSIST GRIP SUB-ASSEMBLY

x2

ASSIST GRIP COVER

ROOM LIGHT ASSEMBLY

VISOR ASSEMBLY RH

MAP LIGHT ASSEMBLY

VISOR HOLDER RH VISOR HOLDER LH

VISOR ASSEMBLY LH

B138693E01


AUDIO / VISUAL – AMPLIFIER ANTENNA (for Hatchback 3 Door)

AV–147

ROOF ANTENNA POLE SUB-ASSEMBLY

AV

AMPLIFIER ANTENNA ASSEMBLY

4.5 (46, 40 in.*lbf)

N*m (kgf*cm, ft.*lbf) : Specified torque E107782E02


AV–148

AUDIO / VISUAL – AMPLIFIER ANTENNA (for Hatchback 3 Door)

REMOVAL CAUTION: Some of these service operations affect the SRS airbag system. Read the precautionary notices concerning the SRS airbag system before servicing (See page RS-1). NOTICE: Always use "Torx" socket wrench E10 when removing the rear seat. 1.

DISCONNECT CABLE FROM NEGATIVE BATTERY TERMINAL

2.

REMOVE PACKAGE TRAY TRIM PANEL ASSEMBLY (See page IR-48)

3.

REMOVE DECK BOARD SUB-ASSEMBLY (See page IR-48)

4.

REMOVE DECK FLOOR BOX RH (See page IR-48)

5.

REMOVE DECK FLOOR BOX LH (See page IR-48)

6.

REMOVE NO. 1 REAR SEAT LEG COVER (for 60/40 Split Seat Type) (a) for RH Side: (1) Remove the No. 1 rear seat leg cover (See page SE-89). (b) for LH Side: (1) Remove the No. 1 rear seat leg cover (See page SE-70).

7.

REMOVE NO. 2 REAR SEAT LEG COVER (for 60/40 Split Seat Type) (See page SE-70)

8.

REMOVE REAR SEAT ASSEMBLY RH (for 60/40 Split Seat Type) (See page SE-89)

9.

REMOVE REAR SEAT ASSEMBLY LH (for 60/40 Split Seat Type) (See page SE-71)

AV

10. REMOVE REAR SEAT CUSHION COVER PAD SUBASSEMBLY (for Hold Down Seat Type) (See page SE114) 11. REMOVE REAR SEATBACK ASSEMBLY (for Hold Down Seat Type) (See page SE-115) 12. REMOVE FRONT DOOR SCUFF PLATE RH (See page IR-97) 13. REMOVE FRONT DOOR SCUFF PLATE LH (See page IR-97) 14. REMOVE INSTRUMENT PANEL UNDER COVER SUBASSEMBLY RH (See page IR-50) 15. REMOVE INSTRUMENT PANEL UNDER COVER SUBASSEMBLY LH (See page IR-50) 16. REMOVE COWL SIDE TRIM BOARD RH (See page IR-50)


AUDIO / VISUAL – AMPLIFIER ANTENNA (for Hatchback 3 Door)

AV–149

17. REMOVE COWL SIDE TRIM BOARD LH (See page IR50) 18. REMOVE FRONT DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP RH (See page IR-97) 19. REMOVE FRONT DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP LH (See page IR-97) 20. REMOVE FRONT QUARTER TRIM PANEL ASSEMBLY RH (See page IR-97) 21. REMOVE FRONT QUARTER TRIM PANEL ASSEMBLY LH (See page IR-97) 22. REMOVE REAR DECK TRIM COVER (See page IR-49) 23. REMOVE REAR SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY RH (See page IR-98) 24. REMOVE REAR SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY LH (See page IR-98) 25. REMOVE DECK TRIM SIDE PANEL ASSEMBLY RH (See page IR-98) 26. REMOVE DECK TRIM SIDE PANEL ASSEMBLY LH (See page IR-98) 27. REMOVE SEAT BELT ANCHOR COVER CAP (See page IR-99) 28. REMOVE FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY RH (See page IR-99) 29. REMOVE FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY LH (See page IR-99) 30. REMOVE CENTER PILLAR UPPER GARNISH RH (See page IR-99) 31. REMOVE CENTER PILLAR UPPER GARNISH LH (See page IR-99) 32. REMOVE REAR CENTER SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY (See page IR-52) 33. REMOVE ROOF SIDE INNER GARNISH RH (See page IR-99) 34. REMOVE ROOF SIDE INNER GARNISH LH (See page IR-100) 35. REMOVE REAR ROOF SIDE RAIL GARNISH RH (See page IR-100) 36. REMOVE REAR ROOF SIDE RAIL GARNISH LH (See page IR-100) 37. REMOVE SEAT BELT ANCHOR COVER (See page SB-159) 38. REMOVE ROOF HEADLINING SERVICE HOLE COVER (w/o Curtain Shield Airbag) (See page IR-55) 39. REMOVE ASSIST GRIP COVER (See page IR-55)

AV


AV–150

AUDIO / VISUAL – AMPLIFIER ANTENNA (for Hatchback 3 Door)

40. REMOVE ASSIST GRIP SUB-ASSEMBLY (See page IR-56) 41. REMOVE VISOR ASSEMBLY RH (See page IR-56) 42. REMOVE VISOR ASSEMBLY LH (See page IR-56) 43. REMOVE VISOR HOLDER RH (See page IR-56) 44. REMOVE VISOR HOLDER LH (See page IR-56) 45. REMOVE ROOM LIGHT ASSEMBLY (See page IR-57) 46. REMOVE MAP LIGHT ASSEMBLY (See page IR-58) 47. REMOVE FRONT PILLAR GARNISH RH (See page IR58) 48. REMOVE FRONT PILLAR GARNISH LH (See page IR59) 49. REMOVE ROOF HEADLINING ASSEMBLY (See page AV-107) 50. REMOVE ROOF ANTENNA POLE SUB-ASSEMBLY (See page AV-117)

AV

51. REMOVE AMPLIFIER ANTENNA ASSEMBLY (See page AV-135)


AUDIO / VISUAL – AMPLIFIER ANTENNA (for Hatchback 3 Door)

AV–151

INSTALLATION CAUTION: Some of these service operations affect the SRS airbag system. Read the precautionary notices concerning the SRS airbag system before servicing (See page RS-1). NOTICE: Always use "Torx" socket wrench E10 when installing the rear seat. 1.

INSTALL AMPLIFIER ANTENNA ASSEMBLY (See page AV-136)

2.

INSTALL ROOF ANTENNA POLE SUB-ASSEMBLY (See page AV-117)

3.

INSTALL ROOF HEADLINING ASSEMBLY (See page AV-112)

4.

INSTALL FRONT PILLAR GARNISH RH (See page IR71)

5.

INSTALL FRONT PILLAR GARNISH LH (See page IR72)

6.

INSTALL MAP LIGHT ASSEMBLY (See page IR-73)

7.

INSTALL ROOM LIGHT ASSEMBLY (See page IR-74)

8.

INSTALL VISOR HOLDER RH (See page IR-75)

9.

INSTALL VISOR HOLDER LH (See page IR-75)

10. INSTALL VISOR ASSEMBLY RH (See page IR-75) 11. INSTALL VISOR ASSEMBLY LH (See page IR-75) 12. INSTALL ASSIST GRIP SUB-ASSEMBLY (See page IR-75) 13. INSTALL ASSIST GRIP COVER (See page IR-75) 14. INSTALL ROOF HEADLINING SERVICE HOLE COVER (w/o Curtain Shield Airbag) (See page IR-76) 15. INSTALL SEAT BELT ANCHOR COVER (See page SB-160) 16. INSTALL REAR ROOF SIDE RAIL GARNISH RH (See page IR-115) 17. INSTALL REAR ROOF SIDE RAIL GARNISH LH (See page IR-115) 18. INSTALL ROOF SIDE INNER GARNISH RH (See page IR-115) 19. INSTALL ROOF SIDE INNER GARNISH LH (See page IR-116) 20. INSTALL REAR CENTER SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY (See page IR-78) 21. INSTALL CENTER PILLAR UPPER GARNISH RH (See page IR-116)

AV


AV–152

AUDIO / VISUAL – AMPLIFIER ANTENNA (for Hatchback 3 Door)

22. INSTALL CENTER PILLAR UPPER GARNISH LH (See page IR-116) 23. INSTALL FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY RH (See page IR-117) 24. INSTALL FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY LH (See page IR-117) 25. INSTALL SEAT BELT ANCHOR COVER CAP (See page IR-117) 26. INSTALL DECK TRIM SIDE PANEL ASSEMBLY RH (See page IR-117) 27. INSTALL DECK TRIM SIDE PANEL ASSEMBLY LH (See page IR-118) 28. INSTALL REAR SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY RH (See page IR-118) 29. INSTALL REAR SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY LH (See page IR-118) 30. INSTALL REAR DECK TRIM COVER (See page IR-82)

AV

31. INSTALL FRONT QUARTER TRIM PANEL ASSEMBLY RH (See page IR-118) 32. INSTALL FRONT QUARTER TRIM PANEL ASSEMBLY LH (See page IR-119) 33. INSTALL FRONT DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP RH (See page IR-119) 34. INSTALL FRONT DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP LH (See page IR-119) 35. INSTALL COWL SIDE TRIM BOARD RH (See page IR81) 36. INSTALL COWL SIDE TRIM BOARD LH (See page IR81) 37. INSTALL INSTRUMENT PANEL UNDER COVER SUBASSEMBLY RH (See page IR-81) 38. INSTALL INSTRUMENT PANEL UNDER COVER SUBASSEMBLY LH (See page IR-82) 39. INSTALL FRONT DOOR SCUFF PLATE RH (See page IR-119) 40. INSTALL FRONT DOOR SCUFF PLATE LH (See page IR-119) 41. INSTALL REAR SEAT ASSEMBLY RH (for 60/40 Slide Reclining Hold Down Seat Type) (See page SE-102) 42. INSTALL REAR SEAT ASSEMBLY LH (for 60/40 Split Seat Type) (See page SE-84) 43. INSTALL NO. 2 REAR SEAT LEG COVER (for 60/40 Split Seat Type) (See page SE-85)


AUDIO / VISUAL – AMPLIFIER ANTENNA (for Hatchback 3 Door)

AV–153

44. INSTALL NO. 1 REAR SEAT LEG COVER (for 60/40 Split Seat Type) (a) for RH Side: (1) Install the No. 1 rear seat leg cover (See page SE-103). (b) for LH Side: (1) Install the No. 1 rear seat leg cover (See page SE-85). 45. INSTALL REAR SEATBACK ASSEMBLY (for Hold Down Seat Type) (See page SE-123) 46. INSTALL REAR SEAT CUSHION COVER PAD SUBASSEMBLY (for Hold Down Seat Type) (See page SE122) 47. INSTALL DECK FLOOR BOX RH (See page IR-83) 48. INSTALL DECK FLOOR BOX LH (See page IR-83) 49. INSTALL DECK BOARD SUB-ASSEMBLY (See page IR-83) 50. INSTALL PACKAGE TRAY TRIM PANEL ASSEMBLY (See page IR-83) 51. CONNECT CABLE TO NEGATIVE BATTERY TERMINAL Torque: 5.4 N*m (55 kgf*cm, 48 in.*lbf)

AV


AUDIO / VISUAL – STEREO JACK ADAPTER ASSEMBLY (for Sedan)

AV–153

STEREO JACK ADAPTER ASSEMBLY (for Sedan) BODY ELECTRICAL AUDIO / VISUAL

COMPONENTS for Manual Transaxle:

SHIFT LEVER KNOB SUB-ASSEMBLY

INSTRUMENT PANEL FINISH PANEL END

REAR CONSOLE BOX UPPER PANEL SUB-ASSEMBLY INSTRUMENT PANEL LOWER CENTER FINISH PANEL

AV REAR CONSOLE BOX UPPER PANEL SUB-ASSEMBLY

REAR CONSOLE BOX UPPER REAR PANEL SUB-ASSEMBLY

STEREO JACK ADAPTER CONNECTOR

REAR CONSOLE BOX CARPET

INSTRUMENT LOWER PAD STEREO JACK ADAPTER ASSEMBLY

x2

CIGARETTE LIGHTER CONNECTOR x2

REAR CONSOLE BOX ASSEMBLY

B138591E01


AV–154

AUDIO / VISUAL – STEREO JACK ADAPTER ASSEMBLY (for Sedan)

REMOVAL

AV

1.

DISCONNECT CABLE FROM NEGATIVE BATTERY TERMINAL

2.

REMOVE INSTRUMENT PANEL LOWER CENTER FINISH PANEL (See page ME-138)

3.

REMOVE SHIFT LEVER KNOB SUB-ASSEMBLY (for Manual Transaxle) (See page IP-84)

4.

REMOVE REAR CONSOLE BOX UPPER PANEL SUBASSEMBLY (See page IP-84)

5.

REMOVE REAR CONSOLE BOX UPPER REAR PANEL SUB-ASSEMBLY (See page IP-84)

6.

REMOVE REAR CONSOLE BOX CARPET (See page IP-85)

7.

REMOVE REAR CONSOLE BOX ASSEMBLY (See page IP-85)

8.

REMOVE INSTRUMENT PANEL FINISH PANEL END (See page ME-138)

9.

REMOVE INSTRUMENT LOWER PAD (See page IP45)

10. REMOVE STEREO JACK ADAPTER ASSEMBLY (a) Disengage the 2 claws and remove the stereo jack adapter. (b) Disconnect the stereo jack adapter connector.

B138592

INSTALLATION

B138592

1.

INSTALL STEREO JACK ADAPTER ASSEMBLY (a) Connect the stereo jack adapter connector. (b) Engage the 2 claws and install the stereo jack adapter.

2.

INSTALL INSTRUMENT LOWER PAD (See page IP54)

3.

INSTALL INSTRUMENT PANEL FINISH PANEL END (See page ME-141)

4.

INSTALL REAR CONSOLE BOX ASSEMBLY (See page IP-88)

5.

INSTALL REAR CONSOLE BOX CARPET (See page IP-88)

6.

INSTALL REAR CONSOLE BOX UPPER REAR PANEL SUB-ASSEMBLY (See page IP-89)

7.

INSTALL REAR CONSOLE BOX UPPER PANEL SUBASSEMBLY (See page IP-89)


AUDIO / VISUAL – STEREO JACK ADAPTER ASSEMBLY (for Sedan)

AV–155

8.

INSTALL SHIFT LEVER KNOB SUB-ASSEMBLY (See page IP-89)

9.

INSTALL INSTRUMENT PANEL LOWER CENTER FINISH PANEL (See page ME-142)

10. CONNECT CABLE TO NEGATIVE BATTERY TERMINAL Torque: 5.4 N*m (55 kgf*cm, 48 in.*lbf)

AV


AV–156

AUDIO / VISUAL – WINDOW GLASS ANTENNA WIRE (for Sedan)

WINDOW GLASS ANTENNA WIRE (for Sedan) Heat Wire Tester Probe

Tin Foil

REPAIR 1.

B138471E01

INSPECT WINDOW GLASS ANTENNA WIRE NOTICE: When cleaning the glass, use a soft, dry cloth, and wipe the glass in the direction of the wire. Do not to damage the wires. Do not use detergents or glass cleaners which contain any abrasive ingredients. When measuring the voltage, wind a piece of tin foil around the top of the negative probe and press the foil against wire by your finger, as shown in the illustration. (a) Inspect the continuity, at the center of each antenna wire, as shown in the illustration.

AV Ohmmeter B138470E01

2. Repair Point

Masking Tape

REPAIR WINDOW GLASS ANTENNA WIRE (a) Clean the broken wire tips with grease, wax or silicone remover. (b) Place the masking tape along both sides of the wire to be repaired. (c) Thoroughly mix the repair agent (Dupont paste No. 4817).

Broken Wire B138468E01

Fine Tip Brush

Repair Point

B138469E01

(d) Using a fine tip brush, apply a small amount of the agent to the wire. (e) After a few minutes, remove the masking tape. (f) Do not repair the defogger wire after for at least 24 hours after the removal of the masking tape.


AUDIO / VISUAL – FRONT NO. 1 SPEAKER (for Sedan)

AV–157

FRONT NO. 1 SPEAKER (for Sedan) BODY ELECTRICAL AUDIO / VISUAL

COMPONENTS w/ Power Window: FRONT DOOR ARMREST BASE UPPER PANEL DOOR LOCK CONNECTOR

POWER WINDOW SWITCH CONNECTOR

FRONT DOOR ARMREST BASE UPPER PANEL

AV DOOR LOCK CONNECTOR

FRONT DOOR LOWER FRAME BRACKET GARNISH

FRONT DOOR WINDOW REGULATOR HANDLE ASSEMBLY

B134967E01


AV–158

AUDIO / VISUAL – FRONT NO. 1 SPEAKER (for Sedan)

AV SPEAKER CONNECTOR FRONT NO. 1 SPEAKER ASSEMBLY

x3

FRONT DOOR LOCK REMOTE CONTROL CABLE ASSEMBLY

FRONT DOOR INSIDE LOCKING CABLE ASSEMBLY

FRONT DOOR TRIM BOARD SUB-ASSEMBLY

Non-reusable part B134968E01


AV–159

AUDIO / VISUAL – FRONT NO. 1 SPEAKER (for Sedan)

ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION 1.

INSPECT FRONT NO. 1 SPEAKER ASSEMBLY HINT: Remove interior parts so that the front No. 1 speaker can be seen. (a) Check the installation. OK: The speaker is securely installed. If the result is not as specified, reinstall the front No. 1 speaker. (b) Visually check the speaker. OK: The cone paper of the speaker is not torn. If the result is not as specified, replace the front No. 1 speaker. (c) Check the resistance. (1) Disconnect the speaker connector. (2) Using an ohmmeter, measure the resistance between the terminals. Standard resistance

Ohmmeter

Tester Connection

Specified Condition

1-2

Approximately 4 Ω

If the result is not as specified, replace the front No. 1 speaker.

B134971E01

AV


AV–160

AUDIO / VISUAL – FRONT NO. 1 SPEAKER (for Sedan)

REMOVAL HINT: The procedure described below is for the RH side. Use the same procedure for both the RH and LH sides, unless otherwise specified. 1.

DISCONNECT CABLE FROM NEGATIVE BATTERY TERMINAL

2.

REMOVE FRONT DOOR WINDOW REGULATOR HANDLE ASSEMBLY (w/o Power Window) (See page ED-9)

3.

REMOVE FRONT DOOR LOWER FRAME BRACKET GARNISH (See page ED-9)

4.

REMOVE FRONT DOOR ARMREST BASE UPPER PANEL (See page ED-9)

5.

REMOVE FRONT DOOR TRIM BOARD SUBASSEMBLY (See page ED-11)

6.

REMOVE FRONT NO. 1 SPEAKER ASSEMBLY (a) Disconnect the speaker connector.

AV

B134972

B134969

(b) Drill out the 3 rivet heads using a drill with a bit diameter of less than 4 mm (0.16 in.), and remove the front No.1 speaker. (c) Operate the drill around the rivet head circumference and cut out the flange. CAUTION: Be careful. The cut rivet is very hot. NOTICE: Do not drill the rivet at an angle as this will cause damage to the drill and drill hole. Line up the drill and rivet, and carefully drill the rivet head straight out. (d) After drilling out the flange, continue drilling to push out the shards on the drill. (e) Using a vacuum cleaner, remove the rivet fragments and shavings from the inside of the door.


AUDIO / VISUAL – FRONT NO. 1 SPEAKER (for Sedan)

AV–161

INSTALLATION HINT: The procedure described below is for the RH side. Use the same procedure for both the RH and LH sides, unless otherwise specified. 1. 2 1

INSTALL FRONT NO. 1 SPEAKER ASSEMBLY (a) Using an air riveter or hand riveter, install the front No. 1 speaker with 3 new strike rivets. HINT: Install the new strike rivets in the order shown in the illustration.

3

B134970E01

NOTICE: • Do not pry the rivet with the riveter, as this will cause damage to the riveter and mandrel.

B130465

• Confirm that the rivets are seated properly against the speaker. • Do not tilt the riveter when installing the rivet onto the speaker. • Do not leave any space between the rivet head and speaker.

B130466

• Do not leave any space between the speaker and door. Firmly hold the 2 items together while installing the rivet.

B130467

AV


AV–162

AUDIO / VISUAL – FRONT NO. 1 SPEAKER (for Sedan)

(b) Connect the speaker connector.

B134972

AV

2.

INSTALL FRONT DOOR TRIM BOARD SUBASSEMBLY (See page ED-26)

3.

INSTALL FRONT DOOR ARMREST BASE UPPER PANEL (See page ED-28)

4.

INSTALL FRONT DOOR LOWER FRAME BRACKET GARNISH (See page ED-28)

5.

INSTALL FRONT DOOR WINDOW REGULATOR HANDLE ASSEMBLY (w/o Power Window) (See page ED-29)

6.

CONNECT CABLE TO NEGATIVE BATTERY TERMINAL Torque: 5.4 N*m (55 kgf*cm, 48 in.*lbf)


AV–162

AUDIO / VISUAL – FRONT NO. 1 SPEAKER (for Hatchback)

FRONT NO. 1 SPEAKER (for Hatchback) BODY ELECTRICAL AUDIO / VISUAL

COMPONENTS

AV

x3 FRONT NO. 1 SPEAKER ASSEMBLY

FRONT DOOR TRIM BOARD SUB-ASSEMBLY

x3

w/o Power Window:

FRONT DOOR WINDOW REGULATOR HANDLE ASSEMBLY

FRONT DOOR ARMREST BASE UPPER PANEL

FRONT DOOR ARMREST COVER

Non-reusable part B138641E01


AV–163

AUDIO / VISUAL – FRONT NO. 1 SPEAKER (for Hatchback)

ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION 1.

INSPECT FRONT NO. 1 SPEAKER HINT: Remove interior parts so that the front No. 1 speaker can be seen. (a) Check the speaker installation. OK: The speaker is securely installed. If the result is not as specified, reinstall the front No. 1 speaker. (b) Visually check the speaker. OK: The cone paper of the speaker is not torn. If the result is not as specified, replace the front No. 1 speaker. (c) Check the speaker resistance. (1) Disconnect the speaker connector. (2) Using an ohmmeter, measure the resistance between the terminals. Standard resistance

 

E116767

Tester Connection

Specified Condition

1-2

Approximately 4 Ω

If the result is not as specified, replace the front No. 1 speaker.

AV


AV–164

AUDIO / VISUAL – FRONT NO. 1 SPEAKER (for Hatchback)

REMOVAL HINT: The procedure described below is for the LH sides. Use the same procedure for both the RH and LH side, unless otherwise specified. 1.

DISCONNECT CABLE FROM NEGATIVE BATTERY TERMINAL

2.

REMOVE FRONT DOOR WINDOW REGULATOR HANDLE ASSEMBLY (w/o Power Window) (See page ED-57)

3.

REMOVE FRONT DOOR ARMREST COVER (See page ED-33)

4.

REMOVE FRONT DOOR ARMREST BASE UPPER PANEL (a) w/ Power Window: (1) Remove the front door armrest base upper panel (See page ED-33). (b) w/o Power Window: (1) Remove the front door armrest base upper panel (See page ED-57).

5.

REMOVE FRONT DOOR TRIM BOARD SUBASSEMBLY (a) w/ Power Window: (1) Remove the front door trim board subassembly (See page ED-34). (b) w/o Power Window: (1) Remove the front door trim board subassembly (See page ED-58).

6.

REMOVE FRONT NO. 1 SPEAKER ASSEMBLY (a) Disconnect the speaker connector. (b) Drill out the 3 rivet heads using a drill with a bit diameter of less than 4 mm (0.16 in.), and remove the front No.1 speaker assembly from the front door panel. (c) Operate the drill around the rivet head circumference and cut out the flange. CAUTION: Be careful. The cut rivet is very hot. NOTICE: Do not drill the rivet at an angle as this will cause damage to the drill and drill hole. Line up the drill and rivet, and carefully drill the rivet head straight out. (d) After drilling out the flange, continue drilling to push out the shards on the drill. (e) Using a vacuum cleaner, remove the rivet fragments and shavings from the inside of the door.

AV

B138646


AUDIO / VISUAL – FRONT NO. 1 SPEAKER (for Hatchback)

AV–165

INSTALLATION HINT: The procedure described below is for the LH side. Use the same procedure for both the RH and LH sides, unless otherwise specified. 1. 2

1

INSTALL FRONT NO. 1 SPEAKER ASSEMBLY (a) Using an air riveter or hand riveter, install the front No.1 speaker assembly onto the front door panel with 3 new strike rivets. HINT: Install the new strike rivets in the order shown in the illustration.

3

B138647E01

NOTICE: • Do not pry the rivet with the riveter, as this will cause damage to the riveter and mandrel.

B130465

• Confirm that the rivets are seated properly against the speaker. • Do not tilt the riveter when installing the rivet onto the speaker. • Do not leave any space between the rivet head and speaker.

B130466

• Do not leave any space between the speaker and door. Firmly hold the 2 items together while installing the rivet.

B130467

AV


AV–166

AUDIO / VISUAL – FRONT NO. 1 SPEAKER (for Hatchback)

(b) Connect the speaker connector. 2.

INSTALL FRONT DOOR TRIM BOARD SUBASSEMBLY (a) w/ Power Window: (1) Install the front door trim board sub-assembly (See page ED-51). (b) w/o Power Window: (1) Install the front door trim board sub-assembly (See page ED-74).

3.

INSTALL FRONT DOOR ARMREST BASE UPPER PANEL (a) w/ Power Window: (1) Install the front door armrest base upper panel (See page ED-53). (b) w/o Power Window: (1) Install the front door armrest base upper panel (See page ED-74).

4.

INSTALL FRONT DOOR ARMREST COVER (See page ED-53)

5.

INSTALL FRONT DOOR WINDOW REGULATOR HANDLE ASSEMBLY (w/o Power Window) (See page ED-75)

6.

CONNECT CABLE TO NEGATIVE BATTERY TERMINAL Torque: 5.4 N*m (55 kgf*cm, 48 in.*lbf)

B138648

AV


AV–167

AUDIO / VISUAL – REAR SPEAKER (for Sedan)

REAR SPEAKER (for Sedan) BODY ELECTRICAL AUDIO / VISUAL

COMPONENTS for 60/40 Split Seat Type:

REAR SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY

REAR CENTER SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY

REAR SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY

REAR SEATBACK ASSEMBLY RH

AV

x2 REAR SEATBACK ASSEMBLY LH x2

37 (375, 27)

37 (375, 27)

REAR SEAT INNER BELT ASSEMBLY RH

37 (375, 27)

37 (375, 27)

REAR SEAT INNER BELT ASSEMBLY LH

REAR SEAT CUSHION COVER PAD SUB-ASSEMBLY N*m (kgf*cm, ft*lbf) : Specified torque B138665E03


AV–168

AUDIO / VISUAL – REAR SPEAKER (for Sedan)

for Fixed Seat Type:

REAR SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY RH

REAR CENTER SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY

REAR SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY LH

AV 7.9 (80, 70 in.*lbf)

x3 REAR SEATBACK ASSEMBLY

REAR SEAT INNER BELT ASSEMBLY RH

REAR SEAT INNER BELT ASSEMBLY LH

REAR SEAT CUSHION COVER PAD SUB-ASSEMBLY

N*m (kgf*cm, ft*lbf) : Specified torque B138441E06


AUDIO / VISUAL – REAR SPEAKER (for Sedan)

AV–169

for 60/40 Split Seat Type:

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT FLOOR MAT

AV SPARE WHEEL COVER ASSEMBLY

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT TRIM INNER PAD

for Grand Tire:

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT TRIM INNER PAD

B138565E01


AV–170

AUDIO / VISUAL – REAR SPEAKER (for Sedan)

w/ Curtain Shield Airbag:

REAR DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP RH

ROOF SIDE INNER GARNISH RH

w/ Curtain Shield Airbag:

AV REAR SEAT SIDE COVER RH

REAR DOOR SCUFF PLATE RH

REAR DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP LH

ROOF SIDE INNER GARNISH LH

REAR SEAT SIDE COVER LH

REAR DOOR SCUFF PLATE LH Non-reusable part B138449E01


AV–171

AUDIO / VISUAL – REAR SPEAKER (for Sedan)

w/o Rear Spoiler:

HIGH MOUNTED STOP LIGHT ASSEMBLY

HIGH MOUNTED STOP LIGHT CONNECTOR

x4

PACKAGE TRAY TRIM PANEL ASSEMBLY

AV

PACKAGE TRAY TRIM PAD

x4 REAR SPEAKER ASSEMBLY

B138640E01


AV–172

AUDIO / VISUAL – REAR SPEAKER (for Sedan)

ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION 1.

REAR SPEAKER ASSEMBLY HINT: Remove interior parts so that the rear speaker can be seen. (a) Check the installation. OK: The speaker is securely installed. If the result is not as specified, reinstall the rear speaker. (b) Visually check the speaker. OK: The cone paper of the speaker is not torn. If the result is not as specified, replace the rear speaker. (c) Check the resistance. (1) Disconnect the speaker connector. (2) Using an ohmmeter, measure the resistance between the terminals. Standard resistance

AV

Ommeter

B134976E01

Tester Connection

Specified Condition

1-2

Approximately 4 Ω

If the result is not as specified, replace the rear speaker.


AUDIO / VISUAL – REAR SPEAKER (for Sedan)

AV–173

REMOVAL HINT: The procedure described below is for the RH side. Use the same procedure for both the RH and LH sides, unless otherwise specified. 1.

DISCONNECT CABLE FROM NEGATIVE BATTERY TERMINAL

2.

REMOVE REAR SEAT CUSHION COVER PAD SUBASSEMBLY (a) for 60/40 Split Seat Type: (1) Remove the rear seat cushion cover pad subassembly (See page SE-46). (b) for Fixed Seat Type: (1) Remove the rear seat cushion cover pad subassembly (See page SE-106).

3.

REMOVE REAR SEATBACK ASSEMBLY RH (for 60/ 40 Split Seat Type) (See page SE-57)

4.

REMOVE REAR SEATBACK ASSEMBLY LH (for 60/ 40 Split Seat Type) (See page SE-46)

5.

REMOVE REAR SEATBACK ASSEMBLY (for Fixed Seat Type) (See page SE-106)

6.

REMOVE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT FLOOR MAT (for 60/40 Split Seat Type) (See page ED-133)

7.

REMOVE SPARE WHEEL COVER ASSEMBLY (for 60/ 40 Split Seat Type) (See page ED-133)

8.

REMOVE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT TRIM INNER PAD (for 60/40 Split Seat Type) (See page ED-134)

9.

REMOVE REAR DOOR SCUFF PLATE RH (See page IR-15)

10. REMOVE REAR DOOR SCUFF PLATE LH (See page IR-15) 11. REMOVE REAR DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP RH (a) Remove the rear door opening trim weatherstrip to the extent that the rear seat side cover and the roof side inner garnish. 12. REMOVE REAR DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP LH HINT: Use the same procedure as for the RH side. B138636

13. REMOVE REAR SEAT SIDE COVER RH (See page IR16) 14. REMOVE REAR SEAT SIDE COVER LH (See page IR16) 15. REMOVE ROOF SIDE INNER GARNISH RH (See page IR-16)

AV


AV–174

AUDIO / VISUAL – REAR SPEAKER (for Sedan)

16. REMOVE ROOF SIDE INNER GARNISH LH (See page IR-16) 17. REMOVE HIGH MOUNTED STOP LIGHT ASSEMBLY (w/o Rear Spoiler) (See page LI-141) 18. REMOVE PACKAGE TRAY TRIM PANEL ASSEMBLY (a) Using a clip remover, remove the 4 clips. (b) Disengage the 5 claws and remove the package tray trim panel.

B134912

19. REMOVE PACKAGE TRAY TRIM PAD (a) Remove the pack age tray trim pad.

AV B134974

20. REMOVE REAR SPEAKER ASSEMBLY (a) Disconnect the speaker connector. (b) Remove the 4 bolts and the rear speaker.

B134975


AUDIO / VISUAL – REAR SPEAKER (for Sedan)

AV–175

INSTALLATION HINT: The procedure described below is for the RH side. Use the same procedure for both the RH and LH sides, unless otherwise specified. 1.

INSTALL REAR SPEAKER ASSEMBLY (a) Install the rear speaker with the 4 bolts. (b) Connect the speaker connector.

2.

INSTALL PACKAGE TRAY TRIM PAD (a) Install the package tray trim pad.

B134975

AV B134974

B134912

3.

INSTALL PACKAGE TRAY TRIM PANEL ASSEMBLY (a) Engage the 5 claws and install the package tray trim. (b) Install the 4 clips.

4.

INSTALL HIGH MOUNTED STOP LIGHT ASSEMBLY (w/o Rear Spoiler) (See page LI-142)

5.

INSTALL ROOF SIDE INNER GARNISH RH (See page IR-32)

6.

INSTALL ROOF SIDE INNER GARNISH LH (See page IR-33)

7.

INSTALL REAR SEAT SIDE COVER RH (See page IR33)

8.

INSTALL REAR SEAT SIDE COVER LH (See page IR33)


AV–176

AUDIO / VISUAL – REAR SPEAKER (for Sedan)

9.

INSTALL REAR DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP RH (a) Install the rear door opening trim weatherstrip.

10. INSTALL REAR DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP LH HINT: Use the same procedure as for the RH side. B138636

11. INSTALL REAR DOOR SCUFF PLATE RH (See page IR-34) 12. INSTALL REAR DOOR SCUFF PLATE LH (See page IR-34) 13. INSTALL LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT TRIM INNER PAD (for 60/40 Split Seat Type) (See page ED-136) 14. INSTALL SPARE WHEEL COVER ASSEMBLY (for 60/ 40 Split Seat Type) (See page ED-137) 15. INSTALL LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT FLOOR MAT (for 60/40 Split Seat Type) (See page ED-137)

AV

16. INSTALL REAR SEATBACK ASSEMBLY RH (for 60/ 40 Split Seat Type) (See page SE-65) 17. INSTALL REAR SEATBACK ASSEMBLY LH (for 60/40 Split Seat Type) (See page SE-52) 18. INSTALL REAR SEATBACK ASSEMBLY (for Fixed Seat Type) (See page SE-108) 19. INSTALL REAR SEAT CUSHION COVER PAD SUBASSEMBLY (a) for 60/40 Split Seat Type: (1) Install the rear seat cushion cover pad subassembly (See page SE-53). (b) for Fixed Seat Type: (1) Install the rear seat cushion cover pad subassembly (See page SE-109). 20. CONNECT CABLE TO NEGATIVE BATTERY TERMINAL Torque: 5.4 N*m (55 kgf*cm, 48 in.*lbf)


AV–176

AUDIO / VISUAL – REAR SPEAKER (for Hatchback 5 Door)

REAR SPEAKER (for Hatchback 5 Door) BODY ELECTRICAL AUDIO / VISUAL

COMPONENTS

AV x3 REAR SPEAKER ASSEMBLY REAR DOOR TRIM BOARD SUB-ASSEMBLY

REAR DOOR ARMREST PLUG w/o Power Window:

REAR DOOR WINDOW REGULATOR HANDLE ASSEMBLY

Non-reusable part B138644E01


AV–177

AUDIO / VISUAL – REAR SPEAKER (for Hatchback 5 Door)

ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION 1.

INSPECT REAR SPEAKER ASSEMBLY HINT: Remove interior parts so that the rear speaker can be seen. (a) Check the speaker installation. OK: The speaker is securely installed. If the result is not as specified, reinstall the rear speaker. (b) Visually check the speaker. OK: The cone paper of the speaker is not torn. If the result is not as specified, replace the rear speaker. (c) Check the speaker resistance. (1) Disconnect the speaker connector. (2) Using an ohmmeter, measure the resistance between the terminals. Standard resistance

 

E116767

Tester Connection

Specified Condition

1-2

Approximately 4 Ω

If the result is not as specified, replace the rear speaker.

AV


AV–178

AUDIO / VISUAL – REAR SPEAKER (for Hatchback 5 Door)

REMOVAL HINT: The procedure described below is for the LH side. Use the same procedure for both the RH and LH sides, unless otherwise specified.

AV

B138649

1.

DISCONNECT CABLE FROM NEGATIVE BATTERY TERMINAL

2.

REMOVE REAR DOOR WINDOW REGULATOR HANDLE ASSEMBLY (w/o Power Window) (See page ED-115)

3.

REMOVE REAR DOOR TRIM BOARD SUBASSEMBLY (a) w/ Power Window: (1) Remove the rear door trim board sub-assembly (See page ED-98). (b) w/o Power Window: (1) Remove the rear door trim board sub-assembly (See page ED-115).

4.

REMOVE REAR SPEAKER ASSEMBLY (a) Disconnect the speaker connector. (b) Drill out the 3 rivet heads using a drill with a bit diameter of less than 4 mm (0.16 in.), and remove the rear speaker assembly from the rear door panel. (c) Operate the drill around the rivet head circumference and cut out the flange. CAUTION: Be careful. The cut rivet is very hot. NOTICE: Do not drill the rivet at an angle as this will cause damage to the drill and drill hole. Line up the drill and rivet, and carefully drill the rivet head straight out. (d) After drilling out the flange, continue drilling to push out the shards on the drill. (e) Using a vacuum cleaner, remove the rivet fragments and shavings from the inside of the door.


AUDIO / VISUAL – REAR SPEAKER (for Hatchback 5 Door)

AV–179

INSTALLATION HINT: The procedure described below is for the LH side. Use the same procedure for both the RH and LH sides, unless otherwise specified. 1. 2

1

INSTALL REAR SPEAKER ASSEMBLY (a) Using an air riveter or hand riveter, install the rear speaker assembly onto the front door panel with 3 new strike rivets. HINT: Install the new strike rivets in the order shown in the illustration.

3 B138650E01

NOTICE: • Do not pry the rivet with the riveter, as this will cause damage to the riveter and mandrel.

AV B130465

• Confirm that the rivets are seated properly against the speaker. • Do not tilt the riveter when installing the rivet onto the speaker. • Do not leave any space between the rivet head and speaker.

B130466

• Do not leave any space between the speaker and door. Firmly hold the 2 items together while installing the rivet.

B130467


AV–180

AUDIO / VISUAL – REAR SPEAKER (for Hatchback 5 Door)

(b) Connect the speaker connector. 2.

INSTALL REAR DOOR TRIM BOARD SUBASSEMBLY (a) w/ Power Window: (1) Install the rear door trim board sub-assembly (See page ED-111). (b) w/o Power Window: (1) Install the rear door trim board sub-assembly (See page ED-127).

3.

INSTALL REAR DOOR WINDOW REGULATOR HANDLE ASSEMBLY (w/o Power Window) (See page ED-128)

4.

CONNECT CABLE TO NEGATIVE BATTERY TERMINAL Torque: 5.4 N*m (55 kgf*cm, 48 in.*lbf)

B138651

AV


AV–180

AUDIO / VISUAL – REAR SPEAKER (for Hatchback 3 Door)

REAR SPEAKER (for Hatchback 3 Door) BODY ELECTRICAL AUDIO / VISUAL

COMPONENTS

PACKAGE TRAY TRIM PANEL ASSEMBLY

AV DECK BOARD SUB-ASSEMBLY

DECK FLOOR BOX

DECK FLOOR BOX

B127707E02


AUDIO / VISUAL – REAR SPEAKER (for Hatchback 3 Door)

AV–181

for 60/40 Split Seat Type:

REAR SEAT ASSEMBLY

NO. 1 REAR SEAT LEG COVER

37 (375, 27)

REAR SEAT ASSEMBLY

x6

AV

NO. 2 REAR SEAT LEG COVER

NO. 1 REAR SEAT LEG COVER

37 (375, 27)

x7

for Hold Down Seat Type:

REAR SEAT CUSHION COVER PAD SUB-ASSEMBLY

REAR SEATBACK ASSEMBLY

37 (375, 27)

x4

N*m (kgf*cm, ft*lbf) : Specified torque B121713E05


AV–182

AUDIO / VISUAL – REAR SPEAKER (for Hatchback 3 Door)

AV

REAR SPEAKER ASSEMBLY

x3

FRONT DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP

FRONT QUARTER TRIM PANEL ASSEMBLY FRONT DOOR SCUFF PLATE

Non-reusable part B138645E01


AV–183

AUDIO / VISUAL – REAR SPEAKER (for Hatchback 3 Door)

ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION 1.

INSPECT REAR SPEAKER ASSEMBLY HINT: Remove interior parts so that the rear speaker can be seen. (a) Check the speaker installation. OK: The speaker is securely installed. If the result is not as specified, reinstall the rear speaker. (b) Visually check the speaker. OK: The cone paper of the speaker is not torn. If the result is not as specified, replace the rear speaker. (c) Check the speaker resistance. (1) Disconnect the rear speaker connector. (2) Using an ohmmeter, measure the resistance between the terminals. Standard resistance

 

E116767

Tester Connection

Specified Condition

1-2

Approximately 4 Ω

If the result is not as specified, replace the rear speaker.

AV


AV–184

AUDIO / VISUAL – REAR SPEAKER (for Hatchback 3 Door)

REMOVAL NOTICE: Always use "Torx" socket wrench E10 when removing the rear seat. HINT: The procedure described below is for the LH side. Use the same procedure for both the RH and LH sides, unless otherwise specified. 1.

DISCONNECT CABLE FROM NEGATIVE BATTERY TERMINAL

2.

REMOVE PACKAGE TRAY TRIM PANEL ASSEMBLY (See page IR-48)

3.

REMOVE DECK BOARD SUB-ASSEMBLY (See page IR-48)

4.

REMOVE DECK FLOOR BOX (a) for RH Side: (1) Remove the deck floor box (See page IR-48). (b) for LH Side: (1) Remove the deck floor box. HINT: Use the same procedure as for the RH side.

5.

REMOVE NO. 1 REAR SEAT LEG COVER (for 60/40 Split Seat Type) (a) for RH Side: (1) Remove the No. 1 rear seat leg cover (See pageSE-89 ). (b) for LH Side: (1) Remove the No. 1 rear seat leg cover (See pageSE-70 ).

6.

REMOVE NO. 2 REAR SEAT LEG COVER (for 60/40 Split Seat Type LH Side) (See page SE-70)

7.

REMOVE REAR SEAT ASSEMBLY (for 60/40 Split Seat Type) (a) for RH Side: (1) Remove the rear seat assembly (See pageSE89 ) (b) for LH Side: (1) Remove the rear seat assembly (See pageSE71 )

8.

REMOVE REAR SEAT CUSHION COVER PAD SUBASSEMBLY (for Hold Down Seat Type) (See page SE114)

9.

REMOVE REAR SEATBACK ASSEMBLY (for Hold Down Seat Type) (See page SE-115)

AV

10. REMOVE FRONT DOOR SCUFF PLATE (See page IR97) 11. SEPARATE FRONT DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP (See page SB-76)


AUDIO / VISUAL – REAR SPEAKER (for Hatchback 3 Door)

AV–185

12. REMOVE FRONT QUARTER TRIM PANEL ASSEMBLY (See page IR-97)

B138652

13. REMOVE REAR SPEAKER ASSEMBLY (a) Disconnect the speaker connector. (b) Drill out the 3 rivet heads using a drill with a bit diameter of less than 4 mm (0.16 in.), and remove the rear speaker assembly from the quarter panel. (c) Operate the drill around the rivet head circumference and cut out the flange. CAUTION: Be careful. The cut rivet is very hot. NOTICE: Do not drill the rivet at an angle as this will cause damage to the drill and drill hole. Line up the drill and rivet, and carefully drill the rivet head straight out. (d) After drilling out the flange, continue drilling to push out the shards on the drill. (e) Using a vacuum cleaner, remove the rivet fragments and shavings from the inside of the quarter panel.

AV


AV–186

AUDIO / VISUAL – REAR SPEAKER (for Hatchback 3 Door)

INSTALLATION NOTICE: Always use "Torx" socket wrench E10 when installing the rear seat. HINT: The procedure described below is for the LH side. Use the same procedure for both the RH and LH sides, unless otherwise specified. 1.

INSTALL REAR SPEAKER ASSEMBLY (a) Engage the 2 claws of the speaker with the body and provisionally install the speaker.

AV B138653

(b) Using an air riveter or hand riveter, install the rear speaker assembly onto the quarter panel with 3 new strike rivets. HINT: Install the new strike rivets in order as shown in the illustration.

2 1

3 B138654E01

NOTICE: • Do not pry the rivet with the riveter, as this will cause damage to the riveter and mandrel.

B130465


AUDIO / VISUAL – REAR SPEAKER (for Hatchback 3 Door)

AV–187

• Confirm that the rivets are seated properly against the speaker. • Do not tilt the riveter when installing the rivet onto the speaker. • Do not leave any space between the rivet head and speaker.

B130466

• Do not leave any space between the speaker and door. Firmly hold the 2 items together while installing the rivet.

B130467

(c) Connect the speaker connector.

B138655

2.

INSTALL FRONT QUARTER TRIM PANEL ASSEMBLY (See page IR-118)

3.

INSTALL FRONT DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP (See page SB-80)

4.

INSTALL FRONT DOOR SCUFF PLATE (See page IR119)

5.

INSTALL REAR SEAT ASSEMBLY (for 60/40 Split Seat Type) (a) for RH Side: (1) Install the rear seat assembly (See pageSE102 ). (b) for LH Side: (1) Install the rear seat assembly (See pageSE-84 ).

6.

INSTALL NO. 2 REAR SEAT LEG COVER (for 60/40 Split Seat Type) (See page SE-85)

7.

INSTALL NO. 1 REAR SEAT LEG COVER (for 60/40 Split Seat Type) (a) for RH Side: (1) Install the No. 1 rear seat leg cover (See pageSE-103 ). (b) for LH Side: (1) Install the No. 1 rear seat leg cover (See pageSE-85 ).

8.

INSTALL REAR SEATBACK ASSEMBLY (for Hold Down Seat Type) (See page SE-122)

AV


AV–188

AUDIO / VISUAL – REAR SPEAKER (for Hatchback 3 Door)

9.

INSTALL REAR SEAT CUSHION COVER PAD SUBASSEMBLY (for Hold Down Seat Type) (See page SE123)

10. INSTALL DECK FLOOR BOX (a) for RH Side: (1) Install the deck floor box (See page IR-83). (b) for LH Side: (1) Install the deck floor box. HINT: Use the same procedure as for the RH side. 11. INSTALL DECK BOARD SUB-ASSEMBLY (See page IR-83) 12. INSTALL PACKAGE TRAY TRIM PANEL ASSEMBLY (See page IR-83) 13. CONNECT CABLE TO NEGATIVE BATTERY TERMINAL Torque: 5.4 N*m (55 kgf*cm, 48 in.*lbf)

AV


AH–1

AXLE – AXLE SYSTEM

AXLE SYSTEM PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE HINT: Use the table below to help you find the cause of the problem. The numbers indicate the ranked order of probability of each of the possible causes. Check each part in the order suggested. If necessary, replace the applicable parts. Symptom

Vehicle unstable

Front wheel shimmy

Rear wheel shimmy

Suspected area

See page

1. Front wheel alignment

SP-2

2. Rear wheel alignment

SP-10

3. Steering linkage

-

4. Hub bearing

AH-1

5. Front stabilizer bar

SP-42

1. Wheels (Out of balance)

TW-2

2. Front shock absorber

SP-18

3. Hub bearing

AH-1

1. Wheels (Out of balance)

TW-2

2. Rear shock absorber

SP-55

3. Hub bearing

AH-1

AH


AH–2

AXLE – AXLE SYSTEM

ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION 1.

REMOVE FRONT WHEEL

2.

SEPARATE FRONT DISC BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (See page AH-6)

3.

REMOVE FRONT DISC (See page BR-50)

4.

INSPECT FRONT AXLE HUB BEARING (a) Inspect the axle hub backlash. (1) Using a dial indicator, check the backlash near the center of the axle hub. Maximum: 0.05 mm (0.0020 in.) If the backlash exceeds the maximum, replace the bearing.

C107912

(b) Inspect the axle hub runout. (1) Using a dial indicator, check the runout of the surface of the axle hub. Maximum: 0.05 mm (0.0020 in.) If the runout exceeds the maximum, replace the bearing and axle hub.

C107911

5.

INSTALL FRONT DISC (See page BR-52)

6.

INSTALL FRONT DISC BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (See page AH-10)

7.

INSTALL FRONT WHEEL Torque: 103 N*m (1,050 kgf*cm, 76 ft.*lbf)

8.

REMOVE REAR WHEEL

9.

REMOVE REAR BRAKE DRUM SUB-ASSEMBLY (See page BR-60)

10. INSPECT REAR AXLE HUB BEARING (a) Inspect the axle hub and bearing backlash. (1) Using a dial indicator, check the backlash near the center of the axle hub. Maximum: 0.05 mm (0.0020 in.) If the backlash exceeds the maximum, replace the axle hub and bearing.

AH

C121815


AXLE – AXLE SYSTEM

AH–3

(b) Inspect the axle hub and bearing runout. (1) Using a dial indicator, check the runout of the surface of the axle hub. Maximum: 0.07 mm (0.0028 in.) If the runout exceeds the maximum, replace the axle hub and bearing. 11. INSTALL REAR BRAKE DRUM SUB-ASSEMBLY C121816

12. ADJUST REAR DRUM BRAKE SHOE CLEARANCE (See page BR-67) 13. INSTALL REAR WHEEL Torque: 103 N*m (1,050 kgf*cm, 76 ft.*lbf)

AH


AH–3

AXLE – FRONT AXLE HUB BOLT

FRONT AXLE HUB BOLT SUSPENSION & AXLE AXLE

COMPONENTS

107 (1,089, 79)

FRONT DISC BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY x4

AH FRONT AXLE HUB BOLT FRONT DISC

N*m (kgf*cm, ft*lbf) :Specified torque C118252E01


AH–4

AXLE – FRONT AXLE HUB BOLT

REMOVAL

SST

REMOVE FRONT WHEEL

2.

SEPARATE FRONT DISC BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (See page AH-6)

3.

REMOVE FRONT DISC (See page BR-50)

4.

REMOVE FRONT AXLE HUB BOLT (a) Using SST and a screwdriver or the equivalent to hold the axle hub, remove the hub bolt. SST 09628-10011

G031912E01

INSTALLATION

Washer

G031913E01

AH

1.

1.

INSTALL FRONT AXLE HUB BOLT (a) Install the washer and the nut onto a new hub bolt, as shown in the illustration. (b) Using a screwdriver or the equivalent to hold the axle hub, install the hub bolt by tightening the nut.

2.

INSTALL FRONT DISC (See page BR-52)

3.

INSTALL FRONT DISC BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (See page AH-10)

4.

INSTALL FRONT WHEEL Torque: 103 N*m (1,050 kgf*cm, 76 ft.*lbf)


AH–5

AXLE – FRONT AXLE HUB

FRONT AXLE HUB SUSPENSION & AXLE AXLE

COMPONENTS

74 (755, 55)

29 (300, 22)

FRONT FLEXIBLE HOSE 164 (1,672, 121)

FRONT STABILIZER LINK ASSEMBLY FRONT DRIVE SHAFT w/ ABS: FRONT SPEED SENSOR

8.5 (87, 75 in.*lbf) 49 (500, 36)

107 (1,089, 79)

COTTER PIN

FRONT AXLE ASSEMBLY

CLIP 98 (1,000, 72)

TIE ROD END SUB-ASSEMBLY

FRONT DISC BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY FRONT LOWER SUSPENSION ARM

FRONT DISC 216 (2,203, 160)

FRONT AXLE HUB NUT

AH FRONT AXLE HUB HOLE SNAP RING

FRONT AXLE HUB BEARING

N*m (kgf*cm, ft*lbf) : Specified torque

STEERING KNUCKLE

FRONT DISC BRAKE DUST COVER

FRONT AXLE HUB SUB-ASSEMBLY

Non-reusable part C121845E04


AH–6

AXLE – FRONT AXLE HUB

REMOVAL

C085618

1.

DISCONNECT CABLE FROM NEGATIVE BATTERY TERMINAL

2.

REMOVE FRONT WHEEL

3.

REMOVE FRONT AXLE HUB NUT (See page DS-3)

4.

SEPARATE FRONT SPEED SENSOR (w/ ABS) (See page DS-3)

5.

SEPARATE FRONT DISC BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (a) Remove the 2 bolts and separate the disc brake caliper from the steering knuckle. NOTICE: Hang the caliper using a piece of string or the equivalent.

6.

REMOVE FRONT DISC (See page BR-50)

7.

SEPARATE TIE ROD END SUB-ASSEMBLY (See page DS-3)

8.

SEPARATE FRONT STABILIZER LINK ASSEMBLY (See page DS-4)

9.

SEPARATE FRONT LOWER SUSPENSION ARM (See page DS-4)

10. SEPARATE FRONT AXLE ASSEMBLY (a) Using a plastic hammer, tap the end of the drive shaft and disengage the fitting between the drive shaft and front axle. HINT: If it is difficult to disengage the fitting, tap the end of the drive shaft with a brass bar and hammer. (b) Push the front axle out of the vehicle to remove the drive shaft from the front axle. NOTICE: • Do not push the front axle further out of the vehicle than is necessary. • Do not damage the outboard joint boot. • Do not damage the speed sensor rotor. • Suspend the drive shaft with a piece of string or the equivalent.

AH

(c) Remove the 2 nuts and 2 bolts and remove the front axle assembly. HINT: Keep the nut from rotating while turning the bolt.

C125277


AXLE – FRONT AXLE HUB

AH–7

DISASSEMBLY 1.

REMOVE FRONT AXLE HUB HOLE SNAP RING (a) Using snap ring pliers, remove the hole snap ring. NOTICE: When removing the hole snap ring, do not damage the magnetic rotor surface.

2.

REMOVE FRONT AXLE HUB SUB-ASSEMBLY (a) Fix the steering knuckle in a vise between aluminum plates. NOTICE: Do not overtighten the vise. (b) Using SST, remove the axle hub. SST 09520-00031

C112582

SST

C057871E01

(c) Using SST, remove the hub bearing inner race from the axle hub. SST 09950-40011 (09951-04020, 09952-04010, 09953-04020, 09954-04010, 09955-04011, 09957-04010, 09958-04011), 09950-60010 (09951-00370)

SST

G031908E01

3.

REMOVE FRONT DISC BRAKE DUST COVER (a) Remove the dust cover by tapping the back side with a brass bar and hammer.

AH C116902

4. SST

SST C112580E01

REMOVE FRONT AXLE HUB BEARING (a) Install the removed hub bearing inner race onto the outer side of the hub bearing. (b) Using SST and a press, remove the hub bearing from the steering knuckle. SST 09223-15020, 09387-00041 (09387-02010), 09950-60010 (09951-00630), 09950-70010 (09951-07100)


AH–8

AXLE – FRONT AXLE HUB

REASSEMBLY SST

1.

INSTALL FRONT AXLE HUB BEARING (a) Using SST and a press, insert a new hub bearing, with its magnetic rotor side facing the inside of the vehicle, until it reaches the end of the steering knuckle. SST 09950-60020 (09951-00710), 09950-70010 (09951-07100) NOTICE: • Do not remove the inner race because the hub bearing is built into the oil seal. • Do not use bearings that have been removed. • Do not wipe off any grease that has been applied to new bearings. • Do not bring magnets close to the magnetic rotor surface of the bearing. • Keep the magnetic rotor surface of the bearing free of foreign matter.

2.

INSTALL FRONT DISC BRAKE DUST COVER (a) Provisionally install a new disc brake dust cover, as shown in the illustration.

G031910E01

19.8 mm (0.78 in.)

19.8 mm (0.78 in.)

C112273E01

(b) Using SST and a hammer, install the disc brake dust cover. SST 09223-56010 NOTICE: • Uniformly press in the disc brake dust cover while sliding SST slightly. • Surely press in the disc brake dust cover until the pressing-in base.

SST

AH C116903E01

(c) Using a chisel, fix the 3 points on the circumference. NOTICE: Securely fold each end into the engagement grooves.

C121846


AXLE – FRONT AXLE HUB

AH–9

3.

INSTALL FRONT AXLE HUB SUB-ASSEMBLY (a) Using SST and a press, press the axle hub into the steering knuckle. SST 09608-32010, 09950-60010 (09951-00500), 09950-70010 (09951-07100)

4.

INSTALL FRONT AXLE HUB HOLE SNAP RING (a) Using snap ring pliers, install a new hole snap ring, as shown in the illustration. NOTICE: • Do not overlap the end of the snap ring and the installation hole in the speed sensor on the knuckle side. • Do not damage the magnetic rotor surface of the bearing when installing the snap ring.

SST

SST C107983E01

Hole C112581E01

INSTALLATION 1.

C125277

INSTALL FRONT AXLE ASSEMBLY (a) Install the front axle assembly onto the shock absorber. (b) Install the 2 bolts and 2 nuts. Torque: 164 N*m (1,672 kgf*cm, 121 ft.*lbf) HINT: Keep the nut from rotating while turning the bolt. (c) Push the front axle out of the vehicle to align the spline of the drive shaft with the front axle and insert the front axle. NOTICE: • Do not push the front axle further out of the vehicle than is necessary. • Do not damage the outboard joint boot. • Check for any foreign matter on the speed sensor rotor and insertion part. • Do not damage the speed sensor rotor.

2.

INSTALL FRONT LOWER SUSPENSION ARM (See page DS-14)

3.

INSTALL FRONT STABILIZER LINK ASSEMBLY (See page DS-14)

4.

INSTALL TIE ROD END SUB-ASSEMBLY (See page DS-15)

5.

INSTALL FRONT DISC (See page BR-52)

AH


AH–10

AXLE – FRONT AXLE HUB

C085618

6.

INSTALL FRONT DISC BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (a) Install the disc brake caliper onto the steering knuckle. Torque: 107 N*m (1,089 kgf*cm, 79 ft.*lbf)

7.

INSTALL FRONT SPEED SENSOR (w/ ABS) (See page DS-15)

8.

INSTALL FRONT AXLE HUB NUT (See page DS-15)

9.

INSPECT FRONT AXLE HUB BEARING (See page AH-1)

10. INSTALL FRONT WHEEL Torque: 103 N*m (1,050 kgf*cm, 76 ft.*lbf) 11. INSPECT AND ADJUST FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT (See page SP-2) 12. CONNECT CABLE TO NEGATIVE BATTERY TERMINAL Torque: 5.4 N*m (55 kgf*cm, 48 in.*lbf) 13. CHECK ABS SENSOR SIGNAL (w/ ABS) (See page BC-14)

AH


AXLE – REAR AXLE HUB BOLT

AH–11

REAR AXLE HUB BOLT SUSPENSION & AXLE AXLE

COMPONENTS

x4

REAR AXLE HUB BOLT

AH REAR BRAKE DRUM SUB-ASSEMBLY

C121817E01


AH–12

AXLE – REAR AXLE HUB BOLT

REMOVAL 1.

REMOVE REAR WHEEL

2.

REMOVE REAR BRAKE DRUM SUB-ASSEMBLY (See page BR-60)

3.

REMOVE REAR AXLE HUB BOLT (a) Using SST and a screwdriver or the equivalent, remove the hub bolt. SST 09628-10011

C121818

INSTALLATION 1.

INSTALL REAR AXLE HUB BOLT (a) Install the washer and the nut onto a new hub bolt as shown in the illustration. (b) Using a screwdriver or the equivalent to hold the hub and bearing, install the hub bolt by tightening the nut.

2.

INSTALL REAR BRAKE DRUM SUB-ASSEMBLY

3.

ADJUST REAR DRUM BRAKE SHOE CLEARANCE (See page BR-67)

4.

INSTALL REAR WHEEL Torque: 103 N*m (1,050 kgf*cm, 76 ft.*lbf)

Washer

C121819E01

AH


AXLE – REAR AXLE HUB AND BEARING

AH–13

REAR AXLE HUB AND BEARING SUSPENSION & AXLE AXLE

COMPONENTS

REAR AXLE HUB AND BEARING ASSEMBLY SKID CONTROL SENSOR WIRE

x4 90 (918, 67)

w/o ABS: REAR BRAKE DRUM SUB-ASSEMBLY

AH REAR AXLE HUB AND BEARING ASSEMBLY

N*m (kgf*cm, ft*lbf) : Specified torque C121820E01


AH–14

AXLE – REAR AXLE HUB AND BEARING

REMOVAL 1.

DISCONNECT CABLE FROM NEGATIVE BATTERY TERMINAL

2.

REMOVE REAR WHEEL

3.

REMOVE REAR BRAKE DRUM SUB-ASSEMBLY (See page BR-60)

4.

DISCONNECT SKID CONTROL SENSOR WIRE (w/ ABS) (a) Using a screwdriver, remove the claw of the connector lock portion and disconnect the skid control sensor wire connector. NOTICE: Do not remove the connector cover from the connector because the skid control sensor wire may be damaged.

5.

REMOVE REAR AXLE HUB AND BEARING ASSEMBLY (a) Remove the 4 bolts and remove the axle hub and bearing from the axle beam. NOTICE: Suspend the backing plate with a piece of rope.

C125279

C121821

INSTALLATION

AH

1.

INSTALL REAR AXLE HUB AND BEARING ASSEMBLY (a) Install the axle hub and bearing onto the axle beam with the 4 bolts. Torque: 90 N*m (918 kgf*cm, 67 ft.*lbf)

2.

INSPECT REAR AXLE HUB BEARING (See page AH2)

3.

CONNECT SKID CONTROL SENSOR WIRE (w/ ABS) (a) Connect the skid control sensor wire connector.

4.

INSTALL REAR BRAKE DRUM SUB-ASSEMBLY

5.

ADJUST REAR DRUM BRAKE SHOE CLEARANCE (See page BR-67)

6.

INSTALL REAR WHEEL Torque: 103 N*m (1,050 kgf*cm, 76 ft.*lbf)

7.

CONNECT CABLE TO NEGATIVE BATTERY TERMINAL Torque: 5.4 N*m (55 kgf*cm, 48 in.*lbf)

8.

CHECK ABS SENSOR SIGNAL (w/ ABS) (See page BC-14)

C121821

C107565


BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

BC–1

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM PRECAUTION 1. TROUBLESHOOTING PRECAUTION • When there are malfunctions in the contact points of the terminals or installation problems with any parts, removal and installation of the suspected problem parts may return the system to its normal condition, either entirely or temporarily. • In order to determine the location of the malfunction, be sure to check the conditions from the time the malfunction occurred, through data such as DTC and freeze frame data outputs. Record this information before disconnecting any connectors and removing or installing any parts. • Since the anti-lock brake system may be influenced by malfunctions in other systems, be sure to check for DTCs in other systems. • Be sure to remove and install the brake actuator and each sensor with the ignition switch off, unless specified in the inspection procedures. • When removing and installing the brake actuator and each sensor, be sure to check that the normal display is output during a test mode inspection and a DTC output inspection after reinstalling all the parts. • If the DTC of the CAN communication line is output, repair the malfunction in the communication line and then troubleshoot the anti-lock brake system. • Since the CAN communication line has its own length and route, it cannot be repaired temporarily with a bypass wire, etc.

BC


BC–2

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

PARTS LOCATION HATCHBACK:

SKID CONTROL SENSOR WIRE RH

SKID CONTROL SENSOR WIRE LH

SKID CONTROL SENSOR RH SKID CONTROL SENSOR ROTOR RH MASTER CYLINDER RESERVOIR -BRAKE FLUID LEVEL WARNING SWITCH

FRONT SPEED SENSOR RH

SKID CONTROL SENSOR ROTOR LH SKID CONTROL SENSOR LH FRONT SPEED SENSOR LH FRONT SPEED SENSOR ROTOR RH

FRONT SPEED SENSOR ROTOR LH BRAKE ACTUATOR

BC

-SKID CONTROL ECU

ENGINE ROOM R/B -ABS1/VSC1 FUSE -ABS2/VSC2 FUSE -AM2 FUSE

C117856E04


BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

BC–3

HATCHBACK:

COMBINATION METER - ABS WARNING LIGHT - BRAKE WARNING LIGHT

STOP LIGHT SWITCH DLC3 MAIN BODY ECU (DRIVER SIDE J/B) - ECU-IG FUSE - AM1 FUSE PARKING BRAKE SWITCH

BC

C118692E04


BC–4

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

SEDAN:

SKID CONTROL SENSOR WIRE RH SKID CONTROL SENSOR RH SKID CONTROL SENSOR ROTOR RH

SKID CONTROL SENSOR WIRE LH

MASTER CYLINDER RESERVOIR -BRAKE FLUID LEVEL WARNING SWITCH

FRONT SPEED SENSOR RH

SKID CONTROL SENSOR ROTOR LH SKID CONTROL SENSOR LH FRONT SPEED SENSOR LH FRONT SPEED SENSOR ROTOR LH BRAKE ACTUATOR -SKID CONTROL ECU

BC

ENGINE ROOM R/B -ABS1/VSC1 FUSE

FRONT SPEED SENSOR ROTOR RH

-ABS2/VSC2 FUSE -AM2 FUSE

C139617E01


BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

BC–5

SEDAN:

COMBINATION METER -ABS WARNING LIGHT -BRAKE WARNING LIGHT

STOP LIGHT SWITCH DLC3

MAIN BODY ECU (DRIVER SIDE J/B)

PARKING BRAKE SWITCH

BC

-ECU IG FUSE -AM1 FUSE

C139619E01


BC–6

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

SYSTEM DIAGRAM

Brake Actuator

Speed Sensor (with each wheel) Skid Control ECU

Stop Light Switch

BC

Motor Relay

Solenoid Relay

Pump Motor

Solenoid

: CAN Communication System C122525E01


BC–7

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

Neutral Start Switch

ECM TC Switch

Power Steering ECU

TS Switch

Main Body ECU

Parking Brake Switch

ABS Warning Light BRAKE Warning Light

Combination Meter : CAN Communication System C125123E02

BC


BC–8

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION HINT: The skid control ECU forms a single unit with the brake actuator. (a) ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) The ABS helps prevent the wheels from locking when the brakes are applied firmly or on a slippery surface.

Brake Actuator

Pump Motor Each Speed Sensor

Each Wheel Cylinder

Skid Control ECU Solenoid Valve

ABS Warning Light

Combination Meter

: CAN Communication System : Brake Fluid Pressure C115099E02

BC

(1) Operation description The skid control ECU detects wheel lock conditions by receiving vehicle speed signals from each speed sensor, and sends control signals to the pump motor and solenoid valve to prevent the wheels from locking by controlling the brake fluid pressure of each wheel cylinder. The ABS warning light comes on when the ABS system malfunctions.


BC–9

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

(b) EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution) The EBD control utilizes the ABS, realizing the proper brake force distribution between the front and rear wheels in accordance with the driving conditions and vehicle load. In addition, when the brakes are applied while cornering, it also controls the braking forces of the right and left wheels, helping to maintain vehicle stability.

Brake Actuator

Each Speed Sensor

Skid Control ECU

Solenoid Valve

Each Wheel Cylinder

BRAKE Warning Light

Combination Meter

: CAN Communication System : Brake Fluid Pressure C115100E02

(1) Operation description The skid control ECU receives speed signals from each speed sensor to detect the slip conditions of the wheels and sends control signals to the solenoid. The solenoid valve controls the brake fluid pressure of each wheel cylinder and divides the control power properly between the front and rear wheels and the right and left wheels. The BRAKE warning light comes on to indicate malfunctions in the EBD system.

BC


BC–10

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

2.

3.

4.

5. Components

Functions • •

Front speed sensor (Semiconductor speed sensor, magnetic sensor rotor)

• •

• Skid control sensor (Semiconductor speed sensor, magnetic sensor rotor)

BC

ABS with EBD OPERATION (a) Based on the signals received from each of the 4 wheel speed sensors, the skid control ECU calculates the speed and deceleration of each wheel, and checks the wheel slippage conditions. The ECU controls the pressure holding valve and pressure reduction valve in order to adjust the brake fluid pressure of each wheel cylinder in accordance with the slippage conditions. FAIL SAFE FUNCTION (a) When a failure occurs in the ABS system, the ABS warning light comes on and its operation is prohibited. In addition to this, when a failure which disables the EBD operation occurs, the brake warning light comes on and its operation is prohibited. If control is prohibited due to a malfunction during operation, control is disabled gradually to avoid sudden vehicle instability. INITIAL CHECK (a) When the vehicle speed first reaches approximately 4 mph (6 km/h) or more after the ignition switch is turned on, each solenoid valve and the motor of the brake actuator are sequentially activated to perform electrical checks. During the initial check, the operating sound of the solenoid valve and motor can be heard from the engine compartment, but this does not indicate a malfunction. FUNCTION OF COMPONENTS

Detects the wheel speed and sends a signal to the skid control ECU. The front speed sensor (semiconductor speed sensor) with the integrated bearing and the sensor rotor (magnetic sensor rotor) are installed on the front axle hub. The magnetic sensor rotor is equipped with north and south poles (48 of each), which are evenly spaced around its circumference. The magnetic field changes as the magnetic sensor rotor rotates. The semiconductor speed sensor detects the change and outputs it as the vehicle speed pulse. The skid control sensor (semiconductor speed sensor) and the sensor rotor (magnetic sensor rotor) are installed on the rear axle carrier. The skid control sensor has the same structure and functions as the front speed sensor.

• •

Processes the signals from the sensors to control the ABS. Sends and receives control signals to and from the ECM via CAN communication.

Consists of the master cylinder cut solenoid valve, holding solenoid valve, pump motor, and reservoir, and adjusts the brake fluid pressure applied to each wheel cylinder. Houses the skid control ECU.

Solenoid relay

• •

Supplies power to each solenoid. Housed in the skid control ECU.

ABS warning light

• •

Illuminates to inform the driver that a malfunction in the ABS has occurred. Blinks to indicate DTCs that relate to the ABS.

Illuminates to inform the driver that the parking brake is ON when the system is normal, and when the brake fluid has decreased. Illuminates to inform the driver that a malfunction in the EBD has occurred.

Skid control ECU (Housed in brake actuator)

Brake actuator

BRAKE warning light •


BC–11

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING HINT: *: Use the intelligent tester.

1

VEHICLE BROUGHT TO WORKSHOP

NEXT

2

CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS

NEXT

3

DTCS AND FREEZE FRAME DATA CHECK AND CLEARANCE*

NEXT

4

PROBLEM SYMPTOM CONFIRMATION

Result Result

Proceed to

Symptom does not occur

A

Symptom occurs

B

B

SYMPTOM SIMULATION

A

5

CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM CHECK* (a) Check for the output DTC relating to the CAN communication system. HINT: The ECU of this system is connected to the CAN communication system. Therefore, before starting troubleshooting, be sure to check that there is no trouble in the CAN communication system.

Result Result

Proceed to

CAN communication system DTC not output

A

CAN communication system DTC output

B

B A

CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM

BC


BC–12

6

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

DTC CHECK* HINT: See page BC-25.

Result Result

Proceed to

DTC output

A

DTC not output

B

B

PROBLEM SYMPTOM TABLE

A

7

DTC CHART HINT: See page BC-31.

NEXT

8

CIRCUIT INSPECTION HINT: When 2 or more DTCs are detected, perform circuit inspections one by one until the problem is identified.

NEXT

9

PROBLEM IDENTIFICATION

NEXT

10

REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT

NEXT

BC

11 NEXT END

CONFIRMATION TEST


BC–13

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS 1.

CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS HINT: A momentary interruption (open circuit) in the connectors and/or wire harness between the sensors and ECUs can be detected by using the ECU data list function of an intelligent tester. (a) Turn the ignition switch off and connect the intelligent tester to the DLC3. (b) Turn the ignition switch on.

Intelligent Tester

DLC3 CAN VIM C115104E05

Harness Signal: OK Momentary interruption

1 sec. 1 sec. 1 sec.

Intelligent Tester Display: ERROR NORMAL

(c) Follow the prompts on the intelligent tester to display the DATA LIST and select areas where a momentary interruption should be monitored. HINT: • A momentary interruption (open circuit) cannot be detected for 3 seconds after the ignition switch is turned on (initial check). • If the status remains on the ERROR display, check for continuity between the ECU and the sensors, or between ECUs. • The ERROR display on the intelligent tester remains on for 1 second after the harness signal changes from a momentary interruption (open circuit) to normal condition.

C106657E02

Item (Display)

Measurement Item / Range (Display)

Normal Condition

Diagnostic Note

FR SPD OPN

FR speed sensor open detection / ERROR or NORMAL

ERROR: Momentary interruption NORMAL: Normal

-

FL SPD OPN

FL speed sensor open detection / ERROR or NORMAL

ERROR: Momentary interruption NORMAL: Normal

-

RR SPD OPN

RR speed sensor open detection / ERROR or NORMAL

ERROR: Momentary interruption NORMAL: Normal

-

RL SPD OPN

RL speed sensor open detection / ERROR or NORMAL

ERROR: Momentary interruption NORMAL: Normal

-

BC


BC–14

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

(d) While observing the screen, gently jiggle the connector or wire harness between the ECU and sensors, or between ECUs. OK: Display does not change. HINT: The connector and/or wire harness have a momentary interruption (open circuit) if the display changes. Repair or replace the connector and wire harness if either of them is faulty.

F047126

BC


BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

BC–15

TEST MODE PROCEDURE HINT: • By switching the skid control ECU from normal mode to test mode, abnormality detection sensitivity is enhanced and troubleshooting can be conducted efficiently. • Perform a sensor check in test mode after the speed sensor or sensor rotor has been repaired or replaced. • If the ignition switch is turned from on to ACC or off during test mode, DTCs related to the signal check function will be erased. • During test mode, the skid control ECU stores all DTCs related to the signal check function, and the DTCs are erased if normality is confirmed. Any remaining DTCs are those indicating abnormalities that were found. 1. TEST MODE (SIGNAL CHECK) PROCEDURE (USING INTELLIGENT TESTER) (a) Turn the ignition switch off. (b) Check that the steering wheel is in the straightahead position. (c) A/T: Check that the shift lever is in the P position and apply the parking brake. (d) M/T: Check that the shift lever is in neutral and apply the parking brake. Intelligent Tester

DLC3

(e) (f) (g) (h)

Connect the intelligent tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch on. Turn the tester on. Switch the skid control ECU to test mode using the intelligent tester. Select the following menu items: DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD /select vehicle / ABS / SIGNAL CHECK.

(i)

Check that the ABS warning light blinks as shown in the illustration. HINT: If the ABS warning light does not blink, perform relevant troubleshooting procedures. The relevant troubleshooting procedures are described in the sections listed in the table below.

CAN VIM C115104E01

Blinking Pattern in TEST MODE: 0.12 Seconds

0.12 Seconds

ON

Section Title

OFF BR03904E22

See Page

ABS Warning Light does not Come ON

BC-73

TS and CG Terminal Circuit

BC-84

(j)

Start the engine.

BC


BC–16

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

2.

Blinking Pattern in TEST MODE: 0.12 Seconds

0.12 Seconds

ON

OFF BR03904E22

BC

SPEED SENSOR CHECK (USING INTELLIGENT TESTER) (a) Check that the ABS warning light is blinking as shown in the illustration. (b) Check the speed sensor signal. (1) Drive the vehicle straight forward at a speed of 28 mph (45 km/h) or more for several seconds. (2) Check that the ABS warning light goes off. HINT: • The sensor check may not be completed if one or more wheels spin or the steering wheel is turned. • If the speed sensor check is commenced while the steering wheel is turned, the ABS warning light may come on after the low speed check is finished. • The ABS warning light comes on immediately when an abnormality is detected. • When the speed sensor signal is normal, the ABS warning light goes off while the vehicle is driven at 28 mph (45 km/h) or more and blinks in the test mode pattern while stationary. • Do not drive the vehicle at a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) or more after the ABS warning light turns off, because test mode DTCs are set again when the vehicle speed exceeds 50 mph (80km/h).


BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

BC–17

Blinking pattern in speed sensor check:

Vehicle Speed: mph (km/h)

28 (45)

3 (5)

0 (0)

Time Middle Speed Check

Low Speed Check

ABS Warning Light ON OFF

C115115E01

3.

4.

5.

(3) Stop the vehicle. END SENSOR CHECK (USING INTELLIGENT TESTER) (a) When the sensor check is successfully completed, the ABS warning light blinks in the test mode pattern when the vehicle is stopped, and goes off when the vehicle is driven. NOTICE: If the sensor check is not completed, the ABS warning light blinks even while the vehicle is driven and the ABS does not operate. READ SIGNAL CHECK FUNCTION DTCS (USING INTELLIGENT TESTER) (a) Read the DTC(s) by following the instructions on the tester screen. HINT: See the list of DTCs (refer to step 9). TEST MODE (SIGNAL CHECK) PROCEDURE (USING SST CHECK WIRE) (a) Turn the ignition switch off. (b) Check that the steering wheel is in the straightahead position. (c) A/T: Check that the shift lever is in the P position and apply the parking brake. (d) M/T: Check that the shift lever is in neutral and apply the parking brake.

BC


BC–18

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

DLC3:

(e) Using SST, connect terminals TS and CG of the DLC3. SST 09843-18040 (f) Turn the ignition switch on.

CG

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

TS

F100115E01

(g) Check that the ABS warning light blinks as shown in the illustration. HINT: If the ABS warning light does not blink, perform relevant troubleshooting procedures. The relevant troubleshooting procedures are described in the sections listed in the table below.

Blinking Pattern in TEST MODE: 0.12 Seconds

0.12 Seconds

ON

Section Title

OFF BR03904E22

See Page

ABS Warning Light does not Come ON

BC-73

TS and CG Terminal Circuit

BC-84

(h) Start the engine. 6.

Blinking Pattern in TEST MODE: 0.12 Seconds

0.12 Seconds

ON

OFF BR03904E22

BC

SPEED SENSOR CHECK (USING SST CHECK WIRE) (a) Check that the ABS warning light blinks as shown in the illustration. (b) Check the speed sensor signal. (1) Drive the vehicle straight forward at a speed of 28 mph (45km/h) or more for several seconds, and then step on the brake pedal. (2) Check that the ABS warning light goes off. HINT: • The sensor check may not be completed if one or more wheels spin or the steering wheel is turned. • If the speed sensor check is commenced while the steering wheel is turned, the ABS warning light may come on after the low speed check is finished. • The ABS warning light comes on immediately when an abnormality is detected. • When the speed sensor signal is normal, the ABS warning light goes off while the vehicle is driven at 28 mph (45 km/h) or more and blinks in the test mode pattern while stationary. • Do not drive the vehicle at a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) or more after the ABS warning light turns off, because test mode DTCs are set again when the vehicle speed exceeds 50 mph (80km/h).


BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

BC–19

Blinking pattern in speed sensor check:

Vehicle Speed: mph (km/h)

28 (45)

3 (5)

0 (0)

Time Middle Speed Check

Low Speed Check

ABS Warning Light ON OFF

C115115E01

7.

DLC3:

8. CG

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

TC

F100115E02

(3) Stop the vehicle. END SENSOR CHECK (USING SST CHECK WIRE) (a) When the sensor check is successfully completed, the ABS warning light blinks in the test mode pattern when the vehicle is stopped, and goes off when the vehicle is driven. NOTICE: If the sensor check is not completed, the ABS warning light blinks even while the vehicle is driven and the ABS does not operate. READ SIGNAL CHECK FUNCTION DTCS (USING SST CHECK WIRE) (a) Using SST, connect terminals TC and CG of the DLC3. SST 09843-18040 (b) Turn the ignition switch on. (c) Read the number of blinks of the ABS warning light. HINT: • See the list of DTCs (refer to step 9).

BC


BC–20

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

Blinking Pattern in TEST MODE: 0.12 Seconds

0.12 Seconds

ON

9.

• If all the sensors are normal, a normal system code is output (the light comes on for 0.25 seconds at intervals of 0.25 seconds). (d) After the check, disconnect the SST from terminals TC and CG of the DLC3. (e) Turn the ignition switch off. SPEED SENSOR CHECK FUNCTION DTCs

OFF BR03904E22

Code No.

Diagnosis

Trouble Areas

Low output signal of front speed sensor RH

• • • •

Front speed sensor RH Front speed sensor RH circuit Sensor installation Foreign matter on sensor tip or sensor rotor

C1272/72

Low output signal of front speed sensor LH

• • • •

Front speed sensor LH Front speed sensor LH circuit Sensor installation Foreign matter on sensor tip or sensor rotor

C1273/73

Low output signal of rear speed sensor RH

• • •

Skid control sensor RH Skid control sensor RH circuit Sensor installation

C1274/74

Low output signal of rear speed sensor LH

• • •

Skid control sensor LH Skid control sensor LH circuit Sensor installation

C1275/75

Abnormal change in output signal of front speed sensor RH

• • •

Front speed sensor RH Front speed sensor RH circuit Foreign matter on sensor tip or sensor rotor

C1276/76

Abnormal change in output signal of front speed sensor LH

• • •

Front speed sensor LH Front speed sensor LH circuit Foreign matter on sensor tip or sensor rotor

C1277/77

Abnormal change in output signal of rear speed sensor RH

• •

Skid control sensor RH Skid control sensor RH circuit

C1278/78

Abnormal change in output signal of rear speed sensor LH

• •

Skid control sensor LH Skid control sensor LH circuit

C1271/71

HINT: • The DTCs in this table are only output in test mode. • Detection of DTCs from C1271/71 to C1274/74 is completed before the vehicle speed reaches 3 mph (5 km/h). • Detection of DTCs from C1275/75 to C1278/78 is completed several seconds after the vehicle speed exceeds 28 mph (45 km/h). • C1271/71 - C1274/74: Speed output from only one wheel is extremely low despite other wheel speed outputs reaching 3 mph (5 km/h). • C1275/75 - C1278/78: Abnormal speed sensor output frequency is as shown in the illustration.

BC Example: Normal:

Abnormal:

F100272E01


BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

BC–21

PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE If no DTCs are displayed during the DTC check but the problem still occurs, check the circuits for each problem symptom in the order given in the table below and proceed to the relevant troubleshooting page. NOTICE: When replacing the brake actuator or sensor, turn the ignition switch off. ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM Symptom

ABS and/or EBD does not operate

ABS and/or EBD does not operate efficiently

Sensor signal check cannot be done

DTC check cannot be done

ABS warning light remains on ABS warning light does not come on BRAKE warning light remains on BRAKE warning light does not come on

Suspected area

See page

1. Check DTC again and make sure that normal system code displayed.

BC-25

2. IG power source circuit

BC-59

3. Front speed sensor circuit

BC-37

4. Skid control sensor circuit

BC-44

5. Check brake actuator using intelligent tester. (Check brake actuator operation using active test function.) If abnormal, check hydraulic circuit for leakage.

BC-34

6. If symptoms still occur even after above circuits in suspected areas inspected and proved to be normal, replace brake actuator (skid control ECU).

BC-89

1. Check DTC again and make sure that normal system code displayed.

BC-25

2. Front speed sensor circuit

BC-37

3. Skid control circuit

BC-44

4. Stop light switch circuit

BC-64

5. Check brake actuator using intelligent tester. (Check brake actuator operation using active test function.) If abnormal, check hydraulic circuit for leakage.

BC-34

6. If symptoms still occur even after above circuits in suspected areas inspected and proved to be normal, replace brake actuator (skid control ECU).

BC-89

1. TS and CG terminal circuit

BC-84

2. Brake actuator (skid control ECU)

BC-89

1. Check DTC again and make sure that normal system code displayed.

BC-25

2. TC and CG terminal circuit

BC-81

3. If symptoms still occur even after above circuits in suspected areas inspected and proved to be normal, replace brake actuator (skid control ECU).

BC-89

1. ABS warning light circuit

BC-70

2. Brake actuator (skid control ECU)

BC-89

1. ABS warning light circuit

BC-73

2. Brake actuator (skid control ECU)

BC-89

1. BRAKE waning light circuit

BC-74

2. Brake actuator (skid control ECU)

BC-89

1. BRAKE warning light circuit

BC-79

2. Brake actuator (skid control ECU)

BC-89

BC


BC–22

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

TERMINALS OF ECU 1.

Terminals of ECU

Skid Control ECU: A15

C110609E01

BC

Symbols (Terminals No.)

Terminal Description

+BS (A15-1)

Solenoid valve power supply

GND1 (A15-2)

Skid control ECU ground

CANL (A15-5)

CAN communication line L

CANH (A15-6)

CAN communication line H

FL- (A15-8)

Front LH wheel speed signal input

FL+ (A15-9)

Front LH wheel speed sensor power supply

STP (A15-10)

Stop light switch input

RL+ (A15-11)

Rear LH wheel speed sensor power supply

RL- (A15-12)

Rear LH wheel speed signal input

+BM (A15-23)

Motor relay power supply

GND2 (A15-24)

Actuator pump motor ground

IG1 (A15-25)

ECU power supply

FR- (A15-30)

Front RH wheel speed signal input

FR+ (A15-31)

Front RH wheel speed sensor power supply

RR+ (A15-33)

Rear RH wheel speed sensor power supply

RR- (A15-34)

Rear RH wheel speed signal input


BC–23

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

Main Body ECU (Rear View): 4H

4D

4C

4A

4E

4D 4K

4A

4B

4C 4J

4H 4E 4J

4K 4B

4L

4L

4G

4F

4F

4G

E114510E04

Symbols (Terminals No.)

Terminal Description

PKB (4C-2)

Parking brake switch input

2.

Terminal inspection (a) Disconnect the connector and measure the resistance and voltage on the wire harness side. HINT: The voltage cannot be measured with the connector connected to the skid control ECU as the connector is water resistant.

BC


BC–24

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

Skid Control ECU (harness side connector):

A15











  

    

           

C107496E01

Standard: Symbols

Wiring Color

Terminal Description

Conditions

Specified Conditions

+BS (A15-1) - Body ground

W - Body ground

Solenoid valve power supply

Always

11 to 14 V

GND1 (A15-2) - Body ground

W-B - Body ground

Skid control ECU ground

Always

Below 1 â„Ś

STP (A15-10) - Body ground

G - Body ground

Stop light switch input

Stop light switch ON Brake pedal depressed

8 to 14 V

STP (A15-10) - Body ground

G - Body ground

Stop light switch input

Stop light switch OFF Brake pedal released

Below 1.5 V

+BM (A15-23) - Body ground

B - Body ground

Motor relay power supply

Always

11 to 14 V

GND2 (A15-24) - Body ground

W-B - Body ground

Actuator pump motor ground

Always

Below 1 â„Ś

IG1 (A15-25) - Body ground

B - Body ground

ECU power supply

Ignition switch on

11 to 14 V

Main Body ECU (harness side connector):

4C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

C118700E01

Standard resistance:

BC

Symbols

Wiring Color

Terminal Description

Conditions

Specified Conditions

PKB (4C-2) - Body ground

Y - Body ground

Parking brake switch input

Parking brake switch ON

Below 1 â„Ś

PKB (4C-2) - Body ground

Y - Body ground

Parking brake switch input

Parking brake switch OFF

10 kâ„Ś or higher


BC–25

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM ABS Warning Light: USA:

1.

Canada:

DIAGNOSIS If the skid control ECU detects a malfunction, the ABS and/or BRAKE warning lights come on in accordance with the trouble area, to warn the driver. The table below indicates which lights come on when there are malfunctions in particular functions.

BRAKE Warning Light: USA:

Canada:

C115112E02

Item / Trouble Area

ABS System

EBD System

Skid Control ECU

ABS warning light

{

{

{

Brake warning light

-

{

{

2.

(b) When the ignition switch is turned on, check that the ABS warning light and brake warning light come on and go off in approximately 3 seconds. HINT: If the warning lights do not illuminate, confirm whether the bulbs have burned out, and also check for CAN communication system DTCs, since the skid control ECU and combination meter are connected by the CAN communication line. If the warning light remains on, perform the relevant troubleshooting procedures. The relevant troubleshooting procedures are described in the sections listed in the table below.

ABS Warning Light: USA:

Canada:

BRAKE Warning Light: USA:

{: Light ON, -: Light OFF HINT: • The DTCs can be read by connecting SST (0984318040) between the TC and CG terminals of the DLC3 and observing the blinking pattern of the ABS warning light, or by using an intelligent tester (See page BC-25). • This system has a sensor signal check function (See page BC-14). WARNING LIGHT CHECK (a) Release the parking brake lever. NOTICE: Before releasing the parking brake lever, set chocks to hold the vehicle for safety. HINT: When the parking brake is applied or the brake fluid level is low, the brake warning light comes on.

Canada:

C115112E02

Section Title

See Page

ABS Warning Light Remains ON

BC-70

Brake Warning Light Remains ON

BC-74

BC


BC–26

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

DTC CHECK / CLEAR

Intelligent Tester

DLC3

1.

CAN VIM C115104E01

2.

DLC3:

3. CG

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

TC

BC

F100115E02

DTC CHECK (USING INTELLIGENT TESTER) (a) Check DTCs. (1) Connect the intelligent tester to the DLC3. (2) Turn the ignition switch on. (3) Turn the tester on. (4) Read the DTCs using the intelligent tester. Select the following menu items: DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / select vehicle / ABS / DTC INFO / TROUBLE CODES. DTC CLEAR (USING INTELLIGENT TESTER) (a) Clear the DTCs. (1) Connect the intelligent tester to the DLC3. (2) Turn the ignition switch on. (3) Turn the tester on. (4) Clear the DTCs using the intelligent tester. Select the following menu items: DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / select vehicle / ABS / DTC INFO / CLEAR CODES. DTC CHECK (USING SST CHECK WIRE) (a) Check DTCs. (1) Using SST, connect terminals TC and CG of the DLC3. SST 09843-18040 (2) Turn the ignition switch on. (3) Read 2-digit DTCs indicated by the blinking of the ABS warning light on the combination meter. HINT: • If the ABS warning light does not blink, perform relevant troubleshooting procedures. The relevant troubleshooting procedures are described in the sections listed in the table below. Section Title

See Page

ABS Warning Light does not Come ON

BC-73

TC and CG Terminal Circuit

BC-81


BC–27

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

• As an example, the blinking patterns of the normal system code and DTCs 11 and 21 are shown below. Normal System Code:

Indication of DTCs 11 and 21: 2.5 sec.

2 sec.

0.25 sec.

1.5 sec.

0.25 sec.

4 sec.

0.5 sec. 0.5 sec.

4 sec.

Repeat

ON

ON

OFF

OFF DTC 11

DTC 21 F100113E02

• DTCs are explained in "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART" (See page BC31). (4) After completing the check, disconnect SST from terminals TC and CG of the DLC3, and turn the ignition switch off. HINT: If 2 or more malfunctions are detected at the same time, the lowest numbered DTC is displayed first. DLC3:

4. CG

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

DTC CLEAR (USING SST CHECK WIRE) (a) Clear the DTCs. (1) Using SST, connect terminals TC and CG of the DLC3. SST 09843-18040 (2) Turn the ignition switch on.

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

TC

F100115E02

BR03890

5.

(3) Clear the DTCs stored in the skid control ECU by depressing the brake pedal 8 times or more within 5 seconds. (4) Check that the warning light blinks in the normal system code pattern. (5) Remove SST from the terminals of the DLC3. (6) Turn the ignition switch off. HINT: The DTCs cannot be cleared by removing the battery cable or ECU-IG fuse. END OF DTC CHECK/CLEAR (a) Turn the ignition switch on. (b) Check that the ABS warning light goes off within approximately 3 seconds.

BC


BC–28

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

(c) Turn the ignition switch off.

BC


BC–29

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

FREEZE FRAME DATA 1.

Item (Display)

FREEZE FRAME DATA HINT: • Whenever a DTC is detected or the ABS operates, the skid control ECU stores the current vehicle (sensor) state as freeze frame data. • The skid control ECU stores the number of times (maximum: 31) the ignition switch has been turned from off to on since the last time the ABS was activated. However, if the vehicle was stationary or running at a low speed (4.3 mph [7 km/h] or less), or if a DTC is detected, the skid control ECU stops counting. • Freeze frame data at the time the ABS operates: The skid control ECU stores and updates the data whenever the ABS system operates. When the ECU stores data at the time a DTC is detected, the data stored when the ABS operated is erased. • Freeze frame data at the time a DTC is detected: When the skid control ECU stores data at the time a DTC is detected, no updates are performed until the data is cleared. (a) Connect the intelligent tester to the DLC3. (b) Turn the ignition switch on. (c) Turn the tester on. (d) From the display on the tester, select "FREEZE FRAME DATA".

Measurement Item

Reference Values

FREEZE TIME

Elapsed time since freeze frame data stored

Min.: 0 ms Max.: 500 ms

#IG ON

Number of ignition switch on operations since freeze frame data stored

0 to 31

Stop light switch signal

ON: Stop light switch ON OFF: Stop light switch OFF

Parking brake switch signal

ON: Parking brake switch ON OFF: Parking brake switch OFF

Operated system status

ABS: ABS activated FAIL: Fail safe mode activated SYS: System prohibited NON: No system activated

STOP LAMP SW PARKING BRAKE SW

OPERATED SYSTEM

FORWARD&REA G

Forward and backward G

Min.: -25.11 m/s2 Max.: 24.91 m/s2

FR WHEEL SPD

FR wheel speed

Min.: 0 mph (0 km/h) Max.: 202 mph (326.4 km/h)

FL WHEEL SPD

FL wheel speed

Min.: 0 mph (0 km/h) Max.: 202 mph (326.4 km/h)

RR WHEEL SPD

RR wheel speed

Min.: 0 mph (0 km/h) Max.: 202 mph (326.4 km/h)

RL WHEEL SPD

RL wheel speed

Min.: 0 mph (0 km/h) Max.: 202 mph (326.4 km/h)

Vehicle speed

Min.: 0 mph (0 km/h) Max.: 202 mph (326.4 km/h)

VEHICLE SPD SPD GRADE

Vehicle speed grade

Min.: -25.11 m/s2 Max.: 24.91 m/s2

BC


BC–30

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

FAIL-SAFE CHART 1.

FAIL SAFE OPERATION • If there is a problem with any sensor signals or actuator systems, the skid control ECU prohibits the power supply to the brake actuator. ABS control is prohibited, but EBD control continues as far as possible. If EBD control is impossible, the BRAKE warning light comes on to warn the driver (See page BC-24). • If any system components have malfunctions before starting control, the operation stops immediately. If any system components have malfunctions during control, the control stops gradually so as not to trigger any sudden changes in the vehicle conditions. If it is impossible to control the systems, the warning light comes on to inform the driver of the malfunctions in the systems (See page BC-24). HINT: • If the ABS system malfunctions, the brake system operates normally without the ABS system control. • If the brake actuator malfunctions, a gradual loss of brake performance is expected, and ABS system control is prohibited.

ABS and EBD system

BC

Malfunction Area

Fail-Safe Operation

ABS system

ABS control prohibited

EBD system

ABS and EBD control prohibited


BC–31

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

DATA LIST / ACTIVE TEST 1.

(a) (b) (c) (d)

Intelligent Tester

DLC3

DATA LIST HINT: By referring to the DATA LIST displayed on the intelligent tester, the values and status of parts such as switches, sensors and actuators can be read without removing any parts. Reading the DATA LIST as the first step of troubleshooting is one method of shortening diagnostic time. Connect the intelligent tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch on. Turn the intelligent tester on. Select the following menu items: DIAGNOSIS / OBD / MOBD / select vehicle / ABS / DATA LIST.

CAN VIM C115104E01

Item (Display)

Measurement Item / Range (Display)

Normal Condition

Diagnostic Notes

ABS warning light / ON or OFF

ON: ABS warning light ON OFF: ABS warning light OFF

-

BRAKE warning light / ON or OFF

ON: BRAKE warning light ON OFF: BRAKE warning light OFF

-

Stop light switch / ON or OFF

ON: Brake pedal depressed OFF: Brake pedal released

-

PARKING BRAKE SW

Parking brake switch / ON or OFF

ON: Parking brake applied OFF: Parking brake released

-

DECELERAT SEN

Deceleration sensor reading / min.: -25.11 m/s, max.: 24.91 m/s

Approximately 0+-0.13 while stationary

-

ABS WARN LAMP BRAKE WARN LAMP STOP LAMP SW

FORWARD&REA G

Forward and rearward G

min.: -25.11 m/s2 max.: 24.91 m/s2

-

FR WHEEL SPD

Wheel speed sensor (FR) reading / min.: 0 mph (0 km/h), max.: 202 mph (326 km/h)

Actual wheel speed

Similar to speed indicated on speedometer

FL WHEEL SPD

Wheel speed sensor (FL) reading / min.: 0 mph (0 km/h), max.: 202 mph (326 km/h)

Actual wheel speed

Similar to speed indicated on speedometer

RR WHEEL SPD

Wheel speed sensor (RR) reading / min.: 0 mph (0 km/h), max.: 202 mph (326 km/h)

Actual wheel speed

Similar to speed indicated on speedometer

RL WHEEL SPD

Wheel speed sensor (RL) reading / min.: 0 mph (0 km/h), max.: 202 mph (326 km/h)

Actual wheel speed

Similar to speed indicated on speedometer

VEHICLE SPD

Maximum speed sensor reading / min.: 0 mph (0 km/h), max.: 202 mph (326 km/h)

Actual wheel speed

Similar to speed indicated on speedometer

FR wheel acceleration / min.: -

min.: -200.84 m/s2

25.11 m/s2, max.: 24.91 m/s2

max.: 199.27 m/s2

FL wheel acceleration / min.: -

min.: -200.84 m/s2

25.11 m/s2, max.: 24.91 m/s2

max.: 199.27 m/s2

RR wheel acceleration / min.: -

min.: -200.84 m/s2

25.11 m/s2, max.: 24.91 m/s2

max.: 199.27 m/s2

FR WHEEL ACCEL FL WHEEL ACCEL RR WHEEL ACCEL

-

BC


BC–32

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM Item (Display)

RL WHEEL ACCEL

RL wheel acceleration / min.: 2

25.11 m/s , max.: 24.91 m/s

2

Normal Condition min.: -200.84 m/s2 max.: 199.27 m/s2

Diagnostic Notes -

FR ABS STATUS

FR wheel ABS control status / ON or OFF

ON: During control

-

FL ABS STATUS

FL wheel ABS control status / ON or OFF

ON: During control

-

RR ABS STATUS

RR wheel ABS control status / ON or OFF

ON: During control

-

RL ABS STATUS

RL wheel ABS control status / ON or OFF

ON: During control

-

Solenoid relay / ON or OFF

ON: Solenoid relay ON OFF: Solenoid relay OFF

-

ECB MTR RELAY

ABS Motor relay / ON or OFF

ON: Motor relay ON OFF: Motor relay OFF

-

SFRH (*1)

ABS solenoid (SFRH) / ON or OFF

ON: Operates OFF: Does not operate

-

SFRR (*2)

ABS solenoid (SFRR) / ON or OFF

ON: Operates OFF: Does not operate

-

SFLH (*3)

ABS solenoid (SFLH) / ON or OFF

ON: Operates OFF: Does not operate

-

SFLR (*4)

ABS solenoid (SFLR) / ON or OFF

ON: Operates OFF: Does not operate

-

SRRH (*5)

ABS solenoid (SRRH) / ON or OFF

ON: Operates OFF: Does not operate

-

SRRR (*6)

ABS solenoid (SRRR) / ON or OFF

ON: Operates OFF: Does not operate

-

SRLH (*7)

ABS solenoid (SRLH) / ON or OFF

ON: Operates OFF: Does not operate

-

SRLR (*8)

ABS solenoid (SRLR) / ON or OFF

ON: Operates OFF: Does not operate

-

FR SPD OPN

FR speed sensor open detection / ERROR or NORMAL

ERROR: Momentary interruption NORMAL: Normal

-

FL SPD OPN

FL speed sensor open detection / ERROR or NORMAL

ERROR: Momentary interruption NORMAL: Normal

-

RR SPD OPN

RR speed sensor open detection / ERROR or NORMAL

ERROR: Momentary interruption NORMAL: Normal

-

RL SPD OPN

RL speed sensor open detection / ERROR or NORMAL

ERROR: Momentary interruption NORMAL: Normal

-

#DTC

Number of recorded DTCs / min.: 0, max.: 255

min.: 0 max.: 255

-

SOL RELAY

BC

Measurement Item / Range (Display)

HINT: • *1: SFRH (S: Solenoid, F: Front, R: Right, H: Holding) • *2: SFRR (S: Solenoid, F: Front, R: Right, R: Reduction) • *3: SFLH (S: Solenoid, F: Front, L: Left, H: Holding) • *4: SFLR (S: Solenoid, F: Front, L: Left, R: Reduction) • *5: SRRH (S: Solenoid, R: Rear, R: Right, H: Holding) • *6: SRRR (S: Solenoid, R: Rear, R: Right, R: Reduction)


BC–33

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

2.

DLC3

CAN VIM C115104E01

Item (Display) ABS WARN LAMP BRAKE WARN LAMP SOL RELAY MOTOR RELAY

SRLH (S: Solenoid, R: Rear, L: Left, H: Holding) • *8: SRLR (S: Solenoid, R: Rear, L: Left, R: Reduction) ACTIVE TEST HINT: Performing the ACTIVE TEST using the intelligent tester allows parts such as relays and actuators to be operated without removing any parts. Performing the ACTIVE TEST as the first step of troubleshooting is one method of shortening diagnostic time. It is possible to display the DATA LIST during the ACTIVE TEST. (a) (b) (c) (d)

Intelligent Tester

*7:

Connect the intelligent tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch on. Turn the intelligent tester on. By following the prompts on the tester, perform the ACTIVE TEST. HINT: • The ignition switch must be turned on to proceed to the ACTIVE TEST using the intelligent tester. • The ACTIVE TESTs of the ABS solenoid, ABS motor relay, ABS warning light and BRAKE warning light are available when the vehicle is stopped. • The motors stop automatically after 5 seconds of activation to prevent them from being damaged. When the motors are operated repeatedly, certain intervals are required between operations. • Solenoids stop automatically after 2 seconds of activation to prevent them from being damaged, and can only be operated again after a certain interval. • Do not depress the brake pedal while only the pressure reduction solenoid valves are on. • Do not drive 2 or more solenoids simultaneously except to operate the pressure holding solenoid valves and pressure reduction solenoid valves of the wheels.

Test Details

Diagnostic Notes

Turns ABS warning light ON or OFF

Observe combination meter

Turns BRAKE warning light ON or OFF

Observe combination meter

Turns ABS solenoid relay ON or OFF

-

Turns ABS motor relay ON or OFF

Operation sound of motor can be heard

SRLR

Turns ABS solenoid (SRLR) ON or OFF

Operation sound of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard

SRLH

Turns ABS solenoid (SRLH) ON or OFF

Operation sound of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard

SRRR

Turns ABS solenoid (SRRR) ON or OFF

Operation sound of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard

SRRH

Turns ABS solenoid (SRRH) ON or OFF

Operation sound of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard

BC


BC–34

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM Item (Display)

BC

Test Details

Diagnostic Notes

SFLR

Turns ABS solenoid (SFLR) ON or OFF

Operation sound of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard

SFLH

Turns ABS solenoid (SFLH) ON or OFF

Operation sound of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard

SFRR

Turns ABS solenoid (SFRR) ON or OFF

Operation sound of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard

SFRH

Turns ABS solenoid (SFRH) ON or OFF

Operation sound of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard


BC–35

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART NOTICE: When replacing any parts, turn the ignition switch off. HINT: • If no abnormality is found when inspecting parts, check the skid control ECU and check for poor contact at ground points. • If a DTC is displayed during the DTC check, check the circuit for the DTC listed in the table below. For details of each DTC, refer to the page indicated. • When 2 or more DTCs are detected, perform circuit inspections one by one until the problem is identified. • All DTCs in the table below are detected in accordance with 1 trip detection logic. DTC chart: DTC No.

Detection Item

Trouble Areas

See page

Right Front Wheel Speed Sensor Signal

1. Front speed sensor RH 2. Front speed sensor RH circuit 3. Sensor installation 4. Foreign matter on sensor tip or sensor rotor 5. Brake actuator (skid control ECU)

BC-37

Left Front Wheel Speed Sensor Signal

1. Front speed sensor LH 2. Front speed sensor LH circuit 3. Sensor installation 4. Foreign matter on sensor tip or sensor rotor 5. Brake actuator (skid control ECU)

BC-37

Right Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Signal

1. Skid control sensor RH 2. Skid control sensor RH circuit 3. Sensor installation 4. Brake actuator (skid control ECU)

BC-44

Left Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Signal

1. Skid control sensor LH 2. Skid control sensor LH circuit 3. Sensor installation 4. Brake actuator (skid control ECU)

BC-44

SFR Solenoid Circuit

Brake actuator

BC-51

C0236/22

SFL Solenoid Circuit

Brake actuator

BC-51

C0246/23

SRR Solenoid Circuit

Brake actuator

BC-51

C0256/24

SRL Solenoid Circuit

Brake actuator

BC-51

C0273/13

Open in ABS Motor Relay Circuit

1. ABS1/VSC1 fuse 2. Wire harness (+ BM circuit) 3. Brake actuator (skid control ECU)

BC-54

C0274/14

Short to B+ in ABS Motor Relay Circuit

1. ABS1/VSC1 fuse 2. Wire harness (+ BM circuit) 3. Brake actuator (skid control ECU)

BC-54

C0278/11

Open in ABS Solenoid Relay Circuit

1. ABS2/VSC2 fuse 2. Wire harness (+BS) 3. Brake actuator (skid control ECU)

BC-57

C0279/12

Short to B+ in ABS Solenoid Relay Circuit

1. ABS2/VSC2 fuse 2. Wire harness (+BS) 3. Brake actuator (skid control ECU)

BC-57

C0200/31 (*1)

C0205/32 (*1)

C0210/33 (*1)

C0215/34 (*1)

C0226/21

BC


BC–36

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM DTC No.

Detection Item

Trouble Areas

See page

Foreign Object is Attached on Tip of Front Speed Sensor RH

1. Front speed sensor RH 2. Front speed sensor RH circuit 3. Foreign matter on sensor tip or sensor rotor 4. Brake actuator (skid control ECU)

BC-37

C1236/36

Foreign Object is Attached on Tip of Front Speed Sensor LH

1. Front speed sensor LH 2. Front speed sensor LH circuit 3. Foreign matter on sensor tip or sensor rotor 4. Brake actuator (skid control ECU)

BC-37

C1238/38

Foreign Object is Attached on Tip of Rear Speed Sensor RH

1. Skid control sensor RH 2. Skid control sensor RH circuit 3. Brake actuator (skid control ECU)

BC-44

C1239/39

Foreign Object is Attached on Tip of Rear Speed Sensor LH

1. Skid control sensor LH 2. Skid control sensor LH circuit 3. Brake actuator (skid control ECU)

BC-44

C1241/41

Low Battery Positive Voltage or Abnormally High Battery Positive Voltage

1. Battery 2. Charging system 3. ECU-IG fuse 4. AM1 fuse 5. IG1 relay 6. Brake actuator (skid control ECU)

BC-59

C1249/49

Open in Stop Light Switch Circuit

1. Stop light switch 2. Stop light switch circuit 3. Brake actuator (skid control ECU)

BC-64

Open in Pump Motor Circuit

Brake actuator

BC-68

Control Module Communication Bus OFF

CAN communication system

BC-69

C1235/35

C1251/51 (*1) U0073/94

HINT: *1: Even after the trouble areas are repaired, the ABS warning light will not go off unless the following operations are performed. 1. Drive the vehicle at 12 mph (20 km/h) for 30 seconds or more and check that the ABS warning light goes off. 2. Clear the DTC(s). Test Mode DTC:

BC

DTC No.

Detection Item

Trouble Areas

See page

C1271/71

Low Output Signal of Front Speed Sensor RH (Test Mode DTC)

1. Front speed sensor RH 2. Front speed sensor RH circuit 3. Sensor installation 4. Foreign matter on sensor tip or sensor rotor

BC-37

C1272/72

Low Output Signal of Front Speed Sensor LH (Test Mode DTC)

1. Front speed sensor LH 2. Front speed sensor LH circuit 3. Sensor installation 4. Foreign matter on sensor tip or sensor rotor

BC-37

C1273/73

Low Output Signal of Rear Speed Sensor RH (Test Mode DTC)

1. Skid control sensor RH 2. Skid control sensor RH circuit 3. Sensor installation

BC-44

C1274/74

Low Output Signal of Rear Speed Sensor LH (Test Mode DTC)

1. Skid control sensor LH 2. Skid control sensor LH circuit 3. Sensor installation

BC-44


BC–37

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM DTC No.

Detection Item

Trouble Areas

See page

C1275/75

Abnormal Change in Output Signal of Front Speed Sensor RH (Test Mode DTC)

1. Front speed sensor RH 2. Front speed sensor RH circuit 3. Foreign matter on sensor tip or sensor rotor

BC-37

C1276/76

Abnormal Change in Output Signal of Front Speed Sensor LH (Test Mode DTC)

1. Front speed sensor LH 2. Front speed sensor LH circuit 3. Foreign matter on sensor tip or sensor rotor

BC-37

C1277/77

Abnormal Change in Output Signal of Rear Speed Sensor RH (Test Mode DTC)

1. Skid control sensor RH 2. Skid control sensor RH circuit

BC-44

C1278/78

Abnormal Change in Output Signal of Rear Speed Sensor LH (Test Mode DTC)

1. Skid control sensor LH 2. Skid control sensor LH circuit

BC-44

ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION

Intelligent Tester

DLC3

1.

CONNECT INTELLIGENT TESTER (a) Connect the intelligent tester to the DLC3. (b) Start the engine and allow it to idle. (c) Turn the tester on. (d) Perform the active test using the intelligent tester. Select the following menu items: DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / select vehicle / ABS / ACTIVE TEST.

2.

INSPECT BRAKE ACTUATOR MOTOR (a) With the motor relay ON, check the actuator motor operation sound. (b) Turn the motor relay OFF. (c) Depress the brake pedal and hold it for approximately 15 seconds. Check that the brake pedal cannot be depressed further. (d) With the motor relay ON, check that the pedal does not pulsate. NOTICE: Do not keep the motor relay ON for more than 5 seconds continuously. Allow intervals of at least 20 seconds between consecutive operations. (e) Turn the motor relay OFF and release the brake pedal.

3.

INSPECT BRAKE ACTUATOR SOLENOID (for Front Right Wheel) NOTICE: Never turn ON a solenoid in any manner other than described below. (a) With the brake pedal depressed, perform the following operations. (b) Turn the SFRH and SFRR solenoids ON simultaneously, and check that the pedal cannot be depressed further. NOTICE: Do not keep the motor relay ON for more than 5 seconds continuously. Allow intervals of at least 20 seconds between consecutive operations.

CAN VIM C115104E01

BC


BC–38

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

(c) Turn the SFRH and SFRR solenoids OFF simultaneously, and check that the pedal can be depressed further. (d) Turn the motor relay ON, and check that the pedal can be depressed. NOTICE: Do not keep the motor relay ON for more than 5 seconds continuously. Allow intervals of at least 20 seconds between consecutive operations. (e) Turn the motor relay OFF and release the brake pedal.

BC

4.

INSPECT BRAKE ACTUATOR SOLENOID (for Front Left Wheel) NOTICE: Never turn ON a solenoid in any manner other than described below. (a) With the brake pedal depressed, perform the following operations. (b) Turn the SFLH and SFLR solenoids ON simultaneously, and check that the pedal cannot be depressed further. NOTICE: Do not keep the motor relay ON for more than 5 seconds continuously. Allow intervals of at least 20 seconds between consecutive operations. (c) Turn the SFLH and SFLR solenoids OFF simultaneously, and check that the pedal can be depressed further. (d) Turn the motor relay ON, and check that the pedal can be depressed. NOTICE: Do not keep the motor relay ON for more than 5 seconds continuously. Allow intervals of at least 20 seconds between consecutive operations. (e) Turn the motor relay OFF and release the brake pedal.

5.

INSPECT BRAKE ACTUATOR SOLENOID (for Rear Right Wheel) NOTICE: Never turn ON a solenoid in any manner other than described below. (a) With the brake pedal depressed, perform the following operations. (b) Turn the SRRH and SRRR solenoids ON simultaneously, and check that the pedal cannot be depressed further. NOTICE: Do not keep the motor relay ON for more than 5 seconds continuously. Allow intervals of at least 20 seconds between consecutive operations. (c) Turn the SRRH and SRRR solenoids OFF simultaneously, and check that the pedal can be depressed further.


BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

BC–39

(d) Turn the motor relay ON, and check that the pedal can be depressed. NOTICE: Do not keep the motor relay ON for more than 5 seconds continuously. Allow intervals of at least 20 seconds between consecutive operations. (e) Turn the motor relay OFF and release the brake pedal. 6.

INSPECT BRAKE ACTUATOR SOLENOID (for Rear Left Wheel) NOTICE: Never turn ON a solenoid in any manner other than described below. (a) With the brake pedal depressed, perform the following operations. (b) Turn the SRLH and SRLR solenoids ON simultaneously, and check that the pedal cannot be depressed further. NOTICE: Do not keep the motor relay ON for more than 5 seconds continuously. Allow intervals of at least 20 seconds between consecutive operations. (c) Turn the SRLH and SRLR solenoids OFF simultaneously, and check that the pedal can be depressed further. (d) Turn the motor relay ON, and check that the pedal can be depressed. NOTICE: Do not keep the motor relay ON for more than 5 seconds continuously. Allow intervals of at least 20 seconds between consecutive operations. (e) Turn the motor relay OFF and release the brake pedal.

BC


BC–40

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

DTC

C0200/31 Right Front Wheel Speed Sensor Signal

DTC

C0205/32 Left Front Wheel Speed Sensor Signal

DTC

C1235/35

Foreign Object is Attached on Tip of Front Speed Sensor RH

DTC

C1236/36

Foreign Object is Attached on Tip of Front Speed Sensor LH

DTC

C1271/71

Low Output Signal of Front Speed Sensor RH (Test Mode DTC)

DTC

C1272/72

Low Output Signal of Front Speed Sensor LH (Test Mode DTC)

DTC

C1275/75

Abnormal Change in Output Signal of Front Speed Sensor RH (Test Mode DTC)

DTC

C1276/76

Abnormal Change in Output Signal of Front Speed Sensor LH (Test Mode DTC)

DESCRIPTION The speed sensors detect the wheel speeds and send appropriate signals to the skid control ECU. Speed sensor rotors have rows of alternating N and S magnetic poles, and their magnetic fields change as the rotors turn. The speed sensors detect those magnetic changes and send pulse signals to the skid control ECU. The ECU monitors the wheel speeds through these pulse signals to control the ABS control system.

BC


BC–41

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

Front Speed Sensor:

Skid Control Sensor:

Speed Sensor

Speed Sensor Sensor Rotor Sensor Rotor

14 mA 7 mA Low Speed

High Speed C115116E03

DTC No.

DTC Detecting Conditions

C0200/31 C0205/32

When any of following conditions detected: 1. At vehicle speed of 6 mph (10 km/h) or more, open or short in sensor signal circuit continues for 1 second or more. 2. Momentary interruption of sensor signal from abnormal wheel occurs 255 times or more. 3. Open in speed sensor signal circuit continues for 0.5 seconds or more. 4. With IG1 terminal voltage 9.5 V or more, sensor power supply voltage decreases for 0.5 seconds or more. 5. When vehicle driven at speed of more than 6 mph (10 km/h), speed of one wheel below one-seventh of other wheel speeds for 15 seconds or more.

• • • • •

Front speed sensor Front speed sensor circuit Sensor installation Foreign matter on sensor tip or sensor rotor Brake actuator (skid control ECU)

C1235/35 C1236/36

When either of following conditions detected: 1. At vehicle speed of 12 mph (20 km/h) or more, noise occurs 75 times or more in sensor signal from abnormal wheel within 5 seconds. 2. At vehicle speed of 6 mph (10 km/h) or more, noise input once per rotor rotation for 15 seconds or more.

• • • •

Front speed sensor Front speed sensor circuit Foreign matter on sensor tip or sensor rotor Brake actuator (skid control ECU)

Detected only during test mode.

• • • •

Front speed sensor Front speed sensor circuit Sensor installation Foreign matter on sensor tip or sensor rotor

Detected only during test mode.

• • •

Front speed sensor Front speed sensor circuit Foreign matter on sensor tip or sensor rotor

C1271/71 C1272/72

C1275/75 C1276/76

Trouble Areas

HINT: • DTCs C0200/31 and C1235/35 relate to the front speed sensor RH. • DTCs C0205/32 and C1236/36 relate to the front speed sensor LH.

BC


BC–42

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

WIRING DIAGRAM

Skid Control ECU

FL+

Front Speed Sensor LH

FL-

FR+

Front Speed Sensor RH

FR-

C117849E05

INSPECTION PROCEDURE NOTICE: Check the speed sensor signal in test mode after cleaning or replacement (See page BC-14).

1

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (MOMENTARY INTERRUPTION) (a) (b) (c) (d)

Intelligent Tester

DLC3

CAN VIM

Connect the intelligent tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch on. Turn the tester on. Using the intelligent tester, check for any momentary interruption in the wire harness and connector of the speed sensor. Select the following menu items: DIAGNOSIS / OBD/ MOBD / select vehicle / ABS / DATA LIST.

C115104E01

BC

DATA LIST: ABS Item (Display)

Measurement Item / Range (Display)

Normal Condition

FR SPD OPN

FR speed sensor open detection / ERROR or NORMAL

ERROR: Momentary interruption NORMAL: Normal

FL SPD OPN

FL speed sensor open detection / ERROR or NORMAL

ERROR: Momentary interruption NORMAL: Normal

OK: There are no momentary interruptions. HINT: Perform the above inspection before removing the sensor and connector.


BC–43

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

NG

REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS OR CONNECTOR

OK

2

READ VALUE OF DATA LIST (FRONT SPEED SENSOR) (a) (b) (c) (d)

Connect the intelligent tester to the DLC3. Start the engine and drive the vehicle. Turn the tester on. Select the following menu items: DIAGNOSIS / OBD/ MOBD / select vehicle / ABS / DATA LIST. (e) Select the item "FR (FL) WHEEL SPD" in the DATA LIST and read the value displayed on the intelligent tester. DATA LIST: ABS Item (Display)

Measurement Item / Range (Display)

FR WHEEL SPD

Wheel speed sensor (FR) reading : min.: 0 mph (0 km/h), max.: 202 mph (326 km/h)

Similar to speed indicated on speedometer

FL WHEEL SPD

Wheel speed sensor (FL) reading : min.: 0 mph (0 km/h), max.: 202 mph (326 km/h)

Similar to speed indicated on speedometer

(f)

Normal Condition

Check that there is no significant difference between the speed value displayed on the intelligent tester and the speed value displayed on the speedometer when driving the vehicle. OK: There is no significant difference in the displayed speed values. HINT: There is a tolerance of +- 10% in the speedometer indication.

NG

Go to step 5

OK

3

PERFORM TEST MODE INSPECTION (SIGNAL CHECK) (a) Perform a TEST MODE inspection and check for DTCs (See page BC-14). OK: No DTC output. NG

REPLACE FRONT SPEED SENSOR

OK

4

RECONFIRM DTC (a) Clear the DTC(s) (See page BC-25). (b) Start the engine. (c) Drive the vehicle at a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h) or more for at least 60 seconds. (d) Check if the same DTC(s) is output (See page BC-25).

BC


BC–44

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

Result Result

Proceed to

DTC not output

A

DTC output

B

B

Go to step 11

A END

5

CHECK FRONT SPEED SENSOR INSTALLATION (a) Check that the speed sensor installation bolt is tightened properly. OK: The installation bolt is tightened properly. Torque: 8.5 N*m (87 kgf*cm, 75 in.*lbf) NG

TIGHTEN BOLT PROPERLY

OK

6

CHECK FRONT SPEED SENSOR (a) Visually check the speed sensor for deformation and damage. OK: No deformation or damage. No gap between the sensor and front steering knuckle. NG OK

NG

REPLACE FRONT SPEED SENSOR

BR03795E09

OK

BC

7

CHECK SPEED SENSOR TIP (a) Remove the speed sensor (See page BC-95). (b) Check the sensor tip. OK: No scratches or foreign matter on the sensor tip. NG

OK

CLEAN OR REPLACE SPEED SENSOR


BC–45

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

8

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (SKID CONTROL ECU - FRONT SPEED SENSOR)

Skid Control ECU (harness side connector): FL-

FL+

A15

3

1

2

23

24

4 13

25

5

6

7

14 15 16 26 27 28

8

9

10 11 12

17 18 19

32 33 34

FR+

FR-

Front Speed Sensor (harness side connector): *1 A11

1

FL-

*1: LH *2: RH

*2 A7

2

FL+

1

Tester Connection

Specified Condition

A15-9 (FL+) - A11-2 (FL+)

Below 1 Ω

A15-8 (FL-) - A11-1 (FL-)

Below 1 Ω

Standard resistance (RH)

20 21 22

29 30 31

(a) Disconnect the skid control ECU connector. (b) Disconnect the front speed sensor connector. (c) Measure the resistance. Standard resistance (LH)

NG

Tester Connection

Specified Condition

A15-31 (FR+) - A7-2 (FR+)

Below 1 Ω

A15-30 (FR-) - A7-1 (FR-)

Below 1 Ω

REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS OR CONNECTOR

2

FR-

FR+

C117857E03

OK

9

INSPECT FRONT SPEED SENSOR (INPUT VOLTAGE)

Front Speed Sensor (harness side connecor):

*1: LH *2: RH

(a) Disconnect the speed sensor connector. (b) Turn the ignition switch on. (c) Measure the voltage. Standard voltage Tester Connection

*1 A11

*2 1

2

A7

1

FL+

A11-2 (FL+) - Body ground

5.7 to 17.3 V

A7-2 (FR+) - Body ground

5.7 to 17.3 V

2

FR+ C129353E01

Specified Condition

NG

REPLACE BRAKE ACTUATOR

OK

10

BC RECONFIRM DTC (a) Clear the DTC(s) (See page BC-25). (b) Start the engine. (c) Drive the vehicle at a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h) or more for at least 60 seconds. (d) Check if the same DTC(s) is output (See page BC-25).

Result Result

Proceed to

DTC output

A


BC–46

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM Result

Proceed to

DTC not output

B

B

END

A

11

REPLACE FRONT SPEED SENSOR (a) Replace the front speed sensor (See page BC-95).

NEXT

12

RECONFIRM DTC (a) Clear the DTC(s) (See page BC-25). (b) Start the engine. (c) Drive the vehicle at a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h) or more for at least 60 seconds. (d) Check if the same DTC(s) is output (See page BC-25).

Result Result

Proceed to

DTC output

A

DTC not output

B

B A REPLACE BRAKE ACTUATOR

BC

END


BC–47

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

DTC

C0210/33 Right Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Signal

DTC

C0215/34 Left Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Signal

DTC

C1238/38

Foreign Object is Attached on Tip of Rear Speed Sensor RH

DTC

C1239/39

Foreign Object is Attached on Tip of Rear Speed Sensor LH

DTC

C1273/73

Low Output Signal of Rear Speed Sensor RH (Test Mode DTC)

DTC

C1274/74

Low Output Signal of Rear Speed Sensor LH (Test Mode DTC)

DTC

C1277/77

Abnormal Change in Output Signal of Rear Speed Sensor RH (Test Mode DTC)

DTC

C1278/78

Abnormal Change in Output Signal of Rear Speed Sensor LH (Test Mode DTC)

DESCRIPTION Refer to DTC C0200/31 (See page BC-37). DTC No.

DTC Detecting Conditions

Trouble Areas

C0210/33 C0215/34

When any of following conditions detected: 1. At vehicle speed of 6 mph (10 km/h) or more, open or short in sensor signal circuit continues for 1 second or more. 2. Momentary interruption of sensor signal from abnormal wheel occurs 255 times or more. 3. Open in speed sensor signal circuit continues for 0.5 seconds or more. 4. With IG1 terminal voltage 9.5 V or more, sensor power supply voltage decreases for 0.5 seconds or more. 5. When vehicle driven at speed of more than 6 mph (10 km/h), one of wheel speeds below one-seventh of other wheel speeds for 15 seconds or more.

• • • •

C1238/38 C1239/39

When either of following conditions detected: 1. At vehicle speed of 12 mph (20 km/h) or more, noise occurs 75 times or more in sensor signal from abnormal wheel in 5 seconds. 2. At vehicle speed of 6 mph (10 km/h) or more, noise input once per rotor rotation for 15 seconds or more.

• • •

Skid control sensor Skid control sensor circuit Brake actuator (skid control ECU)

C1273/73 C1274/74

Detected only during test mode.

• • •

Skid control sensor Skid control sensor circuit Sensor installation

C1277/77 C1278/78

Detected only during test mode.

• •

Skid control sensor Skid control sensor circuit

Skid control sensor Skid control sensor circuit Sensor installation Brake actuator (skid control ECU)

BC


BC–48

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

HINT: • DTC C0210/33 and C1238/38 relate to the skid control sensor RH. • DTC C0215/34 and C1239/39 relate to the skid control sensor LH.

WIRING DIAGRAM

Skid Control ECU

RL+

Skid Control Sensor LH

RL-

RR+

Skid Control Sensor RH

RR-

C117849E04

INSPECTION PROCEDURE NOTICE: Check the speed sensor signal in test mode after cleaning or replacement (See page BC-14).

1

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (MOMENTARY INTERRUPTION) (a) (b) (c) (d)

Intelligent Tester

BC

DLC3

Connect the intelligent tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch on. Turn the tester on. Using the intelligent tester, check for any momentary interruptions in the wire harness of the speed sensor. Select the following menu items: DIAGNOSIS / OBD/ MOBD / select vehicle / ABS / DATA LIST.

CAN VIM C115104E01

DATA LIST: ABS Item (Display)

Measurement Item / Range (Display)

Normal Condition

RR SPD OPN

RR speed sensor open detection / ERROR or NORMAL

ERROR: Momentary interruption NORMAL: Normal

RL SPD OPN

RL speed sensor open detection / ERROR or NORMAL

ERROR: Momentary interruption NORMAL: Normal

OK: There are no momentary interruptions.


BC–49

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

HINT: Perform this inspection before removing the sensor and connector. NG

REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS OR CONNECTOR

OK

2

READ VALUE OF DATA LIST (SKID CONTROL SENSOR) (a) (b) (c) (d)

Connect the intelligent tester to the DLC3. Start the engine and drive the vehicle. Turn the tester on. Select the following menu items: DIAGNOSIS / OBD/ MOBD / select vehicle / ABS / DATA LIST. (e) Select the item "RR (RL) WHEEL SPD" in the DATA LIST and read the value displayed on the intelligent tester. DATA LIST: ABS Item (Display)

Measurement Item / Range (Display)

RR WHEEL SPD

Wheel speed sensor (RR) reading : min.: 0 mph (0 km/h), max.: 202 mph (326 km/h)

Similar to speed indicated on speedometer

RL WHEEL SPD

Wheel speed sensor (RL) reading : min.: 0 mph (0 km/h), max.: 202 mph (326 km/h)

Similar to speed indicated on speedometer

(f)

Normal Condition

Check that there is no significant difference between the speed value displayed on the intelligent tester and the speed value displayed on the speedometer when driving the vehicle. OK: There is no significant difference in the displayed speed values. HINT: There is a tolerance of +- 10% in the speedometer indication.

NG

Go to step 5

OK

3

PERFORM TEST MODE INSPECTION (SIGNAL CHECK) (a) Perform a TEST MODE inspection and check for DTCs (See page BC-14). OK: No DTCs output. NG

OK

REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS OR CONNECTOR

BC


BC–50

4

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

RECONFIRM DTC (a) Clear the DTC(s) (See page BC-25). (b) Start the engine. (c) Drive the vehicle at a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h) or more for at least 60 seconds. (d) Check if the same DTC(s) is output (See page BC-25).

Result Result

Proceed to

DTC not output

A

DTC output

B

B

Go to step 10

A END

5

CHECK SKID CONTROL SENSOR OK

(a) Visually check the skid control sensor for deformation and damage. OK: No deformation or damage. No gap between the sensor and rear axle carrier.

NG

NG

C118693E01

OK

BC

REPLACE SKID CONTROL SENSOR


BC–51

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

6

INSPECT SKID CONTROL SENSOR WIRE (a) Disconnect the skid control sensor wire. (b) Measure the resistance. Standard resistance (LH)

Skid Control Sensor Wire:

Sensor Side Connector

Vehicle Side Connector

1 2

1

2

Tester Connection

Specified Condition

a1-1 - aJ1-1

Below 1 Ω

a1-1 - aJ1-2

10 kΩ or higher

a1-1 - Body ground

10 kΩ or higher

a1-2 - aJ1-1

10 kΩ or higher

a1-2 - aJ1-2

Below 1 Ω

a1-2 - Body ground

10 kΩ or higher

Standard resistance (RH) a1

Z1

aJ1

Tester Connection

ZJ1 C129355E01

NG

Specified Condition

Z1-1 - ZJ1-1

Below 1 Ω

Z1-1 - ZJ1-2

10 kΩ or higher

Z1-1 - Body ground

10 kΩ or higher

Z1-2 - ZJ1-1

10 kΩ or higher

Z1-2 - ZJ1-2

Below 1 Ω

Z1-2 - Body ground

10 kΩ or higher

REPLACE SKID CONTROL SENSOR WIRE

OK

7

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (SKID CONTROL ECU - REAR SPEED SENSOR) (a) Disconnect the skid control ECU connector. (b) Disconnect the skid control sensor connector. (c) Measure the resistance. Standard resistance (LH)

Skid Control ECU (harness side connector): RL+ A15

RL-

1

2

23

24

3

4 13

25

5

6

7

14 15 16 26 27 28

8

9

Skid Control Sensor (sensor side connector):

*1 RL-

RR+

*2 RL+

A15-12 (RL-) - a1-1 (RL-)

Below 1 Ω

Standard resistance (RH)

20 21 22

RR-

Z1  

Below 1 Ω

32 33 34

*1: LH *2: RH a1

Specified Condition

10 11 12

17 18 19 29 30 31

Tester Connection A15-11 (RL+) - a1-2 (RL+)

 

RR-

RR+ C129356E01

NG

Tester Connection

Specified Condition

A15-33 (RR+) - Z1-2 (RR+)

Below 1 Ω

A15-34 (RR-) - Z1-1 (RR-)

Below 1 Ω

REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS OR CONNECTOR

BC


BC–52

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

OK

8

CHECK SKID CONTROL SENSOR (INPUT VOLTAGE)

Skid Control Sensor Wire (sensor side connector): *1: LH *2: RH

(a) Disconnect the skid control sensor connector. (b) Turn the ignition switch on. (c) Measure the voltage. Standard voltage Tester Connection

*1 a1

*2 Z1

 

 

RL+

RR+ C129354E01

NG

Specified Condition

a1-2 (RL+) - Body ground

5.7 to 17.3 V

Z1-2 (RR+) - Body ground

5.7 to 17.3 V

REPLACE BRAKE ACTUATOR

OK

9

RECONFIRM DTC (a) Clear the DTC(s) (See page BC-25). (b) Start the engine. (c) Drive the vehicle at a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h) or more for at least 60 seconds. (d) Check if the same DTC(s) is output (See page BC-25).

Result Result

Proceed to

DTC output

A

DTC not output

B

B

END

A

10

REPLACE SKID CONTROL SENSOR (a) Replace the rear speed sensor.

NEXT

BC

11

RECONFIRM DTC (a) Clear the DTC(s) (See page BC-25). (b) Start the engine. (c) Drive the vehicle at a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h) or more for at least 60 seconds. (d) Check if the same DTC(s) is output (See page BC-25).

Result Result

Proceed to

DTC output

A

DTC not output

B


BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

B

BC–53

END

A REPLACE BRAKE ACTUATOR

BC


BC–54

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

DTC

C0226/21 SFR Solenoid Circuit

DTC

C0236/22 SFL Solenoid Circuit

DTC

C0246/23 SRR Solenoid Circuit

DTC

C0256/24 SRL Solenoid Circuit

DESCRIPTION This solenoid is turned on in accordance with signals from the skid control ECU and controls the pressure on the wheel cylinders to control the braking force. DTC No. C0226/21 C0236/22 C0246/23 C0256/24

DTC Detecting Condition Open or short in solenoid circuit continues for 0.05 seconds or more.

Trouble Area

Brake actuator

HINT: C0226/21, C0236/22, C0246/23 and C0256/24: The skid control ECU begins to detect these DTCs when the vehicle speed exceeds 4 mph (6 km/h).

BC


BC–55

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

WIRING DIAGRAM Skid Control ECU with Actuator

M

Motor Relay

Solenoid Relay

GND1

+BM

GND2

+BS

ABS1/ VSC1

ABS2/VSC2

ALT

Battery

C136887E01

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

1

BC

RECONFIRM DTC (a) Clear the DTC(s) (See page BC-25). (b) Start the engine. (c) Drive the vehicle at 4 mph (6 km/h) or more to activate the initial check. (d) Check if the same DTC(s) is output (See page BC-25).

Result Result

Proceed to

DTC output

A


BC–56

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM Result

Proceed to

DTC not output

B

HINT: The DTCs may be stored due to a malfunction in the connector terminal. B A REPLACE BRAKE ACTUATOR

BC

END


BC–57

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

DTC

C0273/13 Open in ABS Motor Relay Circuit

DTC

C0274/14 Short to B+ in ABS Motor Relay Circuit

DESCRIPTION The ABS motor relay supplies the power to the ABS pump motor. While the ABS is activated, the skid control ECU switches the motor relay ON and operates the ABS pump motor. DTC No.

DTC Detecting Conditions

C0273/13

When either of following conditions (1 or 2) detected: 1. All of following conditions continue for 0.2 seconds or more. (a) IG1 terminal voltage between 9.5 V and 17.2 V. (b) During initial check or ABS operation. (c) Relay contact open when relay on. 2. Both of following conditions continue for 0.2 seconds or more. (a) IG1 terminal voltage 9.5 V or less. (b) Relay contact remains open when relay on.

Trouble Areas

• • •

ABS1/VSC1 fuse Wire harness (+BM circuit) Brake actuator (skid control ECU)

C0274/14

When motor relay off, motor relay remains closed for 4 seconds or more.

• • •

ABS1/VSC1 fuse Wire harness (+BM circuit) Brake actuator (skid control ECU)

HINT: C0273/13 and C0274/14: The skid control ECU begins to detect these DTCs when the vehicle speed exceeds 4 mph (6 km/h).

WIRING DIAGRAM See page BC-52.

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

1

INSPECT FUSE (ABS1/VSC1) (a) Remove the ABS1/VSC1 fuse from the engine room R/ B. (b) Measure the resistance. Standard resistance: Below 1 Ω

Engine Room R/B:

NG

CHECK FOR SHORTS IN ALL HARNESSES AND CONNECTORS CONNECTED TO FUSE AND REPLACE FUSE

BC ABS1/VSC1 fuse C117863E05

OK


BC–58

2

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (BATTERY - SKID CONTROL ECU - BODY GROUND) (a) Disconnect the skid control ECU connector. (b) Measure the voltage. Standard voltage

Skid Control ECU (harness side connector):

A15

GND1

Specified Condition

A15-23 (+BM) - Body ground

11 to 14 V

(c) Measure the resistance Standard resistance  

+BM

Tester Connection

 



  

    

           

Tester Connection

Specified Condition

A15-2 (GND1) - Body ground

Below 1 â„Ś

A15-24 (GND2) - Body ground

Below 1 â„Ś

NG

GND2

REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS OR CONNECTOR

C117862E02

OK

3

PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING INTELLIGENT TESTER (ABS MOTOR RELAY) (a) (b) (c) (d) (e)

Intelligent Tester

DLC3

Connect the intelligent tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch on. Turn the tester on. Clear the DTCs (See page BC-25). Perform the active test using the intelligent tester. Select the following menu items: Chassis / ABS/VSC/ TRC / Active Test.

CAN VIM C115104E01

ACTIVE TEST: ABS Item (Display) MOTOR RELAY

Vehicle Condition / Test Details Turns ABS motor relay ON / OFF

(f)

BC

Diagnostic Note Operating sound of motor can be heard

Check for the operation sound of the ABS motor when operating it with the intelligent tester. OK: The operation sound of the ABS motor can be heard.

NG

REPLACE BRAKE ACTUATOR

OK

4

RECONFIRM DTC (a) Clear the DTC(s) (See page BC-25). (b) Start the engine.


BC–59

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

(c) Drive the vehicle at 4 mph (6 km/h) or more to activate the initial check. (d) Check if the same DTC(s) is output (See page BC-25). Result Result

Proceed to

DTC output

A

DTC not output

B

B

END

A REPLACE BRAKE ACTUATOR

BC


BC–60

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

DTC

C0278/11 Open in ABS Solenoid Relay Circuit

DTC

C0279/12 Short to B+ in ABS Solenoid Relay Circuit

DESCRIPTION The solenoid relay supplies power to the ABS solenoid. After the ignition switch is turned on, the vehicle speed has reached 3 mph (5 km/h) and the solenoid is determined to be normal by the initial check self-diagnosis, the relay switches on. If any open or short circuits are detected, the relay switches off. These DTCs may be set if the voltage supply to the solenoid relay (+BS) falls below the DTC detection threshold due to the battery or alternator outputs being insufficient. DTC No.

DTC Detecting Condition

C0278/11

When either of following conditions (1 or 2) detected: 1. Both of following conditions continue for 0.2 seconds or more. (a) IG1 terminal voltage between 9.5 V and 17.2 V. (b) Solenoid relay contact open when relay on. 2. Both of following conditions continue for 0.2 seconds or more. (a) IG1 terminal voltage becomes lower than 9.5 V when relay turned on. (b) Relay contact remains open.

Trouble Areas

• • •

ABS2/VSC2 fuse Wire harness (+BS) Brake actuator (skid control ECU)

C0279/12

Immediately after ignition switch turned on, solenoid relay contact closed for 0.2 seconds or more when relay off.

• • •

ABS2/VSC2 fuse Wire harness (+BS) Brake actuator (skid control ECU)

HINT: C0278/11 and C0279/12: The skid control ECU begins to detect these DTCs when the vehicle speed exceeds 4 mph (6 km/h).

WIRING DIAGRAM See page BC-52.

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

1

INSPECT FUSE (ABS2/VSC2) (a) Remove the ABS2/VSC2 fuse from the engine room R/ B. (b) Measure the resistance. Standard resistance: Below 1 Ω

Engine Room R/B:

BC

NG

ABS2/VSC2 fuse C117851E04

CHECK FOR SHORTS IN ALL HARNESSES AND CONNECTORS CONNECTED TO FUSE AND REPLACE FUSE


BC–61

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

OK

2

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (BATTERY - SKID CONTROL ECU - BODY GROUND) (a) Disconnect the skid control ECU connector. (b) Measure the voltage. Standard voltage

Skid Control ECU (harness side connector):

A15

GND1

+BS

Tester Connection

Specified Condition

A15-1 (+BS) - Body ground

11 to 14 V

(c) Measure the resistance. Standard resistance 









  

    

           

GND2

Tester Connection

Specified Condition

A15-2 (GND1) - Body ground

Below 1 â„Ś

A15-24 (GND2) - Body ground

Below 1 â„Ś

NG

REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS OR CONNECTOR

C117862E01

OK

3

RECONFIRM DTC (a) Clear the DTC(s) (See page BC-25). (b) Start the engine. (c) Drive the vehicle at 4 mph (6 km/h) or more to activate the initial check. (d) Check if the same DTC(s) is output (See page BC-25).

Result Result

Proceed to

DTC output

A

DTC not output

B

B

END

A REPLACE BRAKE ACTUATOR

BC


BC–62

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

DTC

C1241/41

Low Battery Positive Voltage or Abnormally High Battery Positive Voltage

DESCRIPTION When there is an abnormality in the power supply circuit of the brake actuator (skid control ECU), the skid control ECU sets a DTC and the operation is prohibited by the fail-safe function. This DTC is set when the voltage supplied to terminal IG1 is outside the DTC detection threshold, due to abnormalities in the battery, power source circuits or charging circuits such as the alternator circuit. The fail-safe function is canceled when the voltage to terminal IG1 returns to normal. DTC No.

DTC Detecting Conditions

C1241/41

When any of following conditions detected: 1. At vehicle speed of 2 mph (3 km/h) or more, IG1 terminal voltage 9.5 V or less for 10 seconds or more. 2. When IG1 terminal voltage below 9.5 V, relay off condition continues for 0.2 seconds or more despite ECU turning motor relay on. 3. When IG1 terminal voltage below 9.5 V, wheel speed sensor power source voltage decreases for 60 seconds or more.

Trouble Areas

• • • • • •

Battery Charging system ECU-IG fuse AM1 fuse IG1 relay Brake actuator (skid control ECU)

WIRING DIAGRAM

Skid Control ECU IG1 ECU-IG

IG1

AM1

Ignition Switch ALT GND1

BC

Battery

GND2

C117855E01


BC–63

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

1

CHECK SKID CONTROL ECU TERMINAL VOLTAGE (a) Disconnect the skid control ECU connector. (b) Turn the ignition switch on. (c) Measure the voltage. Standard voltage

Skid Control ECU (harness side connector):

A15

 

 



  

Tester Connection

Specified Condition

A15-25 (IG1) - Body ground

11 to 14 V

NG

    

Go to step 3

           

IG1 C117862E04

OK

2

RECONFIRM DTC (a) Clear the DTC (See page BC-25). (b) Drive the vehicle at 2 mph (3 km/h) or more for several seconds. (c) Check if the same DTC is output (See page BC-25).

Result Result

Proceed to

DTC output

A

DTC not output

B

B

END

A REPLACE BRAKE ACTUATOR

BC


BC–64

3

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

INSPECT FUSES (ECU-IG, AM1) (a) Remove the ECU-IG fuse and AM1 fuse from the main body ECU. (b) Measure the resistance. Standard resistance: Below 1 Ω

Main Body ECU:

NG

ECU-IG

CHECK FOR SHORTS IN ALL HARNESSES AND CONNECTORS CONNECTED TO FUSE AND REPLACE FUSE

AM1 C118694E01

OK

4

INSPECT BATTERY (a) Check the battery voltage. Standard voltage: 11 to 14 V NG

OK

BC

CHECK CHARGING SYSTEM


BC–65

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

5

INSPECT IG1 RELAY (a) Remove the IG1 relay from the main body ECU.

Main Body ECU:

IG1 Relay C118689E01

(b) Measure the resistance. Standard resistance 







Tester Connection

Condition

Specified Condition

3-5

Always

10 kΩ or higher

3-5

Apply B+ between terminals 1 and 2

Below 1 Ω

 

 

NG

REPLACE IG1 RELAY

C113445

OK

BC


BC–66

6

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (SKID CONTROL ECU - BODY GROUND) (a) Disconnect the skid control ECU connector. (b) Measure the resistance. Standard resistance

Skid Control ECU (harness side connector): GND1

A15











  

     

GND2 C117862E03

REPLACE BRAKE ACTUATOR

BC

Specified Condition Below 1 Ω

A15-24 (GND2) - Body ground

Below 1 Ω

NG

    

     

OK

Tester Connection A15-2 (GND1) - Body ground

REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS OR CONNECTOR


BC–67

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

DTC

C1249/49 Open in Stop Light Switch Circuit

DESCRIPTION The skid control ECU detects the brake operating conditions through a signal transmitted by the stop light switch. The skid control ECU incorporates an open circuit detection circuit. This DTC is set under either of the following conditions: • An open is detected in the stop light signal input line when the stop light switch is off. • An open is detected in the stop light circuit lead to the ground when the stop light switch is off. DTC No.

DTC Detecting Conditions

C1249/49

When IG1 terminal voltage 9.5 to 17.2 V, open circuit of stop light switch continues for 0.3 seconds or more.

Trouble Areas • • •

Stop light switch Stop light switch circuit Brake actuator (skid control ECU)

WIRING DIAGRAM

Skid Control ECU

Stop Light Switch STOP STP Rear Combination Light (LH)

Open Detection Circuit

ALT Rear Combination Light (RH)

Center Stop Light

BC

Battery

C136888E02


BC–68

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

1

CHECK STOP LIGHT SWITCH OPERATION (a) (b) (c) (d)

Intelligent Tester

DLC3

Connect the intelligent tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch on. Turn the tester on. Select the following menu items: DIAGNOSIS / OBD/ MOBD / select vehicle / ABS / DATA LIST.

CAN VIM C115104E01

DATA LIST: ABS Item (Display)

Measurement Item / Range (Display)

Normal Conditions

STOP LAMP SW

Stop light switch / ON or OFF

ON: Brake pedal depressed OFF: Brake pedal released

(e) Check that "STOP LAMP SW" is turned ON and OFF when the brake pedal is depressed and released. OK: "STOP LAMP SW" is turned ON and OFF in accordance with the operation of the brake pedal. NG

Go to step 3

OK

2

CHECK SKID CONTROL ECU TERMINAL VOLTAGE (STP) (a) Disconnect the skid control ECU connector. (b) Measure the voltage. Standard voltage

Skid Control ECU (harness side connector): STP

A15

 

BC

 



  

Tester Connection

Switch Condition

Specified Condition

A15-10 (STP) - Body ground

Brake pedal depressed

8 to 14 V

A15-10 (STP) - Body ground

Brake pedal released

Below 4.0 V

    

     

NG

     

C117862E05

OK REPLACE BRAKE ACTUATOR

Go to step 5


BC–69

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

3

INSPECT FUSE (STOP) (a) Remove the STOP fuse from the main body ECU. (b) Measure the resistance. Standard resistance: Below 1 Ω

Main Body ECU:

NG

CHECK FOR SHORTS IN ALL HARNESSES AND CONNECTORS CONNECTED TO FUSE AND REPLACE FUSE

STOP C118695E01

OK

4

INSPECT STOP LIGHT SWITCH ASSEMBLY (a) Disconnect the stop light switch connector. (b) Measure the resistance. Standard resistance

Stop Light Switch:

2

4 Released

Tester Connection

Switch Condition

Specified Condition

1-2

Switch pin released

Below 1 Ω

1

3

NG

3-4

Switch pin released

10 kΩ or higher

1-2

Switch pin pushed in

10 kΩ or higher

3-4

Switch pin pushed in

Below 1 Ω

REPLACE STOP LIGHT SWITCH ASSEMBLY

Pushed in

C118699E04

OK

BC


BC–70

5

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (SKID CONTROL ECU - STOP LIGHT SWITCH)

Skid Control ECU (harness side connector): STP

(a) Disconnect the skid control ECU connector. (b) Disconnect the stop light switch connector. (c) Measure the resistance. Standard resistance

A15

 

 



  

    

NG

           

Tester Connection

Specified Condition

A15-10 (STP) - A13-1

Below 1 â„Ś

REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS OR CONNECTOR

Stop Light Switch (harness side connector):

A13

 

 

A13-1 C118696E01

OK

6

RECONFIRM DTC (a) Clear the DTC (See page BC-25). (b) Check if the same DTC is output (See page BC-25).

Result Result

Proceed to

DTC output

A

DTC not output

B

B A

BC

REPLACE BRAKE ACTUATOR

END


BC–71

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

DTC

C1251/51 Open in Pump Motor Circuit

DESCRIPTION The motor relay (semiconductor relay) is housed in the skid control ECU and drives the pump motor based on a signal from the skid control ECU. DTC No.

C1251/51

DTC Detecting Conditions

Trouble Areas

When either of following conditions detected: 1. Actuator pump motor does not operate properly. 2. Open in actuator pump motor circuit continues for at least 2 seconds.

Brake actuator

WIRING DIAGRAM See page BC-52.

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

1

CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT (a) Check that the battery voltage, power source voltage, and the ground condition of the skid control ECU are normal. OK: The battery voltage, power source voltage, and the ground condition of the skid control ECU are normal. NG

REPAIR POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT

OK

2

RECONFIRM DTC (a) Clear the DTC (See page BC-25). (b) Start the engine. (c) Drive the vehicle at a speed of 4 mph (6 km/h) or more for several seconds. (d) Check if the same DTC is output (See pageBC-25 ).

Result Result

Proceed to

DTC output

A

DTC not output

B

B A REPLACE BRAKE ACTUATOR

END

BC


BC–72

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

DTC

U0073/94 Control Module Communication Bus OFF

DESCRIPTION DTC No.

DTC Detecting Conditions

Trouble Areas

U0073/94

When either of following conditions detected: 1. After data output from skid control ECU completed, output continues for 5 seconds or more. 2. Bus off condition occurs once or more per 0.1 second 10 times in succession.

CAN communication system

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

1

RECONFIRM DTC (a) Clear the DTC (See page BC-25). (b) Check if the same DTC is output (See page BC-25).

Result Result

Proceed to

DTC output

A

DTC not output

B

B A REPAIR CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM

BC

END


BC–73

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

ABS Warning Light Remains ON DESCRIPTION If any of the following conditions are detected, the ABS warning light remains on: 1. The ECU connectors are disconnected from the skid control ECU. 2. There is a malfunction in the skid control ECU internal circuit. 3. There is an open or short in the wire harness between the combination meter and the skid control ECU. HINT: The intelligent tester may not be used when there is a malfunction in the skid control ECU.

WIRING DIAGRAM

Combination Meter

Skid Control ECU CANH

CAN I/F

CANL

CAN Controller CPU

LED Driver ABS

MET

IG2

Ignition Switch MAIN

AM2

BC

Battery

C117853E01


BC–74

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

1

CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (a) Check if the CAN communication system DTC is output (See page CA-22).

Result Result

Proceed to

DTC not output

A

DTC output

B

B

REPAIR CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM

A

2

CHECK CONNECTOR CONNECTION CONDITION (a) Check the skid control ECU connector condition. OK: The connector is securely connected. NG

CONNECT CONNECTOR CORRECTLY

OK

3

PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING INTELLIGENT TESTER (ABS WARNING LIGHT) (a) (b) (c) (d)

Intelligent Tester

DLC3

Connect the intelligent tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch on. Turn the tester on. Select the following menu items: DIAGNOSIS / OBD/ MOBD / select vehicle / ABS / ACTIVE TEST / ABS WARN LAMP.

CAN VIM C115104E01

ACTIVE TEST: ABS

BC

Item (Display)

Test Details

Diagnostic Notes

ABS WARN LAMP

Turns ABS warning light ON and OFF

Observe combination meter

(e) Check that the ABS warning light turns on and off in the combination meter using the intelligent tester. OK: The ABS warning light turns ON and OFF in accordance with the intelligent tester operation. HINT: When the ABS warning light remains illuminated, an open in the wire harness of the combination meter or abnormalities in the meter circuit should be considered. NG

CHECK COMBINATION METER CIRCUIT


BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

BC–75

OK REPLACE BRAKE ACTUATOR

BC


BC–76

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

ABS Warning Light does not Come ON WIRING DIAGRAM See page BC-70.

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

1

CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (a) Check if the CAN communication system DTC is output (See page CA-22).

Result Result

Proceed to

DTC not output

A

DTC output

B

B

REPAIR CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM

A

2

PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING INTELLIGENT TESTER (ABS WARNING LIGHT) (a) (b) (c) (d)

Intelligent Tester

DLC3

Connect the intelligent tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch on. Turn the tester on. Select the following menu items: DIAGNOSIS / OBD/ MOBD / select vehicle / ABS / ACTIVE TEST / ABS WARN LAMP.

CAN VIM C115104E01

ACTIVE TEST: ABS Item (Display)

Test Details

Diagnostic Notes

ABS WARN LAMP

Turns ABS warning light ON and OFF

Observe combination meter

(e) Check that the ABS warning light turns on and off in the combination meter using the intelligent tester. OK: The ABS warning light turns ON and OFF in accordance with the intelligent tester operation.

BC

NG OK REPLACE BRAKE ACTUATOR

CHECK COMBINATION METER CIRCUIT


BC–77

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

Brake Warning Light Remains ON DESCRIPTION If any of the following conditions are detected, the BRAKE warning light remains on: 1. The ECU connectors are disconnected from the skid control ECU. 2. The brake fluid level is insufficient. 3. The parking brake is applied. 4. The EBD is defective.

WIRING DIAGRAM

Skid Control ECU

CANH Combination Meter

CANL

Main Body ECU

CAN I/F

CANL CAN Controller

CANH PKB

CPU

Parking Brake Switch LED Driver

IG2

MET

BRAKE

Brake Fluid Level Warning Switch

BC

Ignition Switch

MAIN

AM2

Battery

C139985E01


BC–78

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

1

PREPARE FOR INSPECTION (a) Check that both of the following conditions are satisfied. • The brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir is correct. • The parking brake is released. HINT: When the ABS warning light remains illuminated, repair the malfunctions in the ABS system first.

NEXT

2

CHECK DTC (a) Check if any ABS DTCs are output (See page BC-25).

Result Result

Proceed to

DTC not output

A

DTC output

B

B

REPAIR CIRCUITS INDICATED BY OUTPUT DTCS

A

3

CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (a) Check if the CAN communication system DTC is output (See page CA-22).

Result Result

Proceed to

DTC not output

A

DTC output

B

B

BC

REPAIR CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM

A

4

CHECK CONNECTOR CONNECTION CONDITION (a) Check if the skid control ECU connector is connected securely. OK: The connector is connected securely. NG

CONNECTOR CORRECTLY


BC–79

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

OK

5

CHECK PARKING BRAKE SWITCH ASSEMBLY (a) (b) (c) (d)

Intelligent Tester

DLC3

Connect the intelligent tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch on. Turn the tester on. Select the following menu items: DIAGNOSIS / OBD/ MOBD / select vehicle / ABS / DATA LIST / PARKING BRAKE SW.

CAN VIM C115104E01

DATA LIST: ABS Item (Display)

Measurement Item / Range (Display)

PARKING BRAKE SW

Parking brake switch / ON or OFF

Normal Condition ON: Parking brake applied OFF: Parking brake released

(e) Check that "ON" and "OFF" are properly indicated on the tester display in accordance with the parking brake lever operation. OK: Tester display changes in accordance with the parking brake lever operation. NG

Go to step 9

OK

6

INSPECT BRAKE FLUID LEVEL WARNING SWITCH (a) Remove the reservoir tank cap and strainer. (b) Disconnect the brake fluid level warning switch connector. (c) Measure the resistance. HINT: There is a float inside the reservoir. Its position can be changed by increasing or decreasing the brake fluid level. Standard resistance

Brake Fluid Level Warning Switch:

A10

2 1

C118697E01

Tester Connection

Condition

Specified Condition

A10-1 - A10-2

Float up (Switch OFF)

1.9 to 2.1 kΩ

A10-1 - A10-2

Float down (Switch ON)

Below 1 Ω

HINT: If there is no problem after the above check is finished, adjust the brake fluid level to the MAX level. NG

REPLACE BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER RESERVOIR SUB-ASSEMBLY

BC


BC–80

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

OK

7

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (COMBINATION METER - BRAKE FLUID LEVEL WARNING SWITCH) (a) Disconnect the D2 combination meter connector. (b) Disconnect the brake fluid level warning switch connector. (c) Measure the resistance. Standard resistance

Brake Fluid Level Warning Switch (harness side connector):

A10

1

Tester Connection

2

NG

Specified Condition

D2-2 - A10-1

Below 1 Ω

D2-2 - Body ground

10 kΩ or higher

A10-2 - Body ground

10 kΩ or higher

REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS OR CONNECTOR

Combination Meter (harness side connector):

D2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516

D2-2 C118702E01

OK

8

INSPECT COMBINATION METER (a) Inspect the combination meter assembly (See page ME24 or ME-88). NG

REPLACE COMBINATION METER

OK

BC

REPLACE BRAKE ACTUATOR

9

INSPECT PARKING BRAKE SWITCH ASSEMBLY (a) Disconnect the parking brake switch connector.


BC–81

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

(b) Measure the resistance. Standard resistance

Parking Brake Switch: Released Pushed in

D21 C118703E01

Tester Connection

Condition

Specified Condition

D21-1 - Body ground

Parking brake switch ON (Switch pin released)

Below 1 Ω

D21-1 - Body ground

Parking brake switch OFF (Switch pin pushed in)

10 kΩ or higher

NG

REPLACE PARKING BRAKE SWITCH ASSEMBLY

OK

10

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (MAIN BODY ECU - PARKING BRAKE SWITCH ASSEMBLY) (a) Disconnect connector 4C of the main body ECU (See page BC-21). (b) Disconnect the parking brake switch connector. (c) Measure the resistance. Standard resistance

Main Body ECU: PKB

Tester Connection

4C

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

NG Parking Brake Switch:

D21

Specified Condition

4C-2 (PKB) - D21-1

Below 1 Ω

4C-2 (PKB) - Body ground

10 kΩ or higher

REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS OR CONNECTOR

1

C120360E01

OK REPLACE MAIN BODY ECU

BC


BC–82

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

Brake Warning Light does not Come ON WIRING DIAGRAM See page BC-74.

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

1

CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (a) Check if the CAN communication system DTC is output (See page CA-22).

Result Result

Proceed to

DTC not output

A

DTC output

B

B

REPAIR CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM

A

2

PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING INTELLIGENT TESTER (BRAKE WARNING LIGHT) (a) (b) (c) (d)

Intelligent Tester

DLC3

Connect the intelligent tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch on. Turn the tester on. Select the following menu items: DIAGNOSIS / OBD/ MOBD / select vehicle /ACTIVE TEST / BRAKE WARN LAMP.

CAN VIM C115104E01

ACTIVE TEST: ABS Item (Display) BRAKE WARN LAMP

Test Details

Diagnostic Note

Turns BRAKE warning light ON and OFF

Observe combination meter

(e) Check that the BRAKE warning light turns on and off in the combination meter using the intelligent tester. OK: The BRAKE warning light turns ON and OFF in accordance with the intelligent tester operation.

BC

OK

REPLACE BRAKE ACTUATOR

NG

3

INSPECT COMBINATION METER (a) Inspect the combination meter (See page ME-24 or ME84).


BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

NG

BC–83

REPLACE COMBINATION METER

OK REPLACE BRAKE ACTUATOR

BC


BC–84

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

TC and CG Terminal Circuit DESCRIPTION Connecting terminals TC and CG of the DLC3 causes the skid control ECU to display 2-digit DTCs by flashing the ABS warning light.

WIRING DIAGRAM

ECM

Skid Control ECU

CANH

CANH

CANL

CANL

DLC3

TC

TC

CG

C118698E01

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

1

BC

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (DLC3 - ECM) (a) Turn the ignition switch off. (b) Disconnect the ECM connector.


BC–85

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

(c) Measure the resistance. Standard resistance

DLC3:

Tester Connection

Specified Condition

D15-13 (TC) - A21-27 (TC)

Below 1 Ω

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

D15

NG 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS OR CONNECTOR

TC ECM:

A21

TC H100899E01

OK

2

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (DLC3 - BODY GROUND)

DLC3:

D15

(a) Measure the resistance. Standard resistance

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

NG

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

CG

Tester Connection

Specified Condition

D15-4 (CG) - Body ground

Below 1 Ω

REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS OR CONNECTOR

F100115E26

OK

3

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ECM - BODY GROUND)

BC

(a) Disconnect the ECM connector. (b) Measure the resistance. Standard resistance

ECM:

A21

Tester Connection

Specified Condition

A21-27 (TC) - Body ground

10 kΩ or higher

NG TC G100098E01

REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS OR CONNECTOR


BC–86

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

OK

4

REPLACE ECM (a) Replace the ECM. (b) Check for DTCs of the ECM (See page ES-34).

Result Result

Proceed to

DTC not output

A

DTC output

B

B A END

BC

REPAIR CIRCUITS INDICATED BY OUTPUT DTCS


BC–87

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

TS and CG Terminal Circuit DESCRIPTION In sensor check mode, malfunctions of the speed sensor that cannot be detected when the vehicle is stopped can be detected by driving the vehicle. Transition to sensor check mode can be performed by connecting terminals TS and CG of the DLC3 and turning the ignition switch from off to on.

WIRING DIAGRAM

Power Steering ECU

Skid Control ECU

CANH

CANH

CANL

CANL

DLC3

TS

TS

CG

C118698E02

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

1

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (DLC3 - POWER STEERING ECU) (a) Turn the ignition switch off. (b) Disconnect the power steering ECU connector.

BC


BC–88

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

(c) Measure the resistance. Standard resistance

DLC3:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

D15

NG

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Tester Connection

Specified Condition

D15-12 (TS) - D31-11 (TS)

Below 1 Ω

REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS OR CONNECTOR

TS Power Steering ECU:

D31

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112

TS

C120359E01

OK

2

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (DLC3 - BODY GROUND)

DLC3:

D15

(a) Measure the resistance. Standard resistance

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

NG

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

CG

Tester Connection

Specified Condition

D15-4 (CG) - Body ground

Below 1 Ω

REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS OR CONNECTOR

F100115E26

OK

3

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (POWER STEERING ECU - BODY GROUND)

BC

(a) Disconnect the power steering ECU connector. (b) Measure the resistance. Standard resistance

Power Steering ECU:

D31

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112

TS

Tester Connection

Specified Condition

D31-11 (TS) - Body ground

10 kΩ or higher

NG

C118701E01

REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS OR CONNECTOR


BC–89

BRAKE CONTROL – ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

OK

4

REPLACE POWER STEERING ECU (a) Replace the power steering ECU. (b) Check for DTCs of the power steering ECU (See page PS-25).

Result Result

Proceed to

DTC not output

A

DTC output

B

B

REPAIR CIRCUITS INDICATED BY OUTPUT DTCS

A END

BC


BRAKE CONTROL – BRAKE ACTUATOR

BC–87

BRAKE ACTUATOR BRAKE CONTROL

COMPONENTS

BATTERY CLAMP SUB-ASSEMBLY

3.5 (36, 31 in.*lbf)

BATTERY

BATTERY TRAY

17 (175, 13)

x5

BC

BATTERY CARRIER

N*m (kgf*cm, ft*lbf) : Specified torque C107526E05


BC–88

BRAKE CONTROL – BRAKE ACTUATOR

15 (155, 11)

15 (155, 11)

* 14 (143, 10)

* 14 (143, 10)

15 (155, 11)

* 14 (143, 10)

15 (155, 11)

BRAKE TUBE

* 14 (143, 10) 15 (155, 11)

* 14 (143, 10) 15 (155, 11)

* 14 (143, 10) BRAKE TUBE

BRAKE TUBE CLAMP 15 (155, 11)

* 14 (143, 10) 15 (155, 11)

* 14 (143, 10) 15 (155, 11)

BRAKE ACTUATOR

* 14 (143, 10) BRAKE TUBE

19 (194, 14)

15 (155, 11)

* 14 (143, 10)

BC

BRAKE ACTUATOR BRACKET ASSEMBLY

5.4 (55, 48 in.*lbf)

19 (194, 14)

BRAKE ACTUATOR CONNECTOR N*m (kgf*cm, ft*lbf) : Specified torque

19 (194, 14)

Non-reusable part * For use with SST C116920E03


BRAKE CONTROL – BRAKE ACTUATOR

BC–89

REMOVAL 1.

DRAIN BRAKE FLUID NOTICE: Immediately wash off any brake fluid that comes into contact with any painted surfaces.

2.

REMOVE BATTERY (See page EM-122)

3.

REMOVE BATTERY TRAY

4.

REMOVE BATTERY CARRIER (See page EM-125)

5.

REMOVE BRAKE ACTUATOR (a) Remove the clip and disconnect the wire harness. (b) Move the lock lever in the direction indicated by the arrow to release the lock and disconnect the brake actuator connector from the actuator.

C121850

(c) Using SST, separate the brake tube from the front flexible hose. SST 09023-00100

SST

C116914E01

(d) Using SST, separate the 2 brake tubes from the brake tube No. 1 way. SST 09023-00100

SST C116915E01

(e) Using SST, separate the 2 brake tubes from the brake master cylinder. SST 09023-00100

SST

C121690E01

BC


BC–90

BRAKE CONTROL – BRAKE ACTUATOR

(f)

Using SST, separate the 6 brake tubes from the brake actuator. SST 09023-00100

C116916

To Front Wheel RH

(g) Use tags or labels to identify the place to reconnect each brake tube.

To Rear Wheel LH To Front Wheel LH

To Master Cylinder

To Master Cylinder

To Rear Wheel RH

C116917E01

(h) Disconnect the brake tube clamp.

C116918

(i)

BC C116921

Remove the 3 bolts and the actuator with bracket.


BRAKE CONTROL – BRAKE ACTUATOR

6.

BC–91

REMOVE BRAKE ACTUATOR BRACKET ASSEMBLY (a) Remove the 2 nuts and the bracket.

C121843

INSTALLATION 1.

INSTALL BRAKE ACTUATOR BRACKET ASSEMBLY (a) Install the actuator bracket with the 2 nuts. Torque: 5.4 N*m (55 kgf*cm, 48 in.*lbf) NOTICE: Do not remove the hole plug before connecting the brake tube. New actuators are filled with brake fluid.

2.

INSTALL BRAKE ACTUATOR (a) Provisionally install the 3 bolts onto the actuator bracket in the sequence shown in the illustration. (b) Tighten the 3 bolts in the sequence shown in the illustration. Torque: 19 N*m (194 kgf*cm, 14 ft.*lbf)

C121843

3 1 2 C116921E01

(c) Connect a new brake tube clamp.

C116918

BC


BC–92

BRAKE CONTROL – BRAKE ACTUATOR

To Front Wheel RH

To Rear Wheel LH To Front Wheel LH

To Master Cylinder

To Master Cylinder

To Rear Wheel RH

(d) Using SST, install each brake tube into the correct position of the actuator, as shown in the illustration. SST 09023-00100 Torque: for use without SST 15 N*m (155 kgf*cm, 11 ft.*lbf) for use with SST 14 N*m (143 kgf*cm, 10 ft.*lbf) HINT: • Use a torque wrench with a fulcrum length of 300 mm (11.81 in.). • This torque value is effective when SST is parallel to a torque wrench.

C116917E01

SST

C121690E01

(e) Using SST, install the 2 brake tubes onto the brake master cylinder. SST 09023-00100 Torque: for use without SST 15 N*m (155 kgf*cm, 11 ft.*lbf) for use with SST 14 N*m (143 kgf*cm, 10 ft.*lbf) HINT: • Use a torque wrench with a fulcrum length of 300 mm (11.81 in.). • This torque value is effective when SST is parallel to a torque wrench. (f)

SST C116915E01

BC SST

C116914E01

Using SST, install the 2 brake tubes onto the brake tube No. 1 way. SST 09023-00100 Torque: for use without SST 15 N*m (155 kgf*cm, 11 ft.*lbf) for use with SST 14 N*m (143 kgf*cm, 10 ft.*lbf) HINT: • Use a torque wrench with a fulcrum length of 300 mm (11.81 in.). • This torque value is effective when SST is parallel to a torque wrench.

(g) Using SST, install the brake tube onto the front flexible hose. SST 09023-00100 Torque: for use without SST 15 N*m (155 kgf*cm, 11 ft.*lbf) for use with SST 14 N*m (143 kgf*cm, 10 ft.*lbf) HINT: • Use a torque wrench with a fulcrum length of 300 mm (11.81 in.). • This torque value is effective when SST is parallel to a torque wrench. (h) Connect the brake actuator connector.


BRAKE CONTROL – BRAKE ACTUATOR

BC–93

3.

INSTALL BATTERY CARRIER (See page EM-145)

4.

INSTALL BATTERY TRAY

5.

INSTALL BATTERY (See page EM-148)

6.

FILL RESERVOIR WITH BRAKE FLUID (See page BR10)

7.

BLEED MASTER CYLINDER (See page BR-10)

8.

BLEED BRAKE LINE (See page BR-12)

9.

CHECK FLUID LEVEL IN RESERVOIR (See page BR12)

10. CHECK FOR BRAKE FLUID LEAKAGE 11. CHECK ACTUATOR WITH INTELLIGENT TESTER (See page BC-14)

BC


BC–94

BRAKE CONTROL – FRONT SPEED SENSOR

FRONT SPEED SENSOR BRAKE CONTROL

COMPONENTS

FRONT SPEED SENSOR

29 (300, 22) 6.0 (61, 53 in.*lbf) 8.5 (87, 75 in.*lbf)

FRONT FENDER LINER

BC

N*m (kgf*cm, ft*lbf) :Specified torque C125281E01


BRAKE CONTROL – FRONT SPEED SENSOR

BC–95

REMOVAL 1.

DISCONNECT CABLE FROM NEGATIVE BATTERY TERMINAL

2.

REMOVE FRONT WHEEL

3.

REMOVE FRONT FENDER LINER (a) Remove the 3 screws, 6 clips and 4 grommets and remove the front fender liner.

4.

REMOVE FRONT SPEED SENSOR

C121848

(a) (b) (c) (d)

Remove the speed sensor clip from the body. Disconnect the speed sensor connector. Remove the 3 clips. Remove the bolt and separate the clamp from the body. (e) Remove the bolt and separate the clamp from the shock absorber. (f) Remove the bolt and remove the speed sensor from the steering knuckle. NOTICE: • Keep the speed sensor tip and installation portion free of foreign matter. • Remove the speed sensor without turning it from its original installation angle.

BC


BC–96

BRAKE CONTROL – FRONT SPEED SENSOR

INSPECTION 1.

BC

INSPECT FRONT SPEED SENSOR (a) Check the connector case and terminals for any deformation or corrosion. Standard: No deformation or corrosion. If necessary, replace the speed sensor.


BRAKE CONTROL – FRONT SPEED SENSOR

BC–97

INSTALLATION 1.

INSTALL FRONT SPEED SENSOR

C121848

(a) Install the speed sensor onto the steering knuckle with the bolt. Torque: 8.5 N*m (87 kgf*cm, 75 in.*lbf) NOTICE: • Check that the speed sensor tip and installation portion are free of foreign matter. • Install the speed sensor without turning it from its original installation angle. (b) Install the clamp onto the shock absorber with the bolt. Torque: 29 N*m (300 kgf*cm, 22 ft.*lbf) (c) Install the clamp onto the body with the bolt. Torque: 6.0 N*m (61 kgf*cm, 53 in.*lbf) (d) Install the 3 clips. (e) Connect the speed sensor connector. (f) Install the speed sensor clip onto the body. 2.

INSTALL FRONT FENDER LINER (a) Install the front fender liner with the 3 screws, 6 clips and 4 grommets. NOTICE: The speed sensor wire should not protrude beyond the front fender liner.

3.

INSTALL FRONT WHEEL Torque: 103 N*m (1,050 kgf*cm, 76 ft.*lbf)

4.

CONNECT CABLE TO NEGATIVE BATTERY TERMINAL Torque: 5.4 N*m (55 kgf*cm, 48 in.*lbf)

BC


BC–98

BRAKE CONTROL – FRONT SPEED SENSOR

5.

BC

CHECK ABS SENSOR SIGNAL (See page BC-14)


BC–98

BRAKE CONTROL – SKID CONTROL SENSOR

SKID CONTROL SENSOR BRAKE CONTROL

COMPONENTS

REAR AXLE HUB AND BEARING ASSEMBLY

SKID CONTROL SENSOR WIRE

x4 90 (918, 67)

REAR BRAKE DRUM SUB-ASSEMBLY SKID CONTROL SENSOR

BC

N*m (kgf*cm, ft*lbf) :Specified torque C108980E02


BRAKE CONTROL – SKID CONTROL SENSOR

BC–99

REMOVAL

Sensor Probe

SST

Bolt

Rotor

SST

C108982E01

1.

DISCONNECT CABLE FROM NEGATIVE BATTERY TERMINAL

2.

REMOVE REAR WHEEL

3.

REMOVE REAR BRAKE DRUM SUB-ASSEMBLY (See page BR-60)

4.

DISCONNECT SKID CONTROL SENSOR WIRE (See page AH-14)

5.

REMOVE REAR AXLE HUB AND BEARING ASSEMBLY (See page AH-14)

6.

REMOVE SKID CONTROL SENSOR (a) Install the 4 hub nuts and the 4 hub bolts onto the rear axle hub, and then fix the rear axle hub in a vice between aluminum plates. NOTICE: If the skid control sensor is dropped or heavily damaged, replace the rear axle hub and bearing. (b) Using a 3 mm pin punch and hammer, remove the 2 pins from SST (09520-00031) and remove the attachment (09521-00010). (c) Using SST and the 2 bolts (90101-12007), remove the skid control sensor from the rear axle hub. SST 09520-00031 (09520-00040), 09521-00020, 09950-00020 NOTICE: • Pull the skid control sensor off straight, being careful not to make contact with the skid control sensor rotor. • If the skid control sensor rotor is damaged or deformed, replace the rear axle hub and bearing. • Do not damage the skid control sensor or rear axle hub contact surfaces. • Keep the sensor rotor free of foreign matter.

BC


BC–100

BRAKE CONTROL – SKID CONTROL SENSOR

INSPECTION 1.

BC

INSPECT SKID CONTROL SENSOR (a) Check the connector case and terminals for any deformation or corrosion. Standard: No deformation or corrosion. If necessary, replace the speed sensor.


BRAKE CONTROL – SKID CONTROL SENSOR

BC–101

INSTALLATION 1.

INSTALL SKID CONTROL SENSOR (a) Wipe the sealant off the skid control sensor installation surface using white gasoline. NOTICE: Keep the sensor rotor free of foreign matter. (b) Install the skid control sensor onto the rear axle hub in the highest possible installation position. HINT: The distance between the installation holes should be larger on the upper side than the lower side.

Upward

C108983E01

SST

(c) Using SST and a press, install a new skid control sensor into the rear axle hub until it is flush with the end. SST 09214-76011 NOTICE: • Do not use a hammer when installing. • Check for any foreign matter on the sensor probe. • Press the skid control sensor in slowly without turning it.

Sensor Probe

Rotor C108984E01

2.

INSTALL REAR AXLE HUB AND BEARING ASSEMBLY (See page AH-14)

3.

INSPECT REAR AXLE HUB BEARING (See page AH2)

4.

CONNECT SKID CONTROL SENSOR WIRE (See page AH-14)

5.

INSTALL REAR BRAKE DRUM SUB-ASSEMBLY

6.

ADJUST REAR DRUM BRAKE SHOE CLEARANCE (See page BR-67)

7.

INSTALL REAR WHEEL Torque: 103 N*m (1,050 kgf*cm, 76 ft.*lbf)

8.

CONNECT CABLE TO NEGATIVE BATTERY TERMINAL Torque: 5.4 N*m (55 kgf*cm, 48 in.*lbf)

9.

CHECK ABS SENSOR SIGNAL (See page BC-14)

BC


MX–1

C50 MANUAL TRANSAXLE – MANUAL TRANSAXLE SYSTEM

MANUAL TRANSAXLE SYSTEM PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE Use the table below to help find the cause of the problem. The numbers indicate the likelihood of the possible causes in descending order. Check each part in order. Replace parts as necessary. Symptom

Noise

Oil leakage

Hard or impossible to shift

Jumps out of gear

Suspected area

See page

1. Oil (Level low)

MX-2